Home

User Manual

1. kk ae End of Default SCS Facility assignment portion SE TT k k Enter the default alarm priority It is the priority that will be used for any alarm that has no priority specified Value may be in the range 1 500 50 Enter the priority to use for the alarms created from the input file that do not have an explicit priority specified The priority entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it Selected default alarm priority iS eee eee eee 1 30 Is this correct y n y Entera y toconfirm or an n to re enter the default alarm priority If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the value If you entered a y the script will proceed to check the input data 16 If there are errors with the input data they will be displayed and you will need to correct those errors the re run the scsgen script again to process the corrected input file If no errors are found the input group and alarm records will be entered into the Picture Perfect database You will see messages similar to the following Checking input group f Installing Records DBLOAD Load Utility Copyright C Informix Software Serial Number 100 Row s loaded so f Table input group had 100 Row s loaded so f Statement UPDATE STA Statement processed OK Statement UPDATE STA Statement processed OK Added entry Added entry Added entry
2. To continue type yes If you entered yes a list of the Picture Perfect packages currently installed will be displayed You will then be asked which package you would like to delete For example The following Picture Perfect packages are currently installed base graph image impexp kalatel Enter the name of the package to remove Type the name of the package you are removing for example kalatel Messages similar to the following will be displayed Removing the kalatel package Picture Perfect Kalatel interface package removal Version 1 2 7 6 02 Removing tty2 entry for Kalatel interface from the port database table Updating Picture Perfect backup configuration The Kalatel CCTV Interface package has been completely removed from the system Exiting Chapter 2 23 Installing and removing The removal process has completed Program Exiting The system needs to be rebooted for the changes to take effect Reboot the system y n y 6 Enter y the default value to reboot the system or type n if you do not want to reboot at this time Redundant systems If the interface package was running in a redundant Picture Perfect environment then you will also see messages similar to the following Redundant kalatel interface configuration detected This host primaryl Other host backupl Redundant kalatel operation is ENABLED Map fi
3. FIRE ALARM PULLED Facility GLOBAL v 229 Priority j 50 l Route Definition E a Alarm Routing MONITOR AND HISTORY v P Online Color Picker O No Color Picker Li Qe Color Sample Inhibit Schedule Changes No Background Foreground Yes Immediate Reset Input No O Yes Immediate Dial Required No Yes Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs XO Manual Reset Outputs I Hl O Duration Reset Outputs Results 0 records Follow these steps to modify an alarm description 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Inthe Description field of the Alarms screen enter the appropriate search criteria 3 Click Find 4 Editthe desired information 5 When completed save the alarm by clicking Save 235 Adding or modifying output groups and outputs If you would like to trigger an output that is door strikes lights or sirens when notifier panel messages are received you will need to configure an output group and a output The output group must be linked to the input group for the Notifier message to trigger an output for that output group The instructions for setting up outputs and output groups are described in the Picture Perfect manual All fields and options in the Outputs forms may not apply since this is a one w
4. k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k kk kk kk kkk kk kk kkk kkk oe P Refer to Figure 32 Example printed report sorted by Kalatel site number or command string index on page 68 for a sample of a printed report 67 68 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Figure 32 Example printed report sorted by Kalatel site number or command string index 10 25 96 15 59 Picture Perfect to Kalatel mapped alarms Kalatel Site No Input LocId Cmd String Alarm Type Group Id AlarmId InpGrpId Index Task Name Description 0 54 10 26 2048 ktd tty7 Door Forced Ammun Rm 1 0 243 876 294 1 ktd_tty7 Barrack 2 Door Held Open 0 8 2 17 23 ktd_tty7 Invalid Badge Front Gate Rdr 0 8 9 94 25 ktd_tty7 Unknown Badge Rdr 4 0 102 21 45 123 ktd_tty5 Boiler Room Thermostat DI 0 65 3 76 345 ktd_tty5 0 85 34 38 406 ktd_tty5 Duress Alarm Rdr 9 Exiting the program If you have made any changes to the mapping file while running package prefix cctv map and you select X to exit you will be asked if you want to inform the rest of the system of your changes e Ifyou select y then the system is informed of your mapping file changes The system will re read the mapping file and use it to determine which alarms will be routed to the CCTV controller Any existing active alarms will not be re run through the mapping file only newly occurring alarms Ifyo
5. scs inp Is this correct y n y To confirm the input file name accept the default y by pressing Eve Enter n to change the name If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the name If you entered yv the following messages will be displayed Enter the input group prefix to be used when creating the records It must be 3 to 4 characters with the last character s numeric For example SCS1 NOTE This prefix must be the same one that is used by the interface that is being targeted Refer to the documentation for more information about input group prefixes Enter the rnput gro p prefbix segkecaeGcer pete Sag bag epee wa eRe Eme dU 10 143 Enter the name of your input group prefix The input group prefix you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it The input group prefix you entered was SCSL Is this correct y n y To confirm the input group prefix accept the default y by pressing Ene Enter n to re enter the prefix If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the value If you entered y messages similar to the following will be displayed regarding the selection of a default facility for the SCS interface X Rte SSeS SSS SSS LIC R ck Nur Default SCS Facility assignment portion LE RE Pc
6. kt When the input group and alarm records are created they will require an associated facility You need to select the default facility that will be used when creating the input group and alarm records if an explicit one is not specified The currently available defined facilities will be displayed and you will need to make a selection from the provided list If you need to create a new facility specifically for the SCS input groups and alarms then you should exit this program create the facility using the GUI then re run this program and then choose that facility Do you wish to exit this program now y n n Entera y toexitthescript orann to enter a facility from the choices that will be provided If you entered y you will exit the program and you may create a facility specifically for the SCS interface if you so desire then re run the script If you entered n a list of the currently defined facilities on your system will be displayed and you will need to make a selection If the number of facilities on your system exceeds 18 you will need to press to continue through the list until you get to the prompt When you observe the facility that you desire to use by default with the interface keep track of the number This list will be similar to the following Acquiring facility list from database Please wait The following facilities are defined on your system and available to be chosen as the def
7. Individual Ignored Detected Broadcast State Changes No Yes Alarm Perimeter A Zone 1 Alarm GL v S f V 2 Delay Time g Modifying an input group Follow these steps to modify an Input Group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups Enter the input group description you are looking for as the search criteria Click Find 2 3 4 The desired input group should appear 5 Edit the desired information 6 When completed save the input group by clicking Save Adding or modifying an alarm Each Universal Intrusion input group will need to be linked to an alarm record which can be routed to show up on the Alarm Monitor and be recorded by Alarm History The linking is done through the Input Group form after the alarm record has been established Creating alarm records that the input group records are linked to is required for the Universal Intrusion interface to operate It is the combination of the input group description and alarm description that make up the location and alarm columns displayed on the Alarm Monitor 369 370 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual The alarm record description field should be used to further identify or describe the Universal Intrusion input group it is going to be linked to Several input group records can be linked to the same alarm but it would be prudent to set up one alarm record for each
8. where IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters ACCOUNT NUMBER isa five character alphanumeric string MESSAGE is a two digit string range 00 to 99 which represents a message lookup into a table of system messages Adding an input group Follow these steps to add an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 Complete the Input Groups form for each Input Group These fields must be set as follows Delay Time 0 Boolean Type ndividual Input Group State Enabled Open Condition gnored Short Condition gnored Broadcast State Changes o Alarm Should point to the alarm record generated for this input group Parent Input Group should all be lt BLANK gt Output Group should all be lt BLANK gt 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another Input Group Figure 49 Sample Input Groups Screen 68 Inputs Outputs Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones D Input Groups Inputs Output Groups Outputs Input Group Events Output Group Events Description 3 Q amp J SE E x o 4 x ZS Q Define Input Group Parent Input Groups Output Groups Description cst 00042 CODE CHANGE 666 555 i Facility E anim lhl input Group State Open Condition Disabled Ignored Enabled Detected Boolean Type Short Conditio
9. Enter the input group prefix to be used when creating the records It must be 3 to 4 characters with the last character s numeric For example ESTI NOTE This prefix must be the same one that is used by the interface that is being targeted Refer to the documentation for more information about input group prefixes Enter the inp t group Prefix i e 99 eA wy RENE ee RESP Enter an input group prefix and then press Enter The following message displays 182 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual 10 The input group prefix you entered was EST3 Is this correct y n y Press to accept the selection The following message displays LORI PERPE EE et a cea a ay ae me ns ag a el pela ae Sa cea PP oTc m kxk SC Default EST3 Facility assignment portion ZS Ki E kk When the input group and alarm records are created they will require an associated facility You need to select the default facility that will be used when creating the input group and alarm records if an explicit one is not specified The currently available defined facilities will be displayed and you will need to make a selection from the provided list If you need to create a new facility specifically for the EST3 input groups and alarms then you should exit this program create the facility using the GUI then re run this program and the
10. where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters ACCOUNT NUMBER is a five digit string 0 to 99999 LOOP NUMBER isa three digit string 0 to 999 LOOP TYPE isatwo character alphabetic string where an incoming SCS 1 numeric type range 0 7 interpreted internally by Picture Perfect as O BL 1 FA 2 BA 3 SU 4 HU 5 EM 6 A1 and 7 A2 STATUS isa three character string B FRA Fault W Message Type To recognize Fault message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt ACCOUNT NUMBER gt lt LOOP NUMBER gt lt LOOP TYPE gt lt STATUS gt 153 where IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters ACCOUNT NUMBER is a five digit string 0 to 99999 LOOP NUMBER isa three digit string 0 to 999 LOOP TYPE is the two character alphabetic string where an incoming SCS 1 numeric type range 0 7 is interpreted internally by Picture Perfect as O BL 1 FA 2 BA 3 SU 4 HU 5 EM 6 A1 and 7 A2 STATUS isa three character string W FLT s System Alarm Trouble Supervisory Message Type To recognize s System Alarm Trouble Supervisory message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt ACCOUNT NUMBER gt lt MESSAGE gt lt MODIFIER gt where IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters ACCOUNT NUM
11. 39 If you select y you are then prompted to select how the report should be sorted The options are Input Group Id Alarm Id Location Id AlphaCom Alarm Number or print the report without sorting Continue with step 4 If you selected n to not sort the file the file will be printed and the mapping options display 4 Enter the number of the field you wish to sort on The file will be printed and you are returned to the Selection prompt where you may choose another mapping option Refer to Figure 12 Example of printing an AlphaCom alarm file on page 39 Figure 12 Example of printing an AlphaCom alarm file ee UN kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk A Add an outgoing AlphaCom controlled alarm D Delete an outgoing AlphaCom controlled alarm P Print a hardcopy of all AlphaCom controlled alarms X x X Exit kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Selection p Print the CCTV controlled alarm translation file Printer name 1p0 Sort the map file y n y y 1 Input Group Id 2 Alarm Id 3 Location Id 4 AlphaCom Alarm Number 5 Exit Print without sorting Enter the number of the field to sort on 1 request id is 1p0 47 1 file He ke He He He He e He He He He ke He e He He He He ke He ke KKK KEK ke ke ke k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k kk kkk k A Add an outgoing AlphaCom controlled alarm D Delete an outgoing AlphaCom
12. CCTVDeviceName Valid values for the field are defined in column 1 of Table 21 Supported CCTV switcher products on page 336 lt CCTVNumber gt This is the CCTV alarm number Refer to the appropriate Picture Perfect CCTV interface document for information on how to specify CCTV information 338 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual lt Port gt The TTY port on which the CCTV switcher is connected to the Picture Perfect host When specifying the port use only the tty portion of the name For example if the CCTV switcher is connected on dev tty2 only specify tty2 Example input file The following is an example of an input file for a Picture Perfect 4 5 system 4 5 Ol Request Station 40Ol Request 1 allegiant O tty2 01 Connect Station 01 Connect 1l allegiant 1l tty2 Ol Busy Station 01 Busy l allegiant 1 tty2 01 Disconnect Station 01 Disconnect 1 allegiant 2 tty2 10 Request Station 10 Request allplex 1 tty3 10 Connect Station 10 Connect allplex 2 tty3 10 Busy Station 10 Busy allplex 1 tty3 10 Disconnect Station 410 Disconnect allplex 3 tty3 03 Request Station 403 Request 1 allplex 4 tty3 03 Connect Station 403 Connect 1 allplex 5 tty3 03 Busy Station 4 03 Busy llallplex 5 tty3 03 Disconnect Station 403 Disconnect 1 allplex 6 tty3 05 Request Station 05 Request kalatel 1 tty4 05 Connect Station 05 Connect kalatel 2 tty4 05 Busy Station 05 Busy kalatel 2 tty4 kalat
13. Commend Data Generator 2 0 If the Commend package was configured for operation in a redundant Picture Perfect environment you will also see messages similar to the following Redundant commend interface configuration detected This host primaryl Other host backupl Redundant commend operation is ENABLED The commend interface changes will be reflected on the other host Would you like to i nstall or u ninstall data records To use the install option type i The following messages will display You have chosen to install database records Please enter input file name Enter the name of your input file 10 105 The input file you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it You entered cmd inp as the input file name Is this correct y n y Entera y to accept or an n to change the name If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the name If you entered y the following messages will display Enter the input group prefix to be used when creating the records It must be 4 to 5 characters with the last character s numeric For example CMD07 NOTE This prefix must be the same one that is used by the interface that is being targeted Refer to the documentation for more information about input group prefixes Enter the input group prefix Enter the name of your input group prefix The input group prefix you entered will be displayed and you will be
14. Running the reports Follow these steps with the Picture Perfect user interface to run the reports 1 From the Reports menu select the Report menu item then click the Report tab 2 From the Select a Report Category list pane select the category for this report When you select a category the existing reports in that category display in the Select a Report list pane 3 To open an existing report select it from the Select a Report list pane then from the toolbar click Run 4 Youcan open any of the fifteen reports listed in Table 6 on page 79 or any of these five debugging reports e CSTATION Micros e CSTATION Doors e CSTATION Readers e CSTATION Alarms e CSTATION Inputs 81 Examples of how to use the reports are described below Sample reports For example you want to route badge history overflow alarm events for the three micros installed on the system to the Central Station 1 Run the CSTATION BdgHistOvfl report The following report is displayed ER Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual 08 27 96 15 29 CSTATION BdgHistOvfl MICRO REC MICRO ID MICRO DESCRIPTION BDGHIS INGRP ALARM ID INPUT GROUP DESC ALARM DESCRIPTION 1 0 MICRO 0 ila 1 8 11 BADGE HISTORY OVERFLOW BADGE HISTORY OVERFLOW 2 1 MICRO 1 ila 2 8 11 BADGE HISTORY OVERFLOW BADGE HISTORY OVERFLOW From the output you see only two of the three micros are listed indicating a problem with the definition of that micro 2 Run the CSTATION Micr
15. MSG TEXT gt where e e e IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters ACCOUNT NUMBER isa five digit string 00 to 99999 MSG TYPE is the type for custom text and is a two digit string 01 to 99 MSG TEXT is up to the first 16 characters of the custom text Door Access Granted J Message Type To recognize door access granted message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt ACCOUNT NUMBER gt lt MSG TYPE gt lt DEVICE ADDR gt lt USER NUMBER gt where IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters ACCOUNT NUMBER isa five digit string 00 to 99999 MSG TYPE is the string ACCS GRNTD DEVICE ADDR isa two digit string 01 to 08 USER NUMBER is a two to four digit string 00 to 9999 The length of this field is based on SCS 1 programming and is specified for this interface during installation LI C System Alarm Trouble Supervisory Message To recognize S System Alarm Trouble Supervisory message types use the following format in the input group description The exception to this format is that the following list of S messages do not have an account number S20 S22 S57 S58 59 S60 S61 S62 S63 S64 S65 S68 S69 S70 S98 S99 156 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual lt IGP gt lt ACCOUNT NUMBER gt lt MESSAGE gt
16. ile data INFORMIX SQL Version 9 30 UC4 Software Inc 1984 1997 AAB C705595 ar to table input_group 117 row s loaded into it ar to table alarm Table alarm had 114 row s loaded into it TISTICS FOR TABLE input_group TISTICS FOR TABLE alarm SCS1 20 1278 296 SCS1 22 1280 298 SCS1 99 1349 367 igd SCS1 30122 123 HU ALM cctvName kalatel cctv 12 kalatel 1239 260 1239 12 ktd_tty2 igd SCS1 23411 LATE CL OSE 333 01 cctvName allplex cctv 99 allplex 974 414 974 99 Generated 2 new entri map table Generated 4 new entri map table s for CCTV switcher device kalatel s for CCTV switcher device allplex Successfully appended CCTV device Successfully appended new entries to map table for CCTV device Installation complete You have made changes Do you want to inform To inform the system accept the default y by pressing Ene Enter n to not inform the system to one or more CCTV mapping files the system of these changes y n y If you entered n the changes just made will not be sent to the interface until the next time it is restarted and you will exit the script 145 146 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual If you entered y a message will be sent to the running interface and the new map changes will be re read and take effect immediately Messages similar to the following w
17. 15 313 DBLOAD Load Utility INFORMIX SQL Version 9 30 UC4 Copyright C Informix Software Inc 1984 1997 Software Serial Number AAD J328673 Table input group had 12 row s loaded into it Table alarm had 6 row s loaded into it statement UPDATE STATISTICS FOR TABLE input group Statement processed OK statement UPDATE STATISTICS FOR TABLE alarm Statement processed OK igd STNO1 F401 Request cctvName kalatel cctv 0 kalatel 1548 518 1548 O0 ktd tty2 Creating CCTV device kalatel map addition file tmp stn kalatel deltaigd STNO1 F401 Connect cctvName kalatel cctv 1 kalatel 1549 519 1549 1 ktd tty2 igd STNO1 F401 Disconnect cctvName kalatel cctv 2 kalatel 1550 520 1550 2 ktd tty2 igd STNO1l F110 Request cctvName allplex cctv 1 allplex 1551 521 1551 1 allp tty3 Creating CCTV device allplex map addition file tmp stn allplex deltaigd STNO1 F110 Connect cctvName allplex cctv 2 allplex 1552 522 1552 2 allp tty3 igd STNOl F110 Disconnect cctvName allplex cctv 3 allplex 1553 523 1553 3 allp tty3 igd STNO1 FFF3 Request cctvName allplex cctv 4 allplex 1554 524 1554 4 allp tty3 igd STNO1L FFF3 Connect cctvName allplex cctv 5 allplex 1555 525 1555 5 allp tty3 igd STNO1 FFF3 Disconnect cctvName allplex cctv 6 allplex 1556 526 1556 6 allp tty3 igd STNO1 FFFO Request cctvName kalatel cctv 1 kalatel 1557 527 1557 1 ktd_tty2 igd STNO1 FFFO Connect cctvName kalatel
18. Bypass and LRS Reset Alarm Desc The fifth column is used as the alarm description field for the alarm record that is created for the associated input group record This description is what appears on the Alarm Monitor when an alarm occurs and should be used as a custom device label that helps describe more information about the device or detector and the event that occurred It can be up to 60 characters in length and either upper or lower case 132 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual It is acceptable to use the same alarm description for multiple input file data lines when installing the data generator records Only one alarm record will be generated in this case and the appropriate input group records will point to the same alarm record Note Do not use an alarm description that matches the description field of an already existing alarm record in the Picture Perfect database This is an illegal condition that scsgen checks for before any data is generated Facility The sixth column is used to specify the facility id that will be used for the input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted to select a Default SCS Facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a Facility value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid facility id values create a report using as the SQL stat
19. Perimeter A Zone 1 Alarm j Facility 1 GLOBAL v 2ce m m i Priority j 150 l Route Definition ndm m Alarm Routing MONITOR AND HISTORY v K P j Online i Color Picker Ono Color Picker Yes Color Sample Inhibit Schedule Changes No Background Foreground Yes Immediate Reset Input No Yes Immediate Dial Required No Yes Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Manual Reset Outputs Iz gt Duration Reset Outputs Results 0 records Follow these steps to modify an alarm description 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab In the Description field of the Alarms screen enter the appropriate search criteria Click Find Edit the desired information ch a iS When completed save the alarm by clicking Save 372 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Adding or modifying output groups and outputs If you would like to trigger an output i e door strikes lights or sirens when Universal Intrusion panel messages are received you will need to configure an output group and a output The output group must be linked to the input group for the Universal Intrusion message to trigger an output for that output group The instructions for setting up outputs and output groups are described in the Picture Perfect manual All f
20. RES NE as the search criteria Click Find All of the configured Firesine input groups will be loaded Locate the desired input group on the grid Edit the desired information When completed save the input group by clicking Save 195 196 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Adding or modifying an alarm If you want to see a unique Picture Perfect alarm displayed for each Firesine alarm define a separate alarm for each Firesine alarm and assign it to a corresponding input group You must define an alarm and input group for every point that is detected by the Firesine system When alarms and resets are received they are transmitted to the Picture Perfect system for processing Each alarm will be routed to the Alarm Monitor and History Alarms are handled as logical alarms so they can be responded to and removed without being physically reset The description field of the Alarms screen simply displays to the Picture Perfect system that a Firesine alarm has been triggered and identifies the priority of the alarm The description can be anything that is meaningful Follow these steps to add a Firesine alarm 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Complete the Alarms form Make sure that Alarm Routing is set for at least Monitor but preferably Monitor AND History Online Inhibit Schedule Changes and Immediate Reset Input is set to Yes e Reset Outputs is set to Auto Reset Outputs so the alarm
21. Total Alarms 4 Display is now active Highest Priority 50 Alarm Description Location Condition P n Bldg 2 South Wa 0103 Room 304 Alarm Er 01 06 Electrical Panel Bldg 2 EST0104 Room 304 005 12 44 48 01 06 2005 Smoke Detector Bldg 2 Lobby EST01 0105 Main Floor 01 06 2005 12 45 55 01 06 2005 Smoke Detector Bldg 2 3rd Fir ESTO01 0106 Room 306 01 06 2005 12 46 50 01 06 2005 The above figure of the Alarm Monitor shows a possible alarm sequence This scenario would be for a system that uses the input group prefix of ESTO1 and has appropriate input group alarm records to recognize the conditions coming from the panel Below is a line by line explanation 180 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual The Alarm Description column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate alarm record that was created The Location column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate input group record Line 1 An alarm condition was detected at a pull station in Building 2 Line 2 An alarm condition was detected at an electrical panel in Building 2 Line 3 A smoke detector alarm was observed in the lobby of Building 2 Line 4 A smoke detector alarm was observed on the third floor of Building 2 EST alarm mapping to the alarm monitor Through the defined Condition and Input State fields of Picture Perfect a mapping was established to identify the different types of EST alarms The following mapping exists betwee
22. lt Sync gt lt 0304 gt Call Handler lt Station gt _ lt CR gt lt LF gt Call Handler This is the 4 character Stentofon call handler accepting the local call request with valid values from FFFO through 9999 leading Fs used instead of 0s Station This is a 4 character pager station number originating the call request with valid values from FFFO through 9999 leading Fs used instead of 0s This message type defines a successful connection of the local pager to the Stentofon Intercom System Note that many type 0307 messages for a station can occur before the connection is established However once the connection is established no further requests will be honored until the pager station has been disconnected 325 Message Type 0504 Remote Call Connect The following is the structure of a Type 0504 message line Sync 0504 Call Handler Station Datal Data2 CR LF Call Handler The 4 character Stentofon call handler accepting the remote call request with valid values from FFFO through 9999 leading Fs are used instead of 0s Station This is a 4 character pager station number originating the call request with valid values from FFFO through 9999 leading Fs used instead of 0s lt DataN gt Information that is not important to the Stentofon interface This message type defines a successful connection of the remote pager to the Stentofon Intercom System Note that many type 0507 me
23. 01 Connect Facility GLOBAL v 229 Y S Priority jj 50 oute Definition Alarm Routing MONITOR AND HISTORY v eco P Online Color Picker O No Color Picker Yes Color Sample inhibit Schedule Changes No Background Foreground Yes Immediate Reset Input No Yes Immediate Dial Required No Yes Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs O Manual Reset Outputs 4 i gt Duration Reset Outputs Results 0 records Follow these steps to modify an alarm description 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Inthe Description field of the Alarms screen enter the appropriate search criteria 3 Click Find 4 Edit the desired information 5 When completed save the alarm by clicking Save Adding or modifying output groups and outputs If you would like to trigger an output that is door strikes lights or sirens when Stentofon Exchange messages are received you will need to configure an Output Group and a Output The output group must be linked to the input group for the message to trigger an output for that output group The instructions for setting up outputs and output groups are described in the Picture Perfect User Manual All fields and options in the Outputs forms may not app
24. At the Selection prompt type a to add a new CCTV controlled alarm A message displays to confirm a new alarm is being added Enter the Alarm Id The Alarm Id can be found on one of the CCTV SQL reports listed on page 60 Enter the Input Group Id The Input Group Id can be found on one of the CCTV SQL reports listed on page 60 Enter the Location Id The Location Id can be found on one of the CCTV SQL reports listed on page 60 If you have only a single instance of the CCTV interface package installed then you will be prompted for the CCTV alarm number The CCTV alarm number is actually the number of a camera attached to the CCTV system that will perform the CCTV actions that you want for this event The range of numbers 0 to 511 can be used for CCTV alarm numbers or 2048 to 1 if using a Kalatel command string mapping Skip to step 6 If you have installed multiple CCTV interfaces then a list of the ports that have been configured for the CCTV devices will be displayed select the one to which this alarm is to be forwarded Enter the name of the port for example tt y1 You will be prompted for the CCTV alarm number Enter the CCTV alarm number The CCTV alarm number is actually the number of a camera attached to the CCTV system that performs the CCTV actions that you want for this event The range of numbers 0 to 511 can be used for CCTV alarm numbers or 2048 to 1 if using a Kalatel command string mapping Indicate if you want t
25. B 1 COMP ROOMS 20 EGENT COURT o D R 21 Facility A F S 22 Facility B 23 Stentofon Facility Enter the value of the default Stentofon facility 1 23 1 Enter the number of the default facility to use with the Stentofon interface This value will be used when creating input_group and alarm records from the entries in the input file for which a specific facility is not specified The facility you selected will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it You have selected as the default facility Stentofon Facility Is this ok y n y Entera y to confirm or an n to re enter the default facility If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the value If you entered a y the facility you selected will be displayed and the input data will be checked If there were errors they will be displayed and you will need to correct those errors and begin the process again If no errors are found the input group and alarm records will be entered into the Picture Perfect database You will see messages similar to the following Default Facility chosen is Stentofon Facility rf v gee ETE k k or End of Default Stentofon Facility assignment portion Log n pe MERE TEMERE ere kk Checking input group file data Checking alarm file data Installing Records
26. Head Office Building 1 Garage Building 2 Garage Building 3 Garage Building 4 Garage Building 5 Garage Head Office Garage Penthouse VO OO JO OG L NE OO AJ On O1 iS Q0 NO ES Cee ee oe oe oe n Press RETURN for 19 B 20 REGENT COURT 21 Facility A F S more 1 COMP ROOMS 22 5 acility B 233 tentofon 9600 Facility Enter the value of the default Stentofon facility 1 23 1 13 14 343 Enter the number of the default facility to use with the Stentofon 9600 interface This value will be used when creating input group and alarm records from the entries in the input file for which a specific facility is not specified The facility you selected will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it You have selected as the default facility Stentofon 9600 Facility Is this ok y n y Entera y to confirm or an n to re enter the default facility If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the value If you entered a y the facility you selected will be displayed and the input data will be checked If there were errors they will be displayed and you will need to correct those errors and begin the process again If no errors are found the input group and alarm records will be entered into the Picture Perfect database You will see messages similar to the following Default Facility chosen is Stentofon 9600 Facility KE D acyce Beige vas ace QUE
27. Hosts and Input Groups themselves All of these windows allow you to select an input group for the various events that can occur at these locations The Input Group window is the only one with a field to define the alarm associated with this group For the purposes of CCTV control it does not make sense to associate a CCTV event to an input group alarm Input groups that are made up from other input groups such as Boolean input groups do not necessarily report the actual triggering location For example with a Boolean AND group all input points must be on so which camera would you turn on Boolean input group alarms are not supported in this interface To trigger a CCTV event for an input point you should create an input group for that point only Then you can associate the CCTV event to the alarm on that individual input group and therefore the point itself Detailed information may be found in the Picture Perfect User Manual 59 Identifying location types An area is a group of one or more readers and represents a location type A single area may be assigned to multiple readers and doors Areas are similar to input groups in that they group a large number of readers together to make configuration easier Unlike input groups areas cannot contain other areas This means that whenever an area event occurs the unique location of the event the reader is also reported This gives you the ability to specify the exact camera to turn on b
28. Note Atypical site requires a minimum of 5MB free disk space to install the Picture Perfect RAN software on the IBM RISC System 6000 For specific configuration details contact your GE Security Sales Representative 272 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Hardware overview Figure 98 Overview of a standalone Picture Perfect and a RAN interface IF THE PRIORITY IS IN THE DESIRED RANGE AND THE ALARM IS NOT RESPONDED TO WITHIN THE SPECIFIED TIME FRAME IT IS SENT TO THE REMOTE SYSTEM REMOTE ALARM POINT di AN ALARM OCCURS IT IS ROUTED TO THE PICTURE PERFECT SYSTEM PICTURE PERFECT STANDALONE SYSTEM THE REMOTE SYSTEM RETURNS THE ALARM AND A RESPONSE TO THE PICTURE PERFECT SYSTEM Figure 99 Overview of a redundant Picture Perfect and a RAN interface ET NET d Ki DI Lm Ki ET NET 2N NET 2 KET 1 273 Configuration RAN configuration is composed of many parts due to the nature of the application and network communications Some considerations for the configuration of the alarms What alarms based on priority should be routed to the remote system e What length of time should elapse before unresponded to alarms should be routed to the remote system The file cas db text rantcpip cfg contains the configuration parameters These parameters are set during installation and do not need to be changed by the system admin
29. The install portion of the tool generates input group and alarm database records Before running the install program you will need to Create an input file e Know the input group prefix e Create a list of the paging stations that are going to be monitored This kind of report can be obtained from the Stentofon system 306 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Input file An input file is required when using the install portion of the stngen tool It describes the types of messages and pager locations to be monitored by the Stentofon alarm interface The input file is a text editable file that must be created prior to running the tool The installation portion of the tool will ask you the name of the input file you want to use The input file will be parsed by the tool and the appropriate input group and alarm records will be created If the input specifies activation of CCTV devices the appropriate definition records will be generated and appended to the mapping file specific to each CCTV switcher interface The CCTV switcher interface tasks can be signalled to access the new information making CCTV control active with the new information The format and rules for the file are discussed in the following sections To create an input file you will need to know e The version of Picture Perfect you are running This is very important because the layout of the database records may be different depending on the version of Picture P
30. These messages must be configured on the Picture Perfect system There are two methods available to configure these messages 1 Automatically using the stngen9600 data generator tool 2 Manually using Picture Perfect If you plan to enter many messages at once we strongly recommend you use the stngen9 600 command line tool Using stngen9600 exclusively to create or modify data records will enable you to keep track of the specific messages that are being monitored for a particular panel on a specific port This tool is explained in detail in the following section However if you choose to use Picture Perfect to insert the database records this procedure is explained starting on page 347 with the section entitled Using Picture Perfect to configure the Stentofon interface Note Adding outputs and output groups must be done manually using Picture Perfect Using stngen9600 The command line data generator tool stngen9600 can be used to install or uninstall database records that are associated with the Stentofon 9600 Intercom System alarm interface It is part of the Stentofon 9600 alarm interface package for Picture Perfect and is available when that package has been installed The Stentofon 9600 Intercom System is capable of producing a large number of messages for all of the pagers and exchanges that may be installed For Picture Perfect to monitor the numerous message combinations would require a large number of input group and alarm da
31. This tool is part of the Notifier Fire Alarm Interface package for Picture Perfect and is installed with the package The n rgen tool will create the temporary files that it needs in the tmp directory as it processes an input file and later generates the associated database records The install portion of this tool is explained in the next section See nfrgen uninstall on page 222 for an explanation of the uninstall portion Note Ifthe Notifier interface is running in a Redundant Picture Perfect environment nfrgen must be run on the current primary machine only The normal operation of the redundant Picture Perfect system will sweep the database updates made by nfrgen on the primary machine over to the backup machine nfrgen install The install portion of the tool generates input group and alarm database records Before running the install program you will need to e Create an input file e Know the input group prefix e Decide whether you would like the fixed message types installed e Create a list of the points that are going to be monitored which includes the device type loop detector loop module or zone number This kind of report can be obtained from the Notifier panel Creating an input file The input file describes the types of messages and devices to be monitored by the Notifier fire alarm interface It is a text editable file that must be created prior to running the nfrgen tool 210 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interf
32. User Manual Figure 71 Overview of a redundant Picture Perfect and a Firepanel interface 530106002B 209 Configuration The Notifier interface to Picture Perfect acts as a filter by recognizing predefined messages that are received over the serial line The message types and formats used by the Notifier AFP1010 AM2020 interface were derived from the EIA 232D Protocol and Data Formats for the AM2020 Fire Alarm Control Panel document revision 7 These messages must be configured on the Picture Perfect system There are two methods available to configure these messages 1 Automatically using the Notifier Fire Alarm data generator tool nf rgen 2 Manually using Picture Perfect If you plan to enter many messages at once we strongly recommend you use the nfrgen command line tool Using nfrgen exclusively to create or modify data records will enable you to keep track of the specific messages that are being monitored for a particular panel on a specific port This tool is explained in detail in the following section However if you choose to use Picture Perfect to insert the database records this procedure is explained starting on page 224 with the section entitled Using Picture Perfect to configure the Notifier interface Using nfrgen The Notifier Fire Alarm data generator tool nfrgen is acommand line tool that installs or un installs database records that are associated with the Notifier fire alarm interface
33. Using Picture Perfect to configure the Commend interface For a successful configuration follow these steps l Adding or modifying input groups for the three possible message types for each block station to be monitored Adding or modifying alarms Adding or modifying output groups and outputs 1f desired Monitoring alarms Adding or modifying input groups The input group record description is the key to identifying specific Commend protocol messages The format of the description is defined such that it can be set up to identify the specific message types coming from the Commend system for each block station as identified in the Commend protocol as described in Commend Intercom System Message Structure on page 117 The following is the structure of an input group record description lt IGP gt lt Block gt lt Station gt lt MessageType gt 111 lt IGP gt The 5 character input group prefix described on page 109 lt Block gt lt Station gt This is the 4 character block station identifier valid values are FFF1 through 9999 as described in Commend Intercom System Message Structure on page 117 lt MessageType gt This is the type of Commend activity and is one of the following 21 22 request 10 30 clear 12 31 acknowledge OA release 1D duress Note These message types are searched for in the Commend interface software when searching for the alarm record The Commend software will be unable to
34. What you need to know to create an input file 1 The types of alarm events for which alarm notifications are to be forwarded to the Central Station system for each type of Picture Perfect database object 2 The database Record ID numbers corresponding to the Picture Perfect database objects for which alarm notifications are to be forwarded to the Central Station system Once an alarm has been forward to and accepted by the Central Station system it will be removed from the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor screen Picture Perfect will then assume that the operator has seen and acknowledged the alarm Only forward those alarm events that are to be handled by the Central Station system Selecting Picture Perfect alarm events for Central Station There are several types of alarm events for which alarm notifications can be forwarded to the Central Station system as described in Table 6 Forwardable alarm notification events The table identifies for each type of alarm event the event name and the Picture Perfect database table whose Record ID number is used in the cstgen tool input file The Record ID numbers of populated database tables can be obtained by executing the SQL report whose name is provided in the right most column of the table under the heading SQL Report Name Table 6 Forwardable alarm notification events Alarm Event Description Alarm Event Name Database Table SQL Report Name Door Held Open DoorHel
35. oc beac oe E eb RR ERE eee e 2 CCTV control systems supported by Picture Perfect e 3 Firepanel systems supported by Picture Perte 5 Intrusion detection systems supported by Picture Perfect 6 Intercom systems supported by Picture Perfect c 0000 c cee 7 Miscellaneous systems supported by Picture Perfect luus 8 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Introduction Picture Perfect supports the following types of interface packages Closed Circuit Television CCTV systems Firepanel systems Intrusion Detection systems Intercom systems Other miscellaneous systems These interface groups are discussed in detail in subsequent chapters Chapter 1 Interface overview CCTV control systems supported by Picture Perfect All CCTV control systems can exist in stand alone subhost network host and redundant versions of Picture Perfect Once the CCTV control systems are set up and configured operation of the CCTV control feature will be a hands free procedure American Dynamics The interface between the American Dynamics 2150 and Picture Perfect provides the capability to automatically control CCTV cameras Burle Allegiant Models TC8500 to TC8901 are supported For controllers providing video loss monitoring and reporting using the controller printer port an optional video loss interface component of Picture Perfect can be configured to issue alarms using the Alarm Monitor screen whenever a camera vid
36. physical alarm Upstream Communication Failure Downstream Communication Failure Reader Communication Failure physical alarm 2 Input events for an area Invalid Badge Unknown Badge Lost Badge Suspended Badge Anti passback Violation Duress 89 3 Input events for a door Door Held Open physical alarm Door Forced Open physical alarm 4 Picture Perfect system events Host host communications failure 5 20 DI Board alarm events DIPoint physical alarm Logical alarms are one time events without any specific duration time Picture Perfect will generate one SIA formatted message for transfer to the Central Station system whenever an event of this type occurs Physical alarms are events with a duration The condition occurs and remains in effect until some future time when the condition is finally removed Picture Perfect will generate two SIA formatted messages for transfer to the Central Station system whenever an event of this type occurs The first message will be generated and transferred when the condition first occurs and the second when the condition is removed SIA message packet format The SIA message packet format between two communicating devices typically called the receiver and the computer provides two way communication with sequenced message acknowledgment The format has the general form lt LF gt lt CRC gt lt HT gt lt seq gt lt rec gt lt line gt lt data gt lt CR gt The minimum allowable message form i
37. to make configuration easier Unlike input groups areas cannot contain other areas This means that whenever an area event occurs the unique location of the event reader is also reported This gives you the ability to specify the exact camera to turn on because you know at what reader the lost badge 1s being used See Table 1 for location types and alarm conditions Detailed information may be found in the Picture Perfect User Manual 32 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Table 1 Where input groups are used Location type Alarm condition Area Invalid Badge expired or no category match Suspended Badge Lost Badge Unknown Badge Anti Passback Duress Door Forced Open Held Open Pre alarm Reader Valid Badge exit button tamper only Invalid Badge all badge errors except Unknown Input Point Alarm Micro Badge History Overflow Alarm History Overflow Upstream Micro Communications Failure Downstream Micro Communications Failure Reader Communications Failure Host Host to Host Communications Failure Network Database Communications Failure Using SQL reports During the installation process nine SQL reports are installed The reports are CCTV Areas CCTV Micros ReaderFailure CCTV Doors CCTV Readers CCTV Inputs CCTV Hosts CCTV Micros Comm Failure CCTV Alarms CCTV Micros Overflow These reports provide you with the information th
38. yDeviceId3 tName3 tBaud3 Por Por AlphaCom 4 set up at installation DO NOT touch these lines communication with the AlphaCom system and are 293 tmp SANbe pipe alphacomm comm 100 k Bd oO P OU set up based on your 1 1 10 dev ttyl 9600 1 2 11 dev tty4 9600 1 10 12 dev tty2 9600 44 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual RemoteConnInGrp4 1 AlphaComNodeNum4 20 MyDeviceld4 13 PortName4 dev tty3 PortBaud4 9600 NumOfAlphaCom 4 Single device support To configure a Picture Perfect system to support the sending of commands to only one output device in response to a single Picture Perfect alarm event use themsan set single utility A sample execution of this utility is provided below Note that if multiple output devices are installed and Picture Perfect is configured for single device support a command will be sent to only one of the installed output devices in response to a Picture Perfect alarm event You may wish to configure the system in this manner if each alarm event is to be routed to only one output and your require maximum interface performance A slight performance gain occurs since the output device mapping tables do not need to be searched for all matching entries As soon as the first match is found the search terminates To change the Picture Perfect output device support option to single perform the following steps 1 Login to the system as root 2 Enter
39. 29 Example of adding a Kalatel CCTV alarm 4 ktd_cctv_map UN k k k k k ke ke k ke ke k k ke k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k kk kk kk k A Add a KALATEL CCTV controlled alarm D Delete a KALATEL CCTV controlled alarm X Exit P Print a hardcopy of all KALATEL CCTV controlled alarms H ke ke ke k ke ke ke ke ke ke k ke ke k ke k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k kk kkk kkk kkk k Selection a Adding an outgoing CCTV controlled alarm Picture Perfect Alarm ID 1 999999 21 Input Group ID 1 999999 102 Location ID 1 999999 45 When installing you configured the kalatel interfaces to use the following ports tty5 tty7 Enter the name of the port to use from the list above e g ttyD001 or ttyl tty5 Outgoing Kalatel site number 0 511 15 OR Kalatel Command Strings Table index 2048 to 1 123 You may now enter an optional alarm description to identify this mapping entry For example the Picture Perfect alarm description may be used Do you wish to enter an alarm description y n y The alarm description must fit on one line Enter the alarm description then hit lt ENTER gt Boiler Room Thermostat DI Is this OK y n y kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk A Add a KALATEL CCTV controlled alarm D Delete a KALAT
40. DB25M DB9F Tx 2 3 Rx Rx 3 2 Tx RTS 4 8 CTS CTS 5 7 RTS SG 7 5 SG DSR 6 DCD 8 4 DTR DTR 20 1 DCH 6 DSR Figure 96 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitter To To Primary Host DB25F DB9F CBAS System 4 To Redundant Host DB25M E SES Master Port 1 Port 2 Port DB25F DB25F DB25F Splitter 265 Figure 97 Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and CBAS interface 266 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Extended configuration The CBAS system supports an extended configuration that allows you to alter its behavior This configuration information is kept in the following files cas db text cbas ttyN cfg cas db text cbas redundant cfg where ttyN is the name of the port specified for the interface cas db text cbas ttyN cfg This file contains configuration information specific to the copy of the interface that connects to the CBAS device attached to the tt yN port It consists of a series of text lines each containing a variable name followed by a value or setting The CBAS interface reads the file upon startup to configure the port and the interface Note DO NOT change this file unless absolutely necessary If you find it absolutely necessary to change the file you must be knowledgeable about text editors such as vi Before you begin please call GE Security Customer Support for assistance The following is an example of the contents of the po
41. EE 288 Redundant System eei LEE beu Epp Md te bleibe me da e HA beaten Sp dee Ae 289 Configuration M 292 Disi D 292 Adding or modifying an input group 292 Addirigzor moditying ari alarm EE 293 MOMILOFING Keel EE 295 Extended confiourotlon e SEENEN eve eer n er ey e dads Hed ea AS NEE CEECEE 296 cas db text simplexcfgi s te Sb tr reb M PE e E Eb en Ce AER ERR TRAA qw 296 Jeosddbiteuteimpleu redundont cho 297 Interface data file backup and restore cc cece cece cee eee nent e nee hn 297 Configuring a Stentofon Touchline Interface 299 tg d ENEE 300 Redundant Systems lt lt cesacaoawtadatdend EE EE 300 Software requirements EELER AER asd eaves RENE VER REELLE EELER RE E EE ERE 301 StdNd GlomeSVStEM EE 301 Redundant systeir iu Arbete Ah nee e PE Pere pad ite eb REDE Be EP Ae 301 Ha rdware requiremerits 2 5 gege dree EIER ctu dade deed EIC eoatine gamed CR eR mes die 301 Stard alone Syste M EE 301 eeler EE EE 303 Configurations isseire RR 305 Using Ste EE 305 Stngen uniristall 3 55 e eege EAEE ENEE 314 Using Picture Perfect to configure the Stentofon interface 0 cece ccc eee ete n eee eee ee 316 Testing theinterface sco dae uerg ell dd d eps Busta us 323 Message types etuer a hese wea Ne ELA HPNPR UNE ERG QUERER NEEN ENER FEED ERE E EF See 323 Exterided corifiguration 2 see KEE EEN Mews Bad oe er phe ty E d EUR edna eee cod EES ER 326 cas db text stn Dh ch 326 Jeco
42. EST alarm mapping to the alarm monitor on page 180 174 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual The following is a sample message stream as typically seen from a printer Alarm Type A Panel Device ID field lk kk kk kk KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK 11 23 93 07 54 59 SUPERVISORY OPEN 0 M KKK kk ckck ck ck KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KK KKK KKK KKK 11 24 1993 09 09 34 SUPERVISORY SHORT 0301 09 09 Air Handler 1 HOA Switch 0 0000 ck ck ck KK KKK kk 0k 0k Ck ck ck ck kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk kk 11 24 1993 09 09 39 FIRE ALARM 0201 09 09 Main Water Flow Located in Room 012 M KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KK KK KK KK KKK KK kc kckck KK KKK 11 24 1993 09 09 46 SUPERVISORY SHORT 0303 09 09 Remote Drill Switch c CK CKCKCKCK kk KKK KKK KK KK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KKK 11 24 1993 09 09 53 Supervised Short Restored 0303 09 09 Remote Drill Switch 6 07 54 1st Floor Strobe Circuit Using Picture Perfect to configure the EST interface For a successful configuration follow these steps L 2 3 A Add or modify input groups Add or modify alarms Add or modify output groups and outputs if desired Monitor alarms Adding or modifying input groups The input group record description field is the key to identifying specific EST panel messages The format of the input group description is defined such that it can be set up to identify the specific message types coming from the panel
43. Follow these steps to modify an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 Enter the input group description you are looking for as the search criteria 3 Click Find The desired input group should appear 4 Edit the desired information 5 When completed save the input group by clicking Save Adding or modifying an alarm Each EST input group will need to be linked to an alarm record which can be routed to show up on the Alarm Monitor and be recorded by alarm history The linking is done through the Input Group form after the alarm record has been established Creating alarm records that the input group records are linked to is required for the EST interface to operate It is the combination of the input group description and alarm description that make up the location and alarm columns displayed on the Alarm Monitor The alarm record description field should be used to further identify or describe the EST input group it is going to be linked to Several input group records can be linked to the same alarm but it would be prudent to set up one alarm record for each input group record s that have the same device and location The description field has no restrictions or required format since all the unique information for a message type is located in the input group description If there are similar alarm descriptions that apply to unique devices then separate alarm records and input group records should be created
44. Linux WS ES or AS 4 0 4 5 RISC AIX 6 1 or Red Hat Linux 5 3 Message types Column Column MSG TY The lines of data that follow the Picture Perfect version number should contain rows of delimited text data that describe the message type device type location and brief description The delimiter character must be the symbol There should be one line of data for each message device type loop detector loop module or zone number that is going to be monitored The following message types can be configured for monitoring Alarm Message Trouble Message Zone Disable Message Annunciator Trouble Message Walk Test Message Module Activation Message Supervisory Activation Message Each of the above message types require four columns of data except for Annunciator Trouble messages which only require three Descriptions for All Message Types Except Annunciator Trouble 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6 PE DEV TYPE LDD or ZXXX ALARM FACILITY ALARM or FFF DESCRIPTION PRIORITY 211 MSG TYPE This column is a one character abbreviation of the message type to be monitored The following list defines the message type abbreviations and the possible status information that the message type can produce Abbreviation Message Type Status A Alarm Message ALARM ACK AL CLR AL ACL AL T Trouble Message TROUBL ACK TB CLR TB ACL TB Z Zone Disable Mes
45. NUMBER gt lt LOOP TYPE gt lt LOOP STATUS gt where IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters ACCOUNT NUMBER isa five digit string 0 to 99999 LOOP NUMBER isa three digit string 0 to 999 LOOP TYPE isatwo character alphabetic string where an incoming SCS 1 numeric type of 0 7 is interpreted internally by Picture Perfect as O BL 1 FA 2 BA 3 SU 4 HU 5 EM 6 A1 and 7 A2 LOOP STATUS isa three character string description of the loop where valid statuses are ALM TBL RST FRA FLT BYP and LRS Disarmed O Armed C Late To Arm L Message Type To recognize O C L messages use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt ACCOUNT NUMBER gt lt STATUS gt lt USER NUMBER gt lt AREA NUMBER gt where IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters ACCOUNT NUMBER is a five digit string 0 to 99999 e STATUS is up to ten characters and can be DISARMED ARMED or LATE CLOSI USER NUMBER isa three digit string 0 to 999 AREA NUMBER isa two digit string 0 to 99 GI Code Number Deleted p Code Number Added P Code Number Changed U Message Types To recognize Code Number Deleted Code Number Added and Code Number Changed message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt ACCOUNT N
46. Priority 1 char 5 digits 3 digits 2 chars 3 chars 1 to 60 chars 1 to 10 digits 1 to 3 digits E 0 999 BL FA BA SU ALM TBL RST lor 1 500 HU EM A1 A2 FRA FLT BYP or 1 2 147 483 647 LRS Note Three additional optional fields may be specified identifying a CCTV switcher name see the list of Picture Perfect supported CCTV names in the section Mapping CCTV monitored events on page 61 such as kalatel or allplex a CCTV number the CCTV alarm number that will be sent to the switcher when the SCS alarm is received and the TTY port by which the switcher is connected to the Picture Perfect host When specifying the port only use the tty portion of the name For example if the switcher is connected on dev tty2 only specify tty2 Msg Type This column is always z for loop messages Account Column two is the five digit account number with a range of 00000 99999 Loop The loop number is a three digit string with a range of 000 999 Loop Type The loop type is a two character alpha numeric string that corresponds to an SCS 1 numeric type range 0 7 interpreted as follows 0 BL BLANK 1 FA FIRE 2 BA BURGLARY 3 SU SUPERVISORY 4 HU PANIC 5 EM EMERGENCY 6 A1 AUXILIARY 1 7 A2 AUXILIARY 2 Loop Status The loop status is a 3 character alphabetic string description of the loop Valid statuses are as follows ALM Alarm TBL Trouble RST Restore FRA Force Arm FLT Fault BYP
47. RemoteConnResetReqd RemoteConnColdTO RemoteConnWarmTO ReplyToAlarmTO PipeName PipeSize RANRedundant AlarmLossChk specifies the alarm storage file used when the remote system connection is broken RAN will buffer the alarms up to PipeSize alarms in the PipeName file indicates whether or not RAN is running in a redundant environment indicates whether or not to prevent alarm loss i e resend the last alarm if a network loss occurred before the acknowledgement was received from the remote system NOTE A lack of response when a nonzeroReplyToAlarmTO time expires is regarded as a connection loss situation number of times to retry a socket reconnection before exiting type of response to send to tps in response to th reply received from the remote system PENDING Equivalent of pressing OK on the monitor DISPOSE Equivalent of pressing Remove on the monitor If is a set alarm goes to Completed state If immediate reset or already received the reset then it is removed from the monitor PURGED Equivalent of pressing Purge on the monitor Removes the alarm from the monitor regardless of state Yes 60 10 5 tmp CAD pipe 100 No Yes I The following values should only be adjusted by qualified GE Interlogix CASI Support personnel 5 MaxBindRetries AlarmDisposition Thes 120 DISPOSE values are setup at installation and a
48. Roa eee ER AO 237 Advanced configuration ec eb cee rn EET EE br 238 Interface data file backup and restore ccc eee 240 202 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Introduction The Notifier interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Notifier Interface Panel AM2020 AFP1010 or AFP 400 and recognizes only the predefined messages types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect The Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor may be used to monitor messages from the Notifier panel For detector and module monitoring the information displayed in the Alarm Monitor will show the device type status loop and detector module number and a user defined description field Further message information should be obtained from the primary monitoring device which is the Notifier panel and its associated printer The interface can monitor system type messages coming from the firepanel which do not have an associated device type A list of the fixed message types the interface can monitor can be found in Fixed messages types on page 214 Communication from the Notifier Fire Alarm System to the Picture Perfect host is using a serial line connection The communication is unidirectional meaning the interface only receives data from the Notifier panel and does not send anything back The serial line utilized by this interface will be through the Notifier AFP1010 AM2020 Panel printer connection on the appropria
49. SG 7 7 SG Figure 128 Overview of a Picture Perfect system and an intrusion interface Smoke Detector RS 232 e 2 Monitor Intrusion Interface RISC 6000 or PC 363 Redundant system If you have a Picture Perfect redundant system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual Universal Intrusion system receiver provided by the manufacturer e Serial ports AIX One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem Linux One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COM1 or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Universal Intrusion communication program is started A standard splitter box Two pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to the standard splitter ports Refer to Figure 129 Figure 129 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M Picture Perfect System Splitter Port DB25F DB25M 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 7 7 8 8 20 20 Sample ofa cable pinout to connect from the splitter
50. Save 197 198 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Monitoring alarms The Alarm Monitor screen displays incoming alarms and their priority count and status Alarms display on the Alarm Monitor in order of their priority When an alarm occurs the system beeps and displays a pop up window to notify the operator Click on the Monitor Alarm Monitor icon to bring up Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor screen Figure 65 shows a sample list of alarms their location and the date and time of occurrence Figure 65 The alarm monitor screen anx Ge o New Alarms 5 Total Alarms 5 Display is now active Highest Priority 25 io A R U DN 10 FIRESINE A001 ALERT Pre ALARM 01 06 2005 FIRESINE DN 201 FIRESINE D002 FAULT 01 06 2005 FIRESINE DN 101 FIRESINE F001 FIRE 01 06 2005 FIRESINE DN 201 FIRESINE F002 ALERT 01 06 2005 12 49 33 12 50 55 12 51 50 12 52 48 uU 01 06 2005 01 06 2005 01 06 2005 01 06 2005 Refer to the Picture Perfect User Manual for more information on monitoring and responding to alarms 199 Advanced configuration The Firesine system supports an extended configuration that allows you to alter its behavior This configuration information is kept in the cas db text firesine cfg file This file consists of a series of text lines each containing a variable name followed by a value or setting The Firesine interface reads the file upon startup to configure the port and th
51. Screen A Alarms Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Alarms Alarm Colors AlarmEvents AlarmMessages AlarmResponses Description a AN ll Xo Xx Qi Q l Alarm Description Instructions i Description USER 666 CHANGED TO 555 j Facility 1 GLOBAL v 2ce Y d i Priority j 150 l Route Definition ndm m Alarm Routing MONITOR AND HISTORY v K P No ves Inhibit Schedule Changes No Yes Immediate Reset Input No Yes J Color Sample Color Picker Color Picker Background Immediate Dial Required No Yes Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Manual Reset Outputs Results 0 records Duration Reset Outputs Foreground Follow these steps to modify an alarm description 1 ch a iS Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab In the Description field of the Alarms screen enter the appropriate search criteria Click Find Edit the desired information When completed save the alarm by clicking Save 159 160 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Adding or modifying output groups and outputs If you would like to trigger an output i e door strikes lights or sirens
52. Standard February 1993 SIA Computer Interface Standard June 1990 Radionics D6500 Security Receiver 6500 MPU 07 00 Program Entry Guide 1993 Radionics D6500 Security Receiver Computer Interface Installation Manual 1993 Radionics Technogram Noncompliance with SIA Standards March 1994 Appendix E Configuring a DMP SCS interface This appendix provides information on configuring the DMP SCS 1 interface to Picture Perfect which acts as a secondary monitoring system for the intrusion system alarm central receiver and recognizes only the predefined messages types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect In this appendix P077 7 MET 120 Software requirements ccce csseseeeee eee hh hn 121 Hardware requirements 122 Configuring DMPSCS icu sessio cedet e eed e e ees 126 Advanced configuration csse 162 Interface data file backup and restore 2 ccc 165 120 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Introduction The DMP SCS 1 interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the intrusion system alarm central receiver and recognizes only the predefined messages types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect These predefined messages are of the format and description as defined by the SCS 1 Host Output Specification document version 801 The interface will display as much of any unknown messages as it can The Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor may b
53. The OH Receiver interface is available for standalone enterprise or redundant systems Chapter 2 Installing and removing This chapter provides information on installing or removing Picture Perfect interfaces on a standalone enterpries or a redundant system In this chapter DyerWeW ised pees ed EEN eae eed ees beet ees ed 12 DEN DI C 13 Installing Picture Perfect base software ccce 15 Installing on a Redundant system ccce 15 Installing the interface software cesses 16 Verifying the installation scio scce sete ee ates er reti 23 24 EEN 10 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Overview An interface package can be installed at the same time the Picture Perfect system is installed or any time later If installing an interface at the same time that the Picture Perfect base system is being installed follow the base installation instructions in the Picture Perfect 4 5 Installation Manual to install the base package and then refer to this document for interface installation For redundant configurations you must install the Picture Perfect Redundant System ppr s package before installing the interface software Prior to installation you should configure the port on the interface device for example CCTV switcher receiver panel by which the device will send receive data to from Picture Perfect The following port settings should be configured Baud rate e Parity e Character size e Stop bi
54. The following is an example of an input file for a Picture Perfect 4 5 system mo 12345 123 HU BLDG 3 ROOM 7 EXHAUST HOOD 23 25 kalatel 12 tty2 30122 001 BA FRONT DOOR 10 5 30122 001 BA FRONT DOOR 10 30122 002 BA BACK DOOR 10 5 30122 002 BA BACK DOOR 10 30122 003 BA VAULT DOOR 10 5 30122 003 BA VAULT DOOR 10 01277 345 BL WEST DOOR BLDG 4 ROOM allplex 34 tty3 34567 DEVICE MISSING 1234 DEVICE MISSING 77777 421 888 LOOP IS IN BYPASS 15 77777 421 888 LOOP IS IN RESET 15 30 kalatel 56 tty2 78654 123 SU TBL TBL SUPERVISORY SITUATION 78654 123 EM ALM ALM EMERGENCY SITUATION 15 30 allplex 77 tty3 23456 333 01 USER 333 PERIMETER DISARMED 15 30 allplex 78 tty3 34521 444 02 USER 444 INTERIOR ARMED 35 23411 333 01 USER 333 PERI ATE TO CLOSE 23 20 allplex 99 tty3 34567 123 456 USER 123 ADDED NUMBER 456 1 12 44335 444 555 USER 444 DELETED 1 12 11221 888 999 USER 888 CHANGED TO 999 1 12 10001 30122 200 8 USR 200 GRNTD 30122 200 USR 200 CHANGED PERM SCHEDULE 30122 200 USR 200 CHANGED TEMP SCHEDULE 30122 200 USR 200 CHANGED PRI SCHEDULE D G K SI Hd Dm PD D D D D N 3 DOOR ACCS DEV 12 F D HH SG G U at PO Ob n 30122 200 USR 200 CHANGE EC SCHEDULE 30122 33 VAR MSG TEXT MSG MSG TYPE 33 V
55. addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual Facility Integrator system provided by Siebe CBAS Refer to your CBAS manual for dip switch settings Use the default settings e Serial ports AIX One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem Linux One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COM1 or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the CBAS communication program is started e Null modem cable to connect the Picture Perfect system and the Facility Integrator 262 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Figure 92 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to Facility Integrator DB25F to DB9F Picture Perfect Host Facility Integrator Computer System DB25F DB9F Tx 2 3 Rx Rx 3 2 Tx RIS 4 8 CTS CTS 5 7 RTS SG 7 5 SG DSR 6 DCD 8 4 DTR DTR 20 1 DCD DSR Figure 93 Overview of the Picture Perfect and CBAS interface y Pu Redundant system If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in addition to those listed in yo
56. alarm from Active to Remote This confirms that the alarm has not been responded to in time and has now been sent to the remote system When the remote system responds to the alarm its process state changes to the appropriate value pending completed etc Typically the alarm completes and when it resets it is removed from the Alarm Monitor display Networked The networked version of Picture Perfect works in a similar fashion In the networked Picture Perfect environment there is one network host connected to many subhosts When an alarm is received from a subhost it is routed directly to the network host that is the network host Alarm Monitor contains all of the alarms on the system If all the alarms are to be routed to a single remote system then the RAN package should be loaded on the network host and the RAN process flow will be the one described previously for the standalone configuration If a different remote host will be handling the alarms from each subhost then each subhost should be loaded with its own copy of the RAN package and similarly the RAN process flow will be the one described previously for the standalone configuration 271 Redundant In a redundant configuration the RAN package executes on both Picture Perfect hosts Both the primary and backup hosts are connected to the remote system using two ethernet networks thus the remote system needs to have two network cards to run in this environment The RAN subsy
57. all ancillary documentation entirely before installing or operating this product The most current versions of this and related documentation may be found on our website Refer to Online publication library on page 26 for instructions on accessing our online publication library Note A qualified service person complying with all applicable codes should perform all required hardware installation Conventions used in this document The following conventions are used in this document Bold Menu items and buttons Italic Emphasis of an instruction or point special terms File names path names windows panes tabs fields variables and other GUI elements Titles of books and various documents Blue italic Electronic version Hyperlinks to cross references related topics and URL addresses Monospace Text that displays on the computer screen Programming or coding sequences Safety terms and symbols These terms may appear in this manual A CAUTION Cautions identify conditions or practices that may result in damage to the equipment or other property A WARNING Warnings identify conditions or practices that could result in equipment damage or serious personal injury xiv Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Chapter 1 Interface overview This chapter provides an overview of the different types of interfaces that Picture Perfect supports In this chapter Ittoductloi
58. alone EENG 243 Redundatnt Suetetmt oet b eu Rep bd dientes tue taa tt beoe DM DIG RE A 243 Hardware requirements s esicrisasenrrriit issi ninti ni ehh hh eh mh hr 244 ele ee EE 244 REAUNGONESYSTOM EE 246 Config ration e Satire Acte oi dad ace eed ed Eo x ede o es dan ee Elbe dew De e re buen 250 lr eelere EE 250 eines EE 253 Output group arid eier 255 Monitoring alis EEN 255 Monitoring EE 256 Testing the interface ucciso enue san sdeaeneid Ae ER E EEEE descaling A 256 Extended configuration ccc cece cece ence eee eee eee E nent hn sh hn 256 cas db text oh receiver Kelereiber 256 cas db text oh recelver redundont cho 257 Interface data file backup and restore cece ccc eee eee nent e nee nnn 258 Appendix J Appendix K Configuring a Siebe CBAS interface ccc ccc cece cee cece eeeees 259 InitrodUctioh EE EE 260 Redundantsysteims ee Aere bes of ee EE dee 260 See DUR 260 Hardwaremequltemients EE 261 Extended Configuration 1 eg Loos ee ture AE ne tacit ANEN EE wd Dace bw e wage ER 266 cdas db text cbds thy NictGis EE 266 Jecosddbiteutdchos recdundont cho 267 Interface data file backup and restore cece cece eee cece ene ehh 267 Configuring a Remote Alarm Notification Interface 269 usce 270 SUGMAGIONG E 270 Networked EEUU 270 REGUAGONE DE 271 Software requirements 5 2211699 v lie ECH Re ERE EERSTEN dE MERECE 271 Stand alone SySte 2 00 455 vedere OA erbe e orbi
59. an input group For messages not in the Picture Perfect database a dynamic entry will be created in the input group and alarm database tables These entries use the 20 to 200 database slots in the Picture Perfect Informix input group and alarm tables that are reserved at installation time These represent the number of unknown SCS 1 messages that can be simultaneously displayed on the Alarm Monitor When the reserved slots are depleted the next unique unknown message will overwrite the oldest alarm Redundant Systems The DMP SCS 1 system interface to Picture Perfect supports operations in a Redundant Picture Perfect environment where two hosts have connectivity to a single intrusion receiver Connectivity is achieved using a splitter between the Picture Perfect system and the DMP SCS 1 receiver This allows the physical connection of the intrusion receiver to an RS 232 serial port on each Picture Perfect host computer In a redundant configuration the DMP SCS 1 interface software executes on both Picture Perfect hosts and both receive alarm notifications However only the interface software executing on the primary host communicates with the DMP SCS 1 receiver Whenever an alarm notification is received by the interface software it determines if it is executing on the primary host Alarm notifications received by the interface software executing on the redundant host are processed but output to the receiver is suppressed In the case ofa
60. and alarm records if an explicit one is not specified The currently available defined facilities will be displayed and you will need to make a selection from the provided list If you need to create a new facility specifically for the Stentofon input groups and alarms then you should exit this program create the facility using the GUI then re run this program and then choose that facility Do you wish to exit this program now y n n Entera y toexitthescriptoran n to enter a facility from the choices that will be provided If you entered y you will exit the program and you may create a facility specifically for the Stentofon 9600 interface if you wish then re run the script If you entered n a list of the currently defined facilities on your system will be displayed and you will need to make a selection If the number of facilities on your system exceeds 18 you will need to press to continue through the list until you get to the prompt When you reach the facility that you choose to use by default with the interface keep track of the number This list will be similar to the following Acquiring facility list from database Please wait The following facilities are defined on your system and available to be chosen as the default facility DEFAULT FACILITY Building 1 Building 2 Building 3 Building 4 BUILDING 5 BLDG 1 2 3 4 5 AND PARKING BLDG 2 STUDIO BLDG 2 DESIGN AID Security Control Center
61. and either upper or lower case Itis acceptable to use the same alarm description for multiple input field data lines when installing the data generator records Only one alarm record will be generated in this case and the appropriate input group records will point to the same alarm record Note Do not use an alarm description that matches the description field of an already existing alarm record in the Picture Perfect database This is an illegal condition that scsgen checks for before any data is generated Facility The sixth column is used to specify the facility id that will be used for the input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted to select a Default SCS Facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a Facility value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid acility id values create a report using as the SQL statement Select id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file Priority The seventh column is used to specify the priority that will be used for the alarm record generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted for the Default SCS Priority a number 139 in the range 1 500 Ifa Priority value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Priority will be used Example input file
62. and you will need to make a selection If the number of facilities on your system exceeds 18 you will need to press to continue through the list until you get to the prompt When you observe the facility that you desire to use by default with the interface keep track of the number This list will be similar to the following Acquiring facility list from database Please wait The following facilities are defined on your system and available to be chosen as the default facility DEFAULT FACILITY Building 1 Building 2 Building 3 Building 4 BUILDING 5 BLDG 1 2 3 4 5 AND PARKING BLDG 2 STUDIO BLDG 2 DESIGN AID Security Control Center Head Office Building 1 Garage Building 2 Garage Building 3 Garage Building 4 Garage Building 5 Garage Head Office Garage Penthouse VO OO JO OD VG Co o ES Jan m GO BO EO ex e Ex ons co Press RETURN for more 19 B 1 COMP ROOMS 20 REGENT COURT 21 FAcility A 22 Facility B 23 Commend FAcility Enter the value of the default Commend facility 1 23 1 Enter the number of the default facility to use with the Commend interface This value will be used when creating input group andalarm records from the entries in the input file for which a specific facility is not specified The facility you selected will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it You have selected as the default facility Commend Facility Is this
63. available they may also be used 332 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual This configuration is done automatically when the Stentofon 9600 communication program is started Cable to connect the Picture Perfect system to the intercom console port Refer to Figure 119 Figure 119 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to intercom system DB25F to DB25M Stentofon 9600 Intercom System Black Box Converter Picture Perfect Host Computer DB25F DB25M GND 7 7 GND Tx 2 3 Rx Rx 3 2TX Figure 120 Overview of the Picture Perfect and intercom interface 333 Redundant system If you have a Picture Perfect redundant system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual Note AIX Linux Stentofon Intercom system provided by the manufacturer including Black Box Converter RS 422 to RS 232 Refer to the Stentofon Technical Documentation included with the Security Software Package 64401 for instructions on how to program the Stentofon to forward data to an external system This configuration must be done prior to installation of the Picture Perfect Stentofon 9600 Interface Software package Serial ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then
64. can be compared to a telephone number Both the Picture Perfect network host and the remote system must know the number in order to communicate with each other The default port number assigned at time of installation is 9011 This is recorded in the etc services file This file is a phone book of network services of which RAN is one entry The system administrator or network administrator is responsible for making sure that no two services have the same port number If the RAN 9011 number is already in use by another service it can be changed to another value by editing the etc services file If changed notify the remote system of the new number Note To support functionality in a redundant environment RAN utilizes two ports for the redundant networks The default port number for the redundant network port assigned at time of installation is 9012 Message format from Picture Perfect Version 1 55 or higher The following is the format of the enhanced RAN message sent from Picture Perfect to the remote system Version 1 5 5 or higher typedef struct ecad send pkt int host id int input id int alarm id int ingrp id char host origin 28 Date happened short priority char padding 3 char alarm description 31 char input description 31 int process state char logical state 15 char physical state 15 ECadSendPkt Message format from the remote system The following is the format of the enhanced RAN
65. can be monitored through the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor For any alarm to be monitored or recorded the appropriate routing must be selected from the Alarms form for each alarm The Alarm Description and Location columns correspond to the Alarm and Input Group record description fields respectively From this information the operator should be able to tell which EST interface instance the panel device id and the type of the reported alarm If the Alarm Description field was used properly it should provide more descriptive information about the location of the alarm or panel The complete message of the alarm should be read from the EST panel or from a printer hooked up to that panel The operator will be able to respond and remove these alarm conditions from the monitor but no communication will be sent back to the EST panel since this is a one way communication All messages recognized by the EST interface will show a condition and input state according to the alarm mapping See EST alarm mapping to the alarm monitor on page 180 for more information on mapping As with other Picture Perfect alarms that come into the Alarm Monitor the Count column will increment for those alarms that have come in multiple times Figure 58 Sample alarm monitor screen Waarm MM aaa NS Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor User Monitor Performance Monitor Alarm Monitor lil a 8x SC Gi New Alarms 4
66. cas bin msan set single The following is a sample output from this command Querying the tps daemons table Updating tps daemons entry 54 cas bin msan R A 20030421 175910 statement UPDATE tps daemons SET pathname cas bin msan modify date 20030423 modify time 195449 WHERE id 54 statement processed OK 1 rows affected WHERE id 54 statement processed OK 1 rows affected Successfully update tps daemons table entry 54 cas bin msan R A 20030421 175910 Multiple device support The original design of the switcher interfaces supported only a single CCTV switcher device and allowed only one CCTV command to be sent to a switcher in response to a Picture Perfect alarm event With the introduction of enhanced switcher interfaces the design was extended to support multiple CCTV switcher devices connected to a single Picture Perfect host system In addition any Picture Perfect alarm event can cause output of CCTV commands to multiple switcher devices For compatibility with existing systems the default mode during CCTV switcher interface software installation or upgrade is single device support You must shut down and restart Picture Perfect for the change to take effect Note If a new CCTV switcher interface is installed or you are upgrading an existing CCTV switcher interface and you were previously using the multiple device support feature you must re activate the multiple device support featur
67. cctv 2 kalatel 1558 528 1558 2 ktd_tty2 igd STNO1 FFFO Disconnect cctvName kalatel cctv 3 kalatel 1559 529 1559 3 ktd_tty2 Generated 6 new entries for CCTV switcher device kalatel map table Generated 6 new entries for CCTV switcher device allplex map table Successfully appended new entries to switcher device kalatel map table Successfully appended new entries to switcher device allplex map table Installation complete You have made changes to one or more CCTV mapping files Do you want to inform the system of these changes y n y Enter a y to inform the system or an n to not inform the system If you entered n the changes just made will not be sent to the interface until the next time it is restarted and you will exit the script If you entered y a message will be sent to the running interface and the new map changes will be re read and take effect immediately Messages similar to the following will appear then you will exit the script Sending signal USR2 to task ktd comm Sending signal USR2 to task msan 314 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Using stngen to generate new paging station data after an initial installation If there are new paging stations to be monitored by the Stentofon interface after an stngen installation then one of the following methods should be used when using the stngen tool If you are going to be changing
68. description field of an existing alarm record in the Picture Perfect database This is an illegal condition that nfrgen checks before any data is generated FACILITY The fifth column is used to specify the facility id that will be used forthe input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the nfrgen program you will be prompted to select a Default Notifier Facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a Facility value is not specified in the input file then the Default Notifier Facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid facility id values create a SQL report using as the SQL statement SELECT id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file ALARM PRIORITY The sixth column is optional and contains the priority of the alarm record that will be created for the Alarm Description field It is an integer value in the range 1 500 If this field is not present the default alarm priority specified during the running of n rgen will be used Column Descriptions for Annunciator Trouble Types Except Annunciator Trouble Column 1 Column 2 Column 5 Column 4 Column 5 MSG TYPE ANNUNCIATOR NUMBER ALARM DESCRIPTION FACILITY ALARM PRIORITY MSG TYPE This column is always N for Annunciator messages ANNUNCIATOR NUMBER Column two must contain the two digit annunciator number 01 32 For numbers less than ten add a leading zero ALAR
69. e Teac gs ai SON aH Rc US ca Da di cde ie Ec e a cres ia Rr cre Chega De E C SC End of Default Stentofon Facility assignment portion kk kxk kxk Checking input group file data Checking alarm file data Installing Records DBLOAD Load Utility INFORMIX SQL Version 9 30 UC4 Copyright C Informix Software Inc 1984 1997 Software Serial Number AAD J328673 Table input group had 12 row s loaded into it Table alarm had 12 row s loaded into it statement UPDATE STATISTICS FOR TABLE input group Statement processed OK igd STNO1 01 Request cctvName allegiant cctv 0 allegiant 1548 518 1548 0 alle tty2 Creating CCTV device allegiant map addition file tmp stn allegiant deltaigd STNO1 01 Connect cctvName allegiant cctv 1 allegiant 1549 519 1549 1 alle tty2 igd STNO1 01 Busy cctvName allegiant cctv 1 allegiant 1550 520 1550 1 alle tty2 igd STNO1 01 Disconnect cctvName allplex cctv 1 allplex 1552 522 1552 1 allp tty3 Creating CCTV device allplex map addition file tmp stn allplex deltaigd STNO1 10 Connect cctvName allplex cctv 2 allplex 1553 523 1553 2 allp tty3 igd STNO1 10 Busy cctvName allplex cctv 2 allplex 1554 524 1554 2 allp tty3 igd STN01 10 Disconnect cctvName allplex cctv 3 allplex 1555 525 1555 3 allp tty3 igd STN01 03 Request cctvName allplex cctv 4 allplex 1555 526 1556 4 allp tty3 igd STN01 03 Connect cctvName allplex cctv 5 allplex 15
70. e e e eene 177 Adding or modifying output groups and outputs n 2 6 cece een 179 EST alarm mapping to the alarm monitor 180 SCHER ele TEE 181 Advanced configuration e 8 d dE d SE BEEN EE ed IRR NEUE d Ee 184 Configuring a Firesine Interface 187 uge UI d EE 188 Reduhdantsystetris ee e Ebene ERE I G Ee EE SEENEN 188 Software requirements ccce e ve rk vena NN RER eevee beet ENEE dE ee ere REPEAT 189 Stand alone System EE 189 REAUMGANTSYSTOM ous d Ake d beeagueand upset Ae Adela ad sides E E SP ete 189 Hardware requirements 5 29 1 eer EN AN E rh resi EE ER ERR EE ode NENNEN EE 189 Standsalene SyStemm EE 189 Reduridant systems vss ases ees ote VE Rr re bee RERUM d ANN Rag X 190 te niin TET 193 Firesirie message StPUCbUFe osos epe bes EDRARRN EVER EE e 193 Picture perfect input group description 194 Adding OF moditying annputgroup sioe rm pen PUERO RR T ea ale d dec TEM rau 194 Adding or modifying an ala Mise EE 196 M nitoring Keel EE 198 Advanced configuration Ne SEENEN a D a eR nu e er EEN E e E ER dade ENN EE RYE ERR EEN Ea 199 vii viii Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Appendix H Appendix I Configuring a Notifier Interface 201 Introductio aaan hiGston awed ENEE EELER EES EES EE Rd E 202 Redundantsystems sseencecotectreesee m bedded eh Ad eR aD EEN PI NEE EE 202 Software requirements eser ELSEN ves e eR RR UG OSEE E EREE REES hand ERNEST n eth ER IR ties 203 elle Wee
71. facility specifically for use with the Commend interface 100 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Input file An input file is required when using the install portion of the cmdgen tool It describes the types of messages to be monitored by the Commend alarm interface The input file is a text editable file that must be created prior to running the tool The installation portion of the tool will ask you the name of the input file you want to use The input file will be parsed by the tool and the appropriate input group and alarm records will be created If the input specifies activation of CCTV devices the appropriate definition records will be generated and appended to the mapping file specific to each CCTV switcher interface The CCTV switcher interface tasks can be signalled to access the new information making CCTV control active with the new information The format and rules for the file are discussed in the following sections To create an input file you will need to know The version of Picture Perfect you are running This is very important because the layout of the database records may be different depending on the version of Picture Perfect that is running and this tool can generate different output depending on the version e The blocks stations to be monitored e For each block station the alarm condition generated for the various types of communication activities possible as discussed later e For each Alarm Conditio
72. field For example NFR1 ALARM SILENCED The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation Acknowledge To recognize the Acknowledge messages use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt ACKNOWLEDGE gt where IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters ACKNOWLEDGE is a fixed field For example NFR1 ACKNOWLEDGE The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation Manual Evacuate To recognize the Manual Evacuate messages use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt MANUAL EVACUATE gt where IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters MANUAL EVACUATE isa fixed field For example NFR1 MANUAL EVACUATE The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation 232 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Adding an input group Follow these steps to add an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 Complete the Input Groups form for each input group These fields must be set as follows Delay Time 0 Boolean Type Individual Input Group State Enabled Open Condition Ignored Short Condition Ignored Broadcast State Changes No Alarm Should poi
73. file ktd comm tty4 cfg 1 5 Copyright C 1996 2003 GE Interlogix CASI All Rights Reserved ktd comm tty4 cfg 1 5 4 28 02 This file contains the configuration information for the KALATEL CCTV interface via a KTD 312 Computer Interface unit MonitorId 00 FunctionCodeOn FunctionCodeOff N The following values are set based on your installation responses PortName dev tty4 PortBaud 9600 Single device support To configure a Picture Perfect system to support output of CCTV commands to only one switcher device in response to a single Picture Perfect alarm event use the msan set single utility A sample execution of this utility is provided below If multiple switcher devices are installed and Picture Perfect is configured for single device support a CCTV command is sent to only one of the installed switcher devices in response to a Picture Perfect alarm event You may want to configure the system in this manner if each alarm event is to be routed to only one CCTV switcher and you require maximum interface performance A slight performance gain occurs since the switcher device mapping tables do not need to be searched for all matching entries As soon as the first match is found the search terminates To change the Picture Perfect CCTV switcher device support option to single perform the following steps 1 Log in to the system as root 2 Enterthe command cas bin profile 3 Enter the command
74. file then the Default SCS Facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid facility id values create a report using as the SOL statement Select id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file Priority The seventh column is used to specify the priority that will be used for the alarm record generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted for the Default SCS Priority a number in the range 1 500 If a Priority value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Priority will be used 136 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Column descriptions for J Door Access Granted Message Types Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Msg Type Account User Device Addr Alarm Desc Facility Priority 1 char 5 digits 2 to 4 2 chars 1 to 60 1 to 10 digits f to 8 digits chars digits J 00 9999 01 08 1 or 1 500 1 2 147 483 647 Msg Type Column one is always J for door access granted messages Account Column two is the five digit account number with a range of 00000 99999 User Column three is used to specify the number of the user who was granted access It is a two to four digit string with a range of 00 9999 based upon the SCS 1 programming Device Addr Column four is used to specify the address of the device where the access was granted It is a two character string with the range of 01 08 Alarm Desc Column five
75. for each unique device to be recognized The alarm routing should be set up to according to the desired routing If you do not want a particular alarm to be routed to the monitor printer or history file then you should select None from the Set Alarm Routing picklist Follow these steps to add an alarm description 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Complete the Alarms form These fields should be set as follows Online Yes Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Set the priority alarm routing and instructions as needed Note The routing must be set to one of the possible selections that includes the MONITOR for an alarm to show up on the Alarm Monitor 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another alarm 177 178 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Figure 57 Sample alarm screen A Alarms Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Alarms Alarm Colors AlarmEvents Aarm Messages Alarm Responses Description e O AfD xo x CSC e Alarm Description Instructions Description Pull Station Bldg 2 South Wall Facility GLOBAL x P Priority jl 50 Route Definition 4 Alarm Routing S MONITOR AND HISTORY x Y of Color Picker Color Picker Online No Yes hibit Schedule Changes No ves I
76. for instructions on enabling this option e The panel must be configured with the Auxiliary Printer Monitoring option disabled See the AM2020 AFP1010 manual for instructions on disabling this option 204 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Hardware requirements The hardware requirements for the Picture Perfect stand alone and the Picture Perfect redundant system are listed below Stand alone system If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual For the Picture Perfect system AIX Linux Serial Ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COM1 or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Notifier communication program is started For the Notifier AFP1010 or AM2020 system Notifier Interface Panel AFP1010 or AM2020 equipped with revision 6 5 or later EPROMs Serial Line Cable to connect from the Picture Perfect system s serial port to the appropriate SIB board on the No
77. given previously the corresponding alarm descriptions might be as follows Station FFF7 Request Station FFF7 Connect Station FFF7 Disconnect An example of a valid alarm record is shown in Figure 117 Sample alarm screen on page 320 Alternatively a single alarm could be defined for all three actions as follows Paging Station FFF7 The Alarm Routing should be set to the desired routing If you do not want a particular alarm to be routed to the monitor printer or history file then you should select None from the Set Alarm Routing picklist 320 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Follow these steps to add an alarm description 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Complete the Alarms form These fields should be set as follows Online Yes Immediate Reset Input Yes Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Set the priority alarm routing facility and instructions as needed Note The routing must be set to one of the possible selections that includes the MONITOR for an alarm to show up on the Alarm Monitor and to allow control of CCTV cameras 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another alarm Figure 117 Sample alarm screen A Alarms Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Alarms Alarm Colors Alarm Events Alarm Messages Alarm Responses Besten 4 Q g E X 2 4 x E Gi Alarm Description j Instructions Description i Station
78. group information is lost whenever the stngen9600 tool is used to uninstall database records 2 Modify or add the new paging station data to the input file 3 Invoke stngen9600 and use the modified input file to re create the data records stngen9600 uninstall This portion of stngen9600 removes the database records associated with a specific Stentofon 9600 interface Before running the uninstall program you will need to know the input group prefix Note Itis a good idea to backup the database before using the uninstall portion of the stngen9600 tool This can be done through the Control Backup form See your Picture Perfect documentation for more details Input group prefix All input group records that have descriptions that match the input group prefix the first 5 characters will be removed from the database The alarm records that each input group points to will be removed as well but with one exception If the alarm record is associated with any other input group records outside of the ones to be removed no records will be removed and the user will be notified of this condition This situation must be corrected by the user before any records can be removed using the stngen9600 tool The input group user interface can be used to correct this situation by re assigning the alarm that it is linked to so that it does not conflict with alarms that are going to be removed This is to prevent the accidental removal of alarm records to whi
79. gt lt CCTVNumber gt lt Port gt ma lt IntercomStation gt This is the 2 character Intercom station identification number valid values are 01 through 96 as described in Message types on page 354 lt messagetype gt Identifies the type of message and is one of Request Connect Busy or Disconnect corresponding to the Intercom protocol messages as defined in Message types on page 354 lt AlarmDesc gt This is the unique alarm message text to be displayed on the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor screen and or logged to the history file The maximum length of this field is 60 characters lt Facility gt This is the id of the facility that will be used for the input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the stngen9600 program you will be prompted to select a default Stentofon 9600 facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a facility value is not specified in the input file then the default Stentofon 9600 facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid facility id values create a SQL report using as the SQL statement SELECT id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file lt CCTVDeviceName gt lt CCTVNumber gt and Port fields These fields are optional but if present identify a CCTV switcher which camera is to be controlled when the alarm occurs and which port the CCTV 1s connected on
80. have a simpler set of rules for setting up the input group A complete list of the fixed message types that the Notifier panel will recognize is listed in Fixed messages types on page 214 The following message types are considered fixed message types All Systems Normal e Signal Silence System Reset e System Test Lamp Test e Block Acknowledge It is crucial to understand the format for each message type when setting up an input group since this is the key to monitoring messages from the Notifier panel The input group description field is limited to 60 characters which will be fully used in many cases to uniquely identify a specific message type and status for a particular device Each message type will always use the input group prefix as the first part of the description See Input group prefix on page 214 for more information If you are going to add a number of input group records for the Notifier interface it is suggested that you use the nfrgen data generator tool which is capable of quickly producing input group and associated alarm records automatically given a formatted input file See the section entitled Using nfrgen on page 209 for more information on using this tool The input group prefix used in any of the listed message types must match the one established in the appropriate configuration file See nput group prefix on page 214 for more information When establishing an input group record the description field must
81. input file for existing database records then use Method 2 below 108 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Method 1 1 Create a new input file with the new data lines 2 Invoke cmdgen and use the new input file Method 2 1 Use cmdgen to uninstall all the data records based upon the input group prefix An uninstall removes all input group records and associated alarm records that have the given input group prefix Note Any input group using the targeted input group prefix to be un installed that was created manually through the Picture Perfect Input Group Form will be removed which means it will be permanently lost if its data was not originally part of the input file Output and output group information is lost whenever the cmdgen tool is used to uninstall database records 2 Modify or add the new block station data to the input file 3 Invoke cmdgen and use the modified input file to re create the data records Cmdgen uninstall This portion of cmdgen removes the database records associated with a specific Commend interface Before running the uninstall program you will need to know the input group prefix Note Itis a good idea to backup the database before using the uninstall portion of the cmdgen tool This can be done through the Control Backup form See your Picture Perfect documentation for more details Input group prefix All input group records that have descriptions that match the input group prefix the fi
82. inst 1 6 02 17 03 e This file contains the configuration information for the Universal Intrusion Alarm Interface Each interface that is running on a Picture Perfect system must have its own configuration file which contains the information on the specific serial line port the interface is going to read from It also contains the input group prefix that the interface will use to recognize specific input group database records using this prefix The InpGrpPrefix parameter is a required parameter in the configuration file This parameter is the prefix that must be used in the description field for all input groups that are to be recognized by the interface If this parameter is changed here it must be changed for all the input groups that are using it as a prefix This prefix 374 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual is case sensitive so the declaration in here must match the one used in the input group description This description must not exceed 4 characters and the last character or characters should be numeric The input group prefix declared in here will be read when the interface is started If more than one interface is installed then the input group prefix must be unique in each configuration file An example prefix would be UI02 and the next interface that is installed could be UI02 All information is divided into two columns configuration item label and the desired setting Th
83. instructions as needed Note The routing must be set to one of the possible selections that includes the monitor for an alarm to show up on the Alarm Monitor 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another alarm 254 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Figure 90 Sample alarm screen A Alarms Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Alarms Alarm Colors AlarmEvents Aarm Messages Alarm Responses Description e O AfD xo x CSC e Alarm Description instructions i Description 1 OH Y PA PANIC ALARM Facility r GLOBAL x P Priority Jr 50 Route Definition 4 Alarm Routing S MONITOR AND HISTORY x y of Color Picker Color Picker Online No Yes hibit Schedule Changes O No Yes Immediate Reset Input No Yes Immediate Dial Required No ves Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs O Manual Reset Outputs al gt Duration Reset Outputs Results 0 records Follow these steps to modify an alarm description Color Sample Background Foreground 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Inthe Description field of the Alarms screen enter the appropriate search criteria 3 C
84. instructions for setting up outputs and output groups are described in the Picture Perfect manual All fields and options in the Outputs forms may not apply since this is a one way communication between the Commend Intercom system and Picture Perfect Note Configuring output groups and outputs is optional If the cmdgen tool is used to uninstall database records any outputs and output groups that you defined will be lost Monitoring alarms You are now finished with the basic configuration of the Commend interface The Commend messages that have been recognized through the input groups and linked to an alarm can be monitored through the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor For any alarm to be monitored or recorded the appropriate routing must be selected from the Alarms form for each alarm The Alarm Description and Location columns correspond to the Alarm and Input Group record description fields respectively From this information the operator should be able to tell the From To station and action from the reported alarm The operator will be able to respond and remove these alarm conditions from the monitor but no communication will be sent back to the Commend system since this is a one way data information communication All messages recognized by the Commend interface will show a condition of Alarm and an Input State of N A As with other Picture Perfect alarms that come into the Alarm Monitor the Count column will increment for those alarms th
85. into the description field of an input group record For example let s use the following line of data and assume an input group prefix of SCS1 A 12345 123 HU BLDG 3 ROOM 7 EXHAUST HOOD 23 25 kalatel 12 tty2 This message would generate e one input group record with the following description 141 SCS1 12345 123 HU ALM one alarm record would be generated with the following description BLDG 3 ROOM 7 EXHAUST HOOD The input group record would be linked to this alarm In addition a new entry specifying that CCTV camera 7 connected to the Kalatel switcher should be activated when this alarm occurs will be added to the Kalatel switcher map file There are other important fields to an input group and alarm record that automatically are completed by the generator For the input group records the following fields are set accordingly Delay Time 0 Boolean Type Individual Input Group State Enabled Open Condition Ignored Short Condition Ignored Broadcast State Changes No Alarm Should point to the alarm record generated for this input group Parent Input Group should all be lt BLANK gt Output Group should all be lt BLANK gt Facility lt facility specified gt The default values for the alarm records are Online Yes Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Alarm Routing Monitor and History Priority lt priority specified gt Immediate Reset Input Yes Facility lt facility specified gt Installing using scsgen B
86. is executing on the primary host Alarm notifications received by the interface software executing on the redundant host are not processed In the case of a failover the mode on the redundant host will change to indicate that it is now the primary and the interface software will then conduct communications with the Touchline Exchange 301 Software requirements The software requirements for the Stentofon interface and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system If you are using a stand alone Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect base base package Picture Perfect Stentofon interface stentofon package Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required e Picture Perfect base base package e Picture Perfect redundant system pprs package e Picture Perfect Stentofon interface stentofon package Hardware requirements The hardware requirements for the Picture Perfect stand alone and the Picture Perfect redundant system are listed below Stand alone system If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual Stentofon Intercom system provided by the manufacturer including PMF R processor board with Security Software Package 64401 Note Refer to the Stentofon Technical Documentation included with the S
87. is executing on the primary host Alarm notifications received by the interface software executing on the redundant host are not processed In the case of a failover the mode on the redundant host will change to indicate that it is now the primary and the interface software will then process the alarms received from the EST system 169 Software requirements The software requirements for the firepanel system and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system If you are using a stand alone Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect base base package Picture Perfect EST firepanel interface est package Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required e Picture Perfect base base package e Picture Perfect redundant system pprs package Picture Perfect EST firepanel interface est package Hardware requirements The hardware requirements for the Picture Perfect stand alone and the Picture Perfect redundant system are listed below Stand alone system If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual EST panel with available printer port connection provided by the manufacturer e Serial line cable to connect to the Picture Perfect system This cable should be a standard RS 232 serial cable that would normally w
88. log files contain the SQL statements and errors logged during the delete process tmp stn inpgrp del Log tmp stn alarm del log Successfully deleted entries from switcher device kalatel map file Un install completed You have made changes to one or more CCTV mapping files Do you want to inform the system of these changes y n y If this script was called from the removal script then select n to not inform the system now since it s not running When re started the changes will take effect If the Picture Perfect system 1s running select y ifyou want these changes to take effect now or n if you want them to take effect at the next restart If n was selected you will return to the prompt or back to the removal script If y was selected messages similar to the following will appear then you will exit the script Sending signal USR2 to task ktd tty4 Sending signal USR2 to task msan Using Picture Perfect to configure the Stentofon interface For a successful configuration follow these steps 1 Adding or modifying input groups for the 3 possible message types for each paging station to be monitored Adding or modifying alarms Adding or modifying output groups and outputs if desired Monitoring alarms Adding or modifying input groups The input group record description is the key to identifying specific Stentofon Touchline Exchange protocol messages The format of the description is defined such that it c
89. long ingrp door held open input group record number area id area record number inv input grp invalid badge read input group record number susp input grp suspended badge read input group record number lost input grp lost badge input group record number unk input grp unknown badge read input group record number apb input group duress input group anti passback violation input group record number duress input group record number 78 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Table 5 Database tables referenced by the cstgen tool continued Table Field Name Description input group id input group record number alarm alarm record number input id input record number input group input group record number alarm id alarm record number host id host record number hcomm ingrp host communication failure input group record number 1 Host information is present only in an enterprise networked Picture Perfect configuration Assigning account numbers The Central Station interface requires that alarm notification messages contain an account number This account information is specific to the Central Station system and not a part of the Picture Perfect system The Picture Perfect to Central Station interface software uses an accounts table to define the account numbers required by the Central Station system This table contained in the file cas db text cstation a
90. package e Picture Perfect Universal Intrusion interface univ intr package Hardware requirements The hardware requirements for the Picture Perfect stand alone and the Picture Perfect redundant system are listed below Stand alone system If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual Universal Intrusion system receiver provided by the manufacturer e Serial Ports AIX One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem Linux One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COM1 or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Universal Intrusion communication program is started Cable to connect the Picture Perfect system to the intrusion system console port Refer to Figure 127 362 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 127 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to Intrusion Receiver DB25F to DB25F Picture Perfect Host Intrusion System Computer Receiver DB25F DB25F Shield 1 1 Shield Rxd 2 Rxd Txd 3 Txd 4 RTS 5 CTS 8 DCD
91. paging station data in the input file for existing database records then use Method 2 below Method 1 1 Create a new input file with the new data lines 2 Invoke stngen anduse the new input file Method 2 1 Use stngen to uninstall all the data records based upon the input group prefix An uninstall removes all input group records and associated alarm records that have the given input group prefix Note Any input group using the targeted input group prefix to be uninstalled that was created manually through the Picture Perfect Input Group Form will be removed which means it will be permanently lost if its data was not originally part of the input file Output and output group information is lost whenever the stngen tool is used to uninstall database records 2 Modify or add the new paging station data to the input file 3 Invoke stngen and use the modified input file to re create the data records stngen uninstall This portion of stngen removes the database records associated with a specific Stentofon interface Before running the uninstall program you will need to know the input group prefix Note Itis a good idea to backup the database before using the uninstall portion of the stngen tool This can be done through the Control Backup form See your Picture Perfect documentation for more details Input group prefix All input group records that have descriptions that match the input group prefix the first 4 to 5 characters
92. panel device ID was found along with the alarm an alarm message is sent to be processed by Picture Perfect Further information should be obtained from the primary monitoring device which is the EST panel Firesine The Firesine System interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Firesine System and recognizes only the predefined message types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect It acts as a filter that recognizes predefined alarm conditions coming in over the serial line Once an alarm is detected the Firesine interface extracts the ID for the specific type of message F lt id gt Fire A lt id gt Alert Pre Alarm D lt id gt Fault Detected R system reset message we use the configured message from the firesine configuration file The ID or reset message must have been previously set up in Picture Perfect If it was the associated alarm reset is generated Time Date Zonal and General Fault messages are ignored Further information should be obtained from the primary monitoring device that is the Firesine panel Notifier This interface acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Notifier AFP400 AFP1010 and AM2020 firepanel and recognizes only the predefined messages built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect It may be used to monitor messages from the Notifier panel For detector and module monitoring the information displayed in the Alarm Monitor will show
93. re enter the default alarm priority If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the value If you entered y the input data will be checked If there were errors they will be displayed and you will need to correct those errors and begin this process again If no errors are found the input group and alarm records will be entered into the Picture Perfect database You will see messages similar to the following Checking input file data Installing Records DBLOAD Load Utility INFORMIX SQL Version 9 30 UC4 Copyright C Informix Software Inc 1984 1997 Software Serial Number AAB4J328673 a Table input group had 49 row s loaded into it E Table alarm had 6 row s loaded into it statement update statistics for table input group Statement processed OK statement update statistics for table alarm Statement processed OK Installation complete 221 Using nfrgen to generate new device data after an initial installation If there are new devices to be monitored by the Notifier interface after an nf rgen installation then one of the following methods should be used when using the n f rgen tool Use these methods when you are adding new devices to be monitored by the interface If you are going to be adding or changing message types in the input file for existing database records then proceed to the section Using nfrgen to change or add message types for an existing device after an initial installat
94. record for each input group record that has the same device and location The description field has no restrictions or required format since all the unique information for a message type is located in the input group description If there are similar alarm descriptions that apply to unique devices then separate alarm records and input group records should be created for each unique device to be recognized For example if you are going to be monitoring alarm messages and the four possible status conditions for a detector you would have four input groups that could point to one alarm record The alarm record could further describe the location of the detector An example of this alarm record is shown in Figure 48 The Alarm Routing should be set up to according to the desired routing If you do not want a particular alarm to be routed to the monitor printer or history file then you should select None from the Set Alarm Routing picklist Follow these steps to add an alarm description 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Complete the Alarms form These fields should be set as follows Online Yes e Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Immediate Reset Input Yes Set the priority alarm routing and instructions as needed Note The routing must be set to one of the possible selections that includes the MONITOR for an alarm to show up on the Alarm Monitor 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another alarm Figure 50 Sample Alarm
95. regardless of their state However if the Remove Alarm Only If Reset option is selected on the Setup Parameter window only alarms in reset state may be removed What Happens When the Connection is Lost The moment that communications are disrupted the alarm that the RAN system might have been trying to send to the remote system is saved in memory If new alarms are received by RAN to be sent on to the remote system they are buffered onto the hard disk As soon as communications with the remote system are restored the first alarm sent 1s the alarm in memory that RAN was trying to send when the connection went down After that alarm is sent RAN goes to the hard disk and sends all the alarms on a first in first out FIFO order to the remote system The RAN system may also be configured at installation time to safeguard against alarm loss If the AlarmLossChk configuration parameter is set to Yes as alarms are processed new alarms will not be 280 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual forwarded to the remote system until a response is received for the alarm that was just sent The new alarms will be buffered onto the hard disk into the PipeName file for a maximum of PipeSize alarms The PipeSize variable sets the maximum number of alarms that can be stored on the hard disk The default number of alarms that the file can hold is 100 alarms The location of the file used on the hard disk is controlled by the PipeName variable This
96. search criteria 3 Click Find At least two input group entries will be found Locate the REMOTE ALARM NOTIFICATION HOST input group in the grid 4 Edit the input group Description field Note The input group description or location displays as the Description on the Alarm Monitor form Therefore you may want to enter a more specific description such as the actual remote alarm system s name such as REMOTE RAN HOST lt hostname gt DO NOT edit any other field on this form most fields are ignored but others can prevent the alarm from occurring The initial settings are shown in Figure 100 Figure 100 Input groups form 63 Inputs Outputs Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones L Input Groups Inputs Output Groups Outputs Input Group Events Output Group Events Description qa 4E X o 4 x amp Define Input Group Parent input Groups Output Groups Description REMOTE ALARM HOST Facility GLOBAL Input Group State Disabled Enabled Boolean Type OR Any ND CAII 9 Individual Broadcast State Changes No Q Yes Alarm Delay Time isl Results 1records w inn Open Condition Ignored Detected Short Condition Ignored Detected REMOTE HOST NOT RESPO w geo N E v 5 When co
97. switcher is connected on dev tty2 only specify tty2 Msg Type This column is always s for System Alarm Trouble Supervisory messages Account Column two is the five digit account number with a range of 00000 99999 Message This column is up to 15 characters in length and contains one of these three valid messages DEVICE MISSING DEVICE RESTORED or ABORT Modifier The modifier is a four digit string with a range of 0000 9999 Alarm Description The fifth column is used as the alarm description field for the alarm record that is created for the associated input group record This description is what appears on the Alarm Monitor when an alarm occurs and should be used as a custom device label that helps describe more information about the device or detector and the event that occurred It can be up to 60 characters in length and either upper or lower case It is acceptable to use the same alarm description for multiple input file data lines when installing the data generator records Only one alarm record will be generated in this case and the appropriate input group records will point to the same alarm record Note Do not use an alarm description that matches the description field of an already existing alarm record in the Picture Perfect database This is an illegal condition that scsgen checks for before any data is generated Facility The sixth column is used to specify the facilit
98. system Below is an explanation of the information shown by the display The Alarm Description column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate alarm record that was created manually or by the cmdgen tool The Location column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate input group record which was created manually or by the cmdgen tool Line 2 The Commend system has received either a call request 21 or 22 for Block FF23 Station FF 13 Line 3 The Commend system has received either an acknowledge 12 or 31 for Block FF23 Station FF13 Line 4 The Commend system has received either a clear 10 or 30 for Block FF23 Station FF13 Line 5 The Commend system has received a door release 0A for Block FF23 Station 13 Line 6 The Commend system has received a duress code 1D for Block FF23 Testing the Interface Once the input groups and alarm database records have been set up and the interface is running it should be tested to make sure messages are being correctly recognized by the interface The Alarm Monitor should receive the appropriate messages if they have been set up correctly If the Alarms are not being shown on the Alarm Monitor then the appropriate input group description should be checked to make sure that it follows the format specified for that message type listed under the Adding or modifying input groups on page 110 Make sure the appropriate Input Group prefix is being used in the description field and that it
99. the description field for all input groups that are to be recognized by the interface If this parameter is changed here it must be changed for all the input groups that are using it as a prefix This prefix is case sensitive so the declaration in here must match the one used in the input group description This description must not exceed 4 characters and the last character or characters should be numeric The input group prefix declared in 163 The following values ar here will be read when the interface is started If more than one interface is installed then the input group prefix must be unique in each configuration file An example prefix would be SCS1 and the next interface that is installed could be SCSI2 unless instructed by GE Icanon NumberOfDatabaseSlots FirstInputGroupNumber FirstAlarmNumber InpGrpPrefix PortName PortBaud CharacterSize Parity StopBits Xon Xoff UserNumberLen unique to the SCS interface do not change Interlogix CASI n 20 1067 116 The following values are setup based on your installation responses SCS1 dev tty5 9600 8 E 3 el 164 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual cas db text scs_signals_ttyN cfg or cas db text scs_signals cfg This file contains signals that are to be ignored by the SCS interface The cas db text scs signals cfg file is the default signal configuration file This file is
100. the device type status loop and detector module number and a user defined description field Further message information should be obtained from the primary monitoring device which is the Notifier panel and associated printer This interface can monitor system type messages coming from the Notifier panel which do not have an associated device type Simplex The Simplex interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Simplex 4100 fire alarm system and only recognizes the specific fire and life safety alarms and resets the interface was developed to handle Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Intrusion detection systems supported by Picture Perfect The intrusion detection interface for Picture Perfect receives alarm input from the intrusion system and recognizes predefined message types built into the interface that are set up through Picture Perfect These messages are mapped to the Picture Perfect database enabling annunciation of the intrusion event DMP SCS The DMP SCS 1 interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the DMP SCS 1 alarm central receiver and recognizes predefined message types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect Messages or alarms recognized by the DMP SCS 1 interface are looked up in the Picture Perfect database For messages NOT in the Picture Perfect database a dynamic entry will be created in the input group and alarm database tables T
101. the following sections Message types Column descriptions for A Alarm T Trouble R Restore B Force Arm and W Fault Message Types Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Msg Type Account Loop Loop Type Alarm Description Facility Priority 1 char 5 digits 3 digits 2 chars 1to 60 characters 1to 10 digits 1 to 3 digits A T R B or W 0 999 BL FA BA SU 10r 1 500 HU EM A1 A2 1 2 147 483 647 Note Three additional optional fields may be specified identifying a CCTV switcher name see the list of Picture Perfect supported CCTV names in the section Mapping CCTV monitored events on page 61 such as kalatel or allplex a CCTV number the CCTV alarm number that will be sent to the switcher when the SCS alarm is received and the TTY port by which the switcher is connected to the Picture Perfect host When specifying the port only use the tty portion of the name For example if the switcher is connected on dev tty2 only specify tty2 128 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Msg Type This column is a one character abbreviation of the message type to be monitored A Alarm Message T Trouble Message R Restore Message B Force Arm Message d Fault Message Account The account number is a five digit string with a range of 00000 99999 Loop The loop number is a three digit string with a range of 000 999 Loop Type The loop type is a two character alpha numeric st
102. the tool must match the SCS 1 interface that is being targeted Input Group Prefix When Un installing The input group prefix is used when using the uninstall portion of the scsgen tool All input group records that have descriptions that match the input group prefix the first 3 to 4 characters will be removed from the database except for the slots that were reserved during package installation for the dynamically created unknown alarms The alarm records that each input group points to will be removed with one exception If the alarm record is linked to any other input group records outside of the ones to be removed the scsgen tool will not remove any records and will notify the user of this condition This situation must be corrected by the user before any records can be removed using the scsgen tool The input group user interface can be used to correct this situation by re assigning the alarm that it 1s linked to so that it does not conflict with alarms that are going to be removed This prevents accidental removal of alarm records linked to other input group records Input Group and Alarm Records Generated by scsgen The input file processed by scsgen produces input group and alarm database records that are inserted into the database when the tool is run The input group records created are unique for each valid line in the input file This is done by combining the input group prefix message status possibilities device type and loop detector
103. to provide paging station monitoring on an individual call handler basis Stentofon 9600 The Stentofon 9600 interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Stentofon P 9600 intercom system and recognizes only the predefined intercom message types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect The data transfer is uni directional from the Stentofon P 9600 intercom system to the interface on the Picture Perfect host across a serial line connection Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Miscellaneous systems supported by Picture Perfect These systems can exist in stand alone subhost network host and redundant versions of Picture Perfect as noted Central Station This interface provides a communication mechanism between Picture Perfect and central monitoring systems that allow control of activities for multiple systems and both local and remote sites from a single location The central station software can process alarms from the Picture Perfect system This allows a Central Station operator to work from one screen and process alarms from both the Picture Perfect Access Control System and from their intrusion detection system The communication is two way using a serial line connection and is available for stand alone systems Siebe CBAS The Siebe Environmental Control s Facility Integrator CBAS interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Facility Integrator
104. treated as an alarm and routed to Monitor History Click on the Monitor Alarm Monitor icon to bring up the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor screen Figure 110 shows a sample list of alarms their location and the date and time of occurrence Figure 110 The Alarm Monitor screen Alarm Monitor EEE dp d Nam Monitor 3 a x amp a New Alarms Total Alarms Display is now active Highest Priority 15 Location Condition D Device Date Device Time E RTS 2nd STAIR 0101020 Alarm A 01 06 200 0 10 6 200 SIMPLEX SYSTEM RESET COMP NO ALARMS PRESENT Alarm 01 06 2005 10 10 38 01 06 2005 SIMPLEX ALARM MAIN ENTRANCE STAIR 01010201 Alarm 01 06 2005 10 10 55 01 06 2005 Refer to the Picture Perfect User Manual for more information on monitoring and responding to alarms 296 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Extended configuration The Simplex interface supports an extended configuration that allows you to alter its behavior This configuration information is kept in the following files cas db text simplex cfg cas db text simplex redundant cfg where ttyN is the name of the port specified for the interface cas db text simplex cfg This file contains configuration information specific to the copy of the interface that connects to the Simplex device attached to the specified port It consists of a series of text lines each containing a variable name followed by a value or setting The Simplex interface
105. up the location and alarm columns displayed on the Alarm Monitor For example a PANIC ALARM might appear on the Alarm Monitor as follows The alarm record description field can be used to further identify or describe the OH Receiver input group it is going to be linked to Several input group records can be linked to the same alarm for example to a generic PANIC ALARM It may be prudent to set up one alarm record for each input group record s that has the same line description and account The description field has no restrictions or required format since all the unique information for a message type is located in the input group description If there are similar alarm descriptions that apply to unique devices then separate alarm records and input group records can be created for each unique device to be recognized For example if you modify the description in alarm record OH Y PA PANIC ALARM to read OH Y PA Panic Bldg 1 Lobby the display will appear as follows The alarm routing should be set up to according to the desired routing If you do not want a particular alarm to be routed to the monitor printer or history file then you should select NONE from the Set Alarm Routing picklist Follow these steps to add an alarm description 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Complete the Alarms form These fields should be set as follows Online Yes Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Set the priority alarm routing and
106. will not inform the Picture Perfect system that the mapping file has been changed However if Picture Perfect is restarted the current mapping file is read automatically In other words all your changes will be read at that time whether or not you are done with them Refer to Figure 14 Example of exiting the program on page 41 to see the prompts and messages that display when exiting from the alphacom map program Figure 14 Example of exiting the program EE N kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk A Add an AlphaCom controlled alarm D Delete an AlphaCom controlled alarm P Print a hardcopy of all CCTV controlled alarms FF 000 0 HF X X Exit kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Selection x You have made changes to the mapping file Do you want to inform the system of these changes y n Y Sent SIGUSR2 signal to AlphaCom interface task alphacom comm on this host Sent SIGUSR2 signal to AlphaCom interface task msan on this host NN P Advanced configuration The AlphaCom interface software supports an extended configuration that allows you to alter its behavior This configuration information is kept in the cas db text alphacom cfg file The file consists of a series of text lines each containing a variable name followed by a value or setting Note DO NOT change this file unless absolutely necessary If you find it
107. with subtypes Alarm a Restore r Fault w Reset y Trouble t Force Arm b and Bypass x Disarmed Armed Late to Arm Code Number Added Code Number Deleted Code Number Changed Permanent Schedule Changed Message type abbreviation Message type Temporary Schedule Changed n Primary Schedule Changed i Secondary Schedule Changed J Door Access Granted V Variable length message with Type It is crucial to understand the format for each message type when setting up an input group since this is the key to monitoring messages from the SCS 1 system The input group description field is limited to 60 characters which will be fully utilized in many cases to uniquely identify a specific message type and status for a particular device Each message type will always use the input group prefix as the first part of the description See Identifying the Input Group Prefix on page 140 for more information If you are going to add a number of input group records for the DMP SCS 1 interface it is suggested that you usethe scsgen data generator tool which is capable of quickly producing input group and associated alarm records automatically given a formatted input file See the section entitled Using the scsgen Data Generator Tool on page 126 for more information on using this tool The input group prefix used in any of the listed message types must match the one established in the appropriate configuration file See Identifying the Input Gro
108. 0 lt port gt The port on which the CCTV switcher is connected Use only the tty portion of the name For example if the CCTV switcher is connected to dev tty4 then use tty4 as the port value Refer to Appendix B Configuring a CCTV interface for information on how to specify CCTV information 101 102 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Example input file The following is an example of an input file for a Picture Perfect system 4 5 FF23 FF13 21 22 BLK 23 STA 13 Request 1 grundig 25510 tty3 FF23 FF13 10 30 BLK 23 STA 13 Clear 0 FF23 FF13 12 31 BLK 23 STA 13 Acknowledge 0 FF10 FFF3 21 22 BLK 10 STA 3 Request 10 grundig 10007 tty3 FF10 FFF3 10 30 BLK 10 STA 3 Clear 10 FF10 FFF3 12 31 BLK 10 STA 3 Acknowledge 10 FF23 FF13 0A BLK 23 STA 13 Release O grundig 00301 tty3 1 FF23 FFO1 1D BLK 23 COD 01 Duress 0 grundig 00301 tty3 An example of the input groups and alarm records that are generated from one line of an input file is shown in the section nput group and alarm records generated by cmdgen on page 103 Input file recommendations Always keep the input file for future reference on how your system has been set up It will be extremely useful in understanding what database records have been generated It will be required information for Customer Support should you need help in configuring the interface DO NOT re use the original input file that has had data added to it without doing an uninsta
109. 0 You have specified to map Outgoing AlphaCom Alarm Number 15 to AlphaCom Nodes 1 10 Is this correct y n y kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk A Add an ALPHACOM controlled alarm D Delete an ALPHACOM controlled alarm X Exit P Print a hardcopy of all controlled alarms kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk ka zz 0X 37 Deleting an alarm This section describes how to delete an existing AlphaCom Exchange controlled alarm Refer to Figure 11 Example of deleting an AlphaCom alarm on page 38 to see the messages and prompts that display when deleting an alarm When you delete an alarm from the mapping file the Picture Perfect alarm no longer triggers the AlphaCom event Note When the mapped AlphaCom alarm is deleted the mappings for all of the AlghaCom nodes to which an AlphaCom alarm is sent are also removed It is recommended that prior to beginning the deletion process you follow the instructions for printing the map file as explained in the section Printing the map file on page 38 This way you will have the Picture Perfect Alarm Input Group and Location Id as well as the outgoing AlphaCom alarm number of the alarm you want to delete handy Follow these steps to delete an AlphaCom alarm 1 At the Selection prompt type d to delete an AlphaCom controlled alarm A message displays to confirm
110. 3 badge history overflow alarm for micro 1 APBBadge 3 anti passback violation alarm for reader 3 20 DI board alarms for inputs 1 2 and 3 Using SQL reports to populate the input file The relationship between the Picture Perfect database tables which define the various alarm event types can be quite complex All fields must be appropriately defined before alarm event forwarding can occur SQL reports are provided with the Central Station interface software to assist in the verification of the database population and to provide the information required for the cstgen tool input file These reports were added to the Picture Perfect database during installation of the software There are a total of twenty SQL reports fifteen reports to identify Record ID numbers for use with the cstgen tool input file and five reports for assessing missing information in the database tables When using a report to determine valid Record ID numbers for the input file use the numbers in the first left most column If an entry 1s missing from the report for example if three micros are defined but only two are listed it is due to a missing database table field that is required for proper identification of the alarm event Use one or more of the five debugging reports to determine which field is missing One of these five reports may also be used to determine the Micro ID values for populating the accounts table file described earlier
111. 3 Configuring DMP SCS 1 EE 126 Using the scsgen Data Generator Tool 126 Using Picture Perfect to configure the DMP SCS 1 interface 0 cece cece eee ernan 150 Testing theinterface er EE Ee ee 161 Advanced configuration ccc cece cece cece En u VAENE eh es mn ehe 162 Jeas db text Ses MYN CIG eegene dett bald EE Ae SEA EE E 162 cas db text scs signals ttyN cfg or cas db text scs_signals cfg 0 ccc cece eee eee 164 J ds db text scsredunddnEctg uico oppo be Dee a ened edat cae EE RT RN d 165 Interface data file backup and restore enm 165 Appendix F Appendix G Configuring an EST IDternfube EE 167 Initrod ctiohi EE 168 Redundant SYSTEMS Sis annienta raaa wie wh wider FED AR REA AU EEEE OEE EE E 168 Software requirements 2 e EEN EELER desu Rer ENEE MER bee NEAR ER REDE eee meee ES 169 Stelle Bee 169 REGUNGONT system eode ores toI e BEEN 169 Hardware requirement cos erine E EA EE RE WE Rel ERAN DE EN nei pue d EN 169 Stamd Glone SYStCM 2 35252 whence er y Re SEET EES ee a C UU VERG PER ENSE 169 Red undantsysterti eeu sette e bad pte reb OA deed bea BUR ee ORE EE 170 EST configuration 2e pe I Rv E RE ERG Er DU EE REFERRE E SN VELE EENET er ee EET 173 Alarms recognized by the EST Interface 173 Using Picture Perfect to configure the EST interface 0 c cece cc e cence ence eee es 174 ele Tele E le ee EE 175 MOGIFVING GA Beleeg e EE 177 Adding or modifying an alarm 0 ene
112. 3 01010111 Line 3 A Perimeter B Zone 2 alarm condition was received at device UI03 01010112 Extended configuration The Universal Intrusion interface supports an extended configuration that allows you to alter its behavior This configuration information is kept in the following files cas db text univ intr ttyN cfg cas db text univ intr redundant cfg where ttyN isthe name of the port specified for the interface cas db text univ intr ttyN cfg This file contains configuration information specific to the copy of the interface that connects to the Universal Intrusion device attached to the t tyN port It consists of a series of text lines each containing a variable name followed by a value or setting Lines beginning with a number sign 7 are comments The Universal Intrusion interface reads the file upon startup to configure the port and the interface Note DO NOT change this file unless absolutely necessary If you find it absolutely necessary to change the file you must be knowledgeable about text editors such as vi Before you begin please call GE Security Customer Support for assistance The following is an example of the contents of the port configuration file for a Universal Intrusion device attached to port dev ttyl cas db text univ intr ttyl cfg univ intr ttyl cfg Copyright C 2000 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved e This file generated by the following installation script univ_intr
113. 41 Interface data file backup and restore 60 ces 46 26 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Introduction The interface between the Stentofon AlphaCom Exchange and Picture Perfect provides the capability to automatically generate AlphaCom alarms in response to Picture Perfect alarms for Picture Perfect alarms that have been mapped to the AlphaCom alarms The messages sent to the AlphaCom Exchange follow the format described in the AlphaCom Data Protocol System Integration Implementation 1999 09 30 The interface between the Stentofon AlphaCom Exchange and Picture Perfect is bi directional with the option to configure the AlphaCom interface to resend messages 1f communication is lost The first step is to configure the Picture Perfect system and the AlphaCom Exchange or to verify the set up if this is an existing system Next use the provided alphacom_map script to link or map the desired Picture Perfect alarms to the appropriate AlphaCom Exchange alarms When the mapped alarm is received by Picture Perfect the AlphaCom alarm to which the Picture Perfect alarm is mapped is sent to the AlphaCom Exchange No operator intervention is required The AlphaCom interface supports the configuration of multiple AlphaCom Exchange devices being connected to the Picture Perfect host limited by the number of available ports Redundant systems The AlphaCom interface to Picture Perfect supports operations in a redundant Pict
114. 57 527 1557 5 allp tty3 igd STN01 03 Busy cctvName allplex cctv 5 344 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual al igd STNO1 al igd STNO1 kalatel igd STNO1 kalatel igd STNO1 kalatel igd STNO1 Genera lplex lplex 1558 528 1558 5 a L 03 Disconnect cctvN 1559 529 1559 6 a 05 Request cctvNam 1560 530 1560 1 d 4 new entri kalatel Genera d 8 new entri Generat d 4 new entri 05 Connect cctvNam 1561 531 1561 2 ktd 05 Busy cctvNam 1562 532 1562 2 ktd 05 Disconnect cctvN 1563 533 1563 3 ktd s for CC for CCl for CCl llp tty3 ame allplex cctv 6 llp tty3 kalatel cctv 1 ktd tty4 kalatel cctv 2 tty4 kalatel cctv 2 tty4 ame kalatel cctv 3 tty4 Successfully appended Successfully appended Successfully appended Installation w entries to switcher devic DV switcher device allegiant map table V switcher device allplex map table V switcher device kalatel map table allplex map table S S new entries to switcher device allegiant map table n n w entries to switcher devic complete You have made changes Do you want to inform kalatel map table to one or more CCTV mapping files the system of these changes y n y 15 Entera y to inform the system oran n to not inform the system If you entered n the changes just made will not be sent to the interface until the n
115. 6 360 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Introduction The Universal Intrusion interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for an external device It is a general interface for processing alarm and device failure messages that satisfy a defined format and are received over a serial line from an external device The Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor may be used to monitor messages from the intrusion receiver The information displayed in the Alarm Monitor will show the event type event date and time input group prefix and a user defined description field of message types known to the interface Communication from the Universal Intrusion system to the Picture Perfect host is using a serial line connection The communication is bi directional The interface will receive messages and send ACK NAK and other special case messages back to the intrusion system Messages or alarms recognized by the intrusion interface are looked up in the Picture Perfect database using the input group table Picture Perfect must be set up with the appropriate input groups and alarms before they can be recognized Optionally an output group and associated outputs can be associated with an input group Redundant systems The Universal Intrusion system interface to Picture Perfect supports operations in a Redundant Picture Perfect environment where two hosts have connectivity to a single intrusion receiver Connectivity is achieved by us
116. 77 1 When defining an area micro or door object it is permissible to share a single input group and hence the alarm indicated by that input group within that object but the alarm cannot be used by any other input group and the input group cannot be used by any other object 2 Input groups should not be shared by records of different database table types 3 Alarms should not be shared by records of different database table types 4 When alarms are defined they must be routed to the Alarm Monitor in order for them to be forwarded to the Central Station system 5 The safest course to follow when defining Picture Perfect database tables is to use different input groups and alarms for each type of alarm event for each type of object Table 5 Database tables referenced by the cstgen tool Table Field Name Description micro id micro record number micro_id micro id number bdghis_ingrp badge history overflow input group record number almhis_ingrp alarm history overflow input group record number upstrm comm ingrp upstream micro communication failure input group record number dnstrm comm ingrp downstream micro communication failure input group record number reader comm ingrp reader failure input group record number reader id reader record number area area record number door id door record number door input door sensor input record number forced open ingrp door forced open input group record number open too
117. 8 4 CTS DSR 6 DTR 20 Figure 106 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitter To Primary Host DB25F DB9M To Firepanel DB25M To Redundant Host DB25F DB25M DB25M Master Port 1 Port 2 Port DB25F DB25F DB25F Splitter Figure 107 Overview of a redundant Picture Perfect and a Firepanel interface 291 292 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Configuration Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Simplex fire and other life safety alarms The Picture Perfect Simplex Interface processes only Alarm and System Reset Complete messages from the Simplex panel All other Simplex messages such as Trouble Abnormal Acknowledge Alarm Silence etc will be ignored In addition it should be noted that because the communications link between Picture Perfect and the Simplex panel is uni directional the Picture Perfect system cannot determine if there is a communications break in the line Therefore no alarm is reported in this situation Prior to defining alarms and input groups on the Picture Perfect system the Simplex system must be already configured Alarm points must have an eight digit identifier as part of their description on the Simplex system Reset message Simplex alarms and System Reset Complete will be displayed on Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor and routed to history It is not necessary for the System Administrator to configure the System Reset message
118. A002 OH RO1 L01 P01 001000 BA002 OH RO1 L01 P01 001000 BA003 01 06 2005 01 06 2005 01 06 2005 01 06 2005 01 06 2005 01 06 2005 01 06 2005 15 28 12 D 01 06 2005 01 06 2005 01 06 2005 01 06 2005 01 06 2005 01 06 2005 01 06 2005 The above figure of the Alarm Monitor shows a possible alarm sequence This scenario would be for a system that uses OH Receiver 02 and has appropriate input group alarm records to recognize the conditions coming from the receiver Below is a line by line explanation 256 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual The Alarm Description column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate alarm record that was created The Location column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate input group record which was created Line 1 A panic alarm message was sent from OH Receiver 02 on Line 1 from zone 001 Lines 2 A burglary alarm message was sent from OH Receiver 02 on Line 1 from zone 002 Lines 3 A burglary alarm message was sent from OH Receiver 02 on Line 1 from zone 003 Lines 4 A burglary alarm message was sent from OH Receiver 02 on Line 1 from zone 004 Lines 5 A burglary alarm message was sent from OH Receiver 02 on Line 1 from zone 006 Line 6 A panic alarm message was sent from OH Receiver 01 on Line 1 from zone 001 Lines 7 A burglary alarm message was sent from OH Receiver 01 on Line 1 from zone 002 Lines 8 A burglary alarm message was sent from OH Re
119. AR MSG TEXT 4 The first data line after the Picture Perfect version line is an example of an alarm message type that triggers a CCTV response The input group records created are unique for each line in the input file The line in the file for an S message will generate 76 input records for the specified account number An example of the input groups and alarm records that are generated from one line of an input file is shown in the section nput Group and Alarm Records Generated by scsgen on page 140 Input file recommendations Always keep the input file around for future reference on how your system has been set up It will be extremely useful in understanding what database records have been generated It will be required information for Customer Support should you need help in configuring the interface DO NOT re use the original input file that has data added to it without doing an uninstall first Un installs are discussed in later sections If you have new data for the generator and have not un installed using scsgen then you should uninstall or put it in a separate input file Once the new data is added to the 140 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual system the information should be added back to your original input file so that one file exists from which all the scs records can be generated Input File Error Checking The input file will be checked for error conditions before any data records a
120. B NET boards on the Notifier panel The cable should be wired to use the P3 connector pins 1 4 on the appropriate SIB board to connect to the 25 pin master splitter port Figure 5 5 of Chapter 1 Installation of the AM2020 AFP1010 Manual Revision C describes the exact wiring that must be used for this interface For the Notifier AFP400 system Notifier AFP400 Intelligent Fire Detection and Alarm System panel Custom cable to connect from the EIA 232 master splitter port to the AFP 400 TBI printer port The required pin connections for this cable are shown in the AFP 400 Analog Fire Panel Installation Manual Chapter 2 Installation in the section Remote Printers and CRTs subsection Connecting a PRN 4 Remote Printer Document 50253 01 05 96 Rev A P N50253 A1 ECN 96 002 The pin out description and figure describes the wiring that must be done except the 25 pin printer port will be replaced with the 25 pin master splitter port Refer to Figure 69 Figure 69 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to AFP 400 25 pin to TB1 Splitter Master AFP 400 Port 25 pin TB1 TX2 2 TB1 2 RX 3 1 TB1 1 REF 7 3 TB1 3 Figure 70 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitter v To Primary Host DB25F DB9M To Notifier DB25M To Redundant Host Ge DB25M Master Port 1 Reeg Port DB25F Splitter DB25F 207 208 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface
121. BER is a five digit string 0 to 99999 e MESSAGE is up to fifteen characters and can be DEVICE MISSING DEVICE RESTORED or ABORT MODIFIER is a four digit string 0 to 9999 Loop Bypass X Message Type To recognize Loop Bypass message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt ACCOUNT NUMBER LOOP NUMBER USER NUMBER STATUS where IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters ACCOUNT NUMBER is a five digit string 0 to 99999 LOOP NUMBER isa three digit string 0 to 999 USER NUMBER isa three digit string 0 to 999 e STATUS is the string Bypass Lr Loop Reset Y Message Type To recognize Loop Reset messages use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt ACCOUNT NUMBER LOOP NUMBER USER NUMBER STATUS where IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters ACCOUNT NUMBER is a five digit string 0 to 99999 LOOP NUMBER isa three digit string 0 to 999 USER NUMBER isa three digit string 0 to 999 STATUS is the string Reset Loop z Message Type To recognize Loop messages use the following format in the input group description 154 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual lt IGP gt lt ACCOUNT NUMBER gt lt LOOP
122. Block 8 Pin DB25F 8 Pin Shield 2 Shield 2 Rx 4 2 Tx Rx 4 Tx5 3 Rx Tx5 GND 7 7 GND GND 7 4 5 6 8 20 American Dynamics Switcher DB9F co DF ON C E 92x o Figure 16 Burle Allegiant cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to switcher DB25F to DB9M Picture Perfect System DB25F Tx Rx CTS SGND DCD DSR DTR 20 nN ON OW PM Switcher DB9M Rx Tx RTS FPN OW PM CTS SGND 51 ER Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Figure 17 Grundig cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to Grundig Matrix VAZ300 controller DB25F to DB9M Picture Perfect Host DB25F Tx 2 Rx 2 GND 5 DSR DCD DTR 20 WN oan t Grundig Matrix VAZ300 Controller DB9M Rx Tx GND Figure 18 Javelin cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to javelin controller DB25F to DB9F Picture Perfect Javelin JO325HI System Controller DB25F DB9F Rx Tx GND Tx 2 3 Rx 3 2 GND 7 5 Figure 19 Kalatel cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to converter box DB25F to DB9M Picture Perfect Converter System Box DB25F DB9M Tx 2 3 Rx Rx 3 2 Tx RTS 4 7 RTS CTS 5 8 CTS GND 7 5 GND Figure 20 MaxPro cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to MAXPRO RD AT100 MAX1000 controller DB25F to DB25M Picture Perfect System DB25F MAXPRO Matrix RD AT100 Controller DB25M Tx2 3 Rx Rx 3 2 Tx GND 7 7 GND DSR 6 DCD 8 DTR 20 Figure 21 Pan
123. Change to the directory where the input file name is located Type cas bin profile This will ensure you have the correct PATH environment variable that will give you access to the stngen tool and the database tools it uses Type stngen Messages similar to the following will appear on the screen Stentofon Data Generator 2 0 Would you like to i nstall or u ninstall data records i u i To use the install option type u The following messages will display You have chosen the UN INSTALL portion of this script You must enter the input group prefix to uninstall the Stentofon database records This is the first 4 to 5 characters used in the description field of the input group records Entering this prefix will result in the removal of the input group and associated alarm records from the database If running multiple interfaces make sure you enter the prefix that matches the input group prefix used for that particular interface If properly installed each Stentofon interface should have a different input group prefix that is used specifically for that interface Do you know the input group prefix and want to continue y n y To continue press y To stop press n If you chose to continue the following message will display Enter the input group prefix Enter the input group prefix 316 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual 10 11 The input group prefix you entered will be displaye
124. EE 203 Redundant Syste Miss eege eet AE ee SE NEE 203 Hardware requirerients 2 ore e ged cece tee er eens ecb ned eR eta eased E ERNER 204 Standsalonie SYSTEM 0355 chee sc oe eaten ent tek beue a rado a rd CERE eee ss taew dae ess 204 Redundant Systemic eee Kee Epp idan netted ca me da HA beeen Sp dne v 206 Configuration ner rr RP SEENEN x GRE Ferr xaxa T e sebePsne se V ee TEE E E RETE 209 SING DIETERLEN EE 209 Wl e EE EE 209 SING NIFGensINStOll es cadets natuiiaddethonnendasneey peer peste Aaeweadeldeaenaiinsasees 217 Using nfrgen to generate new device data after an initial installation 00 eee e eee 221 Using nfrgen to change or add message types for an existing device after an initial installation 221 nttgem one 222 Using Picture Perfect to configure the Notifier Interface 224 R NNEN 236 Testing the interface ig ic2sciteseiwiviedalaamadaned tienda data de MOIEUUHNURREEIPERNeN I IER UE 237 Advanced configuration 0 ccc ccc cece cence n hh eh s hh 238 cas db text notifier AWN Clini s eee TREE RE e dete AE LE HEURE AGAS a 238 Jeosddbitevtnotfier redundont cho 239 Interface data file backup and restore 2 cece cece cece eee e nent e nee nnm 240 Configuring an OH Receiver interface ccc cece cece eee eee eens 241 Introd ction EE 242 Redundant systems casserons eden ER Seem ade MeN NIKE I tpi as 242 Software requirements errre esc eE eR ger DEE GS EEN d 243 Stand
125. EL CCTV controlled alarm P Print a hardcopy of all KALATEL CCTV controlled alarms X Exit kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk selection P 64 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Deleting an alarm This section describes how to delete an existing CCTV controlled alarm Refer to Figure 30 Example of deleting a Kalatel CCTV alarm on page 65 to see the messages and prompts that display when deleting an alarm When you delete an alarm from the mapping file the Picture Perfect alarm no longer triggers a CCTV action Follow these steps to delete a CCTV alarm 1 At the Selection prompt type d to delete a CCTV controlled alarm A message displays to confirm an alarm is being deleted Enter the Alarm Id The Alarm Id can be found on one of the CCTV SQL reports Enter the Input Group Id The Input Group Id can be found on one of the CCTV SQL reports Enter the Location Id The Location Id can be found on one of the CCTV SQL reports If you have only a single instance of the CCTV interface installed then you will be prompted for the CCTV alarm number Skip to step 6 If you have installed multiple CCTV interfaces then a list of the ports that have been configured for the CCTV devices will be displayed and you need to select the one to which this alarm is to be forwarded Enter the name of the port for example tt
126. Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COM1 or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the OH Receiver communication program is started A standard splitter box Two pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to the standard splitter port Refer to Figure 82 Figure 83 or Figure 84 as appropriate Picture Perfect AIX system to splitter Picture Perfect AIX System p t as DB25F Straight Serial Cable Picture Perfect Linux system with a Digi Port expander to splitter Picture Perfect Linux System I DB25F Straight Serial Cable Picture Perfect Linux system to splitter Picture Perfect Linux System DBOF Straight Serial Cable Serial Line cable to connect the splitter to the OH Receiver 248 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Figure 85 Cable pinouts Splitter to OH Network Receiver Splitter Figure 86 Cable pinouts Splitter to OH 2000E Splitter DB25F OH Network Receiver Null Modem Cable OH 2000E Straight Serial Cable Figure 87 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitter TB1 To OH Receiver panel To Primary Host To Redundant Host DB25M DB25M DB25M Master Port 1 Port 2 Port DB25F DB25F DB25F Splitter Figure 88 Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and OH Receiver interface OH Netwo
127. F Door forced open door Access Lockout DK aaaa NpidddDk Suspended badge reader Access Trouble DT aaaa NpidddDT Lost badge reader Alarm Messages Holdup Alarm HA aaaa NpidddHA Duress reader Tamper Alarm TA aaaa NpiddaTA Antipassback violation reader Relay Open Alarm TA staaaa NpidddRO DI Point alarm input Other Messages Log Threshold JL aaaa NpidddJL Badge history overflow micro Log Overflow JO staaaa NpidddJO Alarm history overflow micro Line Trouble LT aaaa NpidddLT Upstream comm fail micro Remote call failed RA aaaa NpidddRA Downstream comm fail micro Remote prog fail RU saaaa NpidddRU Reader comm fail reader 92 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Table 8 SIA messages event codes corresponding message formats and Picture Perfect alarms continued Message Event code Data field portion of SIA message PP alarm device type Comm fail YC aaaa NpidddYC Host host comm fail host Restoral Messages Door Restoral DR aaaa NpidddDR Door closed door Relay Closed RC aaaa NpidddRC DI Point alarm input Note aaaa represents the communicator s account number and ddd represents the three character device number such as door area host input or Micro ID Several sources of information were investigated and their data has been incorporated into this specification These include SIA Digital Communication
128. Facility Integrator However only the interface software executing on the primary host updates the Picture Perfect database Whenever an alarm notification is received by the interface software it determines if it is executing on the primary host Alarm notifications received by the interface software executing on the redundant host are kept track of but do not update the Picture Perfect database In the case of a failover the mode on the redundant host will change to indicate that it is now the primary and the interface software will then update the database when the alarms are processed Software requirements The software requirements for the Seibe CBAS system and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system If you are using a stand alone Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect base base package e Picture Perfect Siebe Environmental Control Interface cbas package 261 Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required e Picture Perfect base base package e Picture Perfect redundant system pprs package e Picture Perfect Siebe Environmental Control Interface cbas package Hardware requirements The hardware requirements for the Picture Perfect stand alone and the Picture Perfect redundant system are listed below Stand alone system If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in
129. Figure 25 Overview of the Picture Perfect and CCTV interface Redundant system If you have a Picture Perfect redundant system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual e CCTV controller provided by the CCTV manufacturer Refer to your CCTV manual for dip switch settings They should be set to the default e CCTV cameras and monitors e Serial ports 55 56 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual AIX Linux One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COM1 or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the CCTV communication program is started A standard splitter box Two pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to the standard splitter ports Refer to Figure 26 Figure 26 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M Picture Perfect System Splitter Port DB25F DB25M o Un E UM n HG D D E UM Ww k 20 20 Cable to connect the splitter master port t
130. GND 7 5 GND Figure 37 Overview of the Picture Perfect and Commend interface Redundant system If you have a Picture Perfect redundant system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual AIX Linux Commend Intercom controller provided by the manufacturer Refer to your intercom manual for dip switch settings They should be set to the default Serial Ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COM1 or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Commend communication program is started A standard splitter box Two pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to the standard splitter ports Refer to Figure 38 97 98 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Figure 38 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M Picture Perfect System Splitter Port DB25F DB25M D d D E DM k DD d D E DM k Figure 39 Overview of the redundant Picture Perf
131. H Delay Time 0 Il D Results 1 records 113 Modifying an input group Follow these steps to modify an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups tab 2 Enter the input group description you are looking for as the search criteria 3 Click Find The desired input group should appear 4 Edit the desired information 5 When completed save the input group by pressing Save Adding or modifying alarms Each Commend input group will need to be linked to an alarm record which can be routed to show up on the Alarm Monitor and be recorded by Alarm History The linking is done through the Input Group form after the Alarm record has been established Creating alarm records that the input group records are linked to is required for the Commend interface to operate It is the combination of the input group description and alarm description that make up the location and alarm columns displayed on the Alarm Monitor The alarm record description field should be used to further identify or describe the Commend input group to which it will be linked Several input group records can be linked to the same alarm for example one alarm per block station input group record but it would be prudent to set up one alarm record for each input group record The alarm description field has no restrictions other than a maximum length of 30 characters or required forma
132. Input Group table Picture Perfect will have to be set up with the appropriate input groups and alarms before they can be recognized Optionally an output group and associated outputs can be tied to an input group This is the standard method for setting up other hardware on a Picture Perfect system The details of setting up the appropriate database records will be covered in more detail in Configuration on page 305 The communication from the Stentofon Intercom System to the host is unidirectional No handshaking is required for the interface The protocol of the interface is the serial transfer of information one line at a time Redundant systems The Stentofon Touchline Intercom System interface to Picture Perfect supports operations in a redundant Picture Perfect environment where two hosts have connectivity to a single Touchline Exchange Connectivity is achieved using a splitter between the Picture Perfect system and the Touchline Exchange This allows the physical connection of the Stentofon Touchline Intercom System to an RS 232 serial port on each Picture Perfect host computer In a redundant configuration the Stentofon Touchline Intercom System interface software executes on both Picture Perfect hosts and both receive alarm notifications from the Touchline Exchange However only the interface software executing on the primary host processes the alarms Whenever an alarm notification is received by the interface software it determines if it
133. It is automatically inserted into the alarm and input group tables with the appropriate descriptions These descriptions must not be changed The Simplex panel does not send resets individually A System Reset Complete message generated when all the Simplex alarms have been reset is treated as an alarm and routed to Alarm Monitor and History A reset message appears in the following format SIMPLEX SYSTEM RESET COMPLETE NO ALARMS PRESENT The reset from the Simplex system will be displayed on the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor using the RS 6000 or Linux server s date time stamp for the reset messages Adding or modifying an input group Each Simplex alarm must have an individual input group assigned which includes an eight digit identifier between the lt and gt symbols These symbols must be part of the alarm description on the Simplex system however they should not be entered as part of the description on the Picture Perfect system The description field in the Input Group screen which allows for 60 alphanumeric characters as shown in Figure 108 must be such that it is meaningful and must include the eight digit identifier number as part of its description Follow these steps to add an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups Complete the Input Groups form for each input group Click Save pe opor L9 Click New to add another input group Figu
134. M DESCRIPTION The third column is used as the basis for the alarm description field for the alarm record that is created for the associated input group record This column should be used as a custom device label that helps describe more information about the device or detector It can be up to 59 characters in length and either upper or lower case It is acceptable to use the same alarm description for multiple input file data lines when installing the data generator records Only one alarm record will be generated in this case and the appropriate input group records will point to the same alarm record Note Do not use an alarm description that matches the description field of an existing alarm record in the Picture Perfect database This is an illegal condition that nfrgen checks before any data is generated FACILITY The fourth column is used to specify the facility id that will be used for the input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the nf rgen program you will be prompted to select a Default Notifier Facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a Facility value is not specified in 213 the input file then the Default Notifier Facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid facility id values create a SQL report using as the SQL statement SELECT id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file ALARM PRIORITY The f
135. M ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem Linux One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COM1 or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Central Station communication program is started Cable to connect the Picture Perfect system to the Central Station port See Figure 34 Figure 34 Cable Pinouts Picture Perfect host to Central Station system DB25F to DB9M Picture Perfect Central System Station Port DB25F DB9M Tx 2 2 Tx Rx 3 3 Rx SGND 7 5 SGND 4 OTR 6 DSR 8 CTS Note This cable configuration is for a PC based version of the Central Station system using the COM1 or COM2 serial port for communications Refer to your Central Station system documentation for cable specifications Figure 35 Overview of the Picture Perfect and Central Station interface 75 76 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Configuration The Picture Perfect Central Station interface allows forwarding of alarm events to the Central Station system for handling by the Central Station operator Before this can happen Picture Perfect must be informed of which alarm events are to be forwarded and how to identify them in a manner recognizab
136. Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface P N 460581004B e ISS 17MAR10 Copyright Disclaimer Trademarks and patents Intended use 2010 GE Security Inc This document may not be copied or otherwise reproduced in whole or in part except as specifically permitted under US and international copyright law without the prior written consent from GE Document number 4605810048 March 2010 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE GE ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR INACCURACIES OR OMISSIONS AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITIES LOSSES OR RISKS PERSONAL OR OTHERWISE INCURRED AS A CONSEQUENCE DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY OF THE USE OR APPLICATION OF ANY OF THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT FOR THE LATEST DOCUMENTATION CONTACT YOUR LOCAL SUPPLIER OR VISIT US ONLINE AT WWW GESECURITY COM This publication may contain examples of screen captures and reports used in daily operations Examples may include fictitious names of individuals and companies Any similarity to names and addresses of actual businesses or persons is entirely coincidental GE and the GE monogram are registered trademarks of General Electric Picture Perfect product and logo are trademarks of GE Security Other trade names used in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of the manufacturers or vendors of the respective products Use this product only for the purpose it was designed for refer to the data sheet and user documentati
137. Picture Perfect backup configuration Picture Perfect backup configuration update completed Reflecting the KALATEL INST installation onto the redundant host backupl Configuring additional interfaces This section describes how to configure additional interface devices The instructions are listed below The installation of the current copy of the interface is complete as indicated and you will be asked if you want to install another copy of the interface The messages will be similar to the following The ktd tty2 installation has completed successfully Do you wish to configure another Kalatel CCTV Device y n n 20 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Enter y to configure another interface device or n the default value to complete the installation process If you entered y you will return to sien 3 in the section Configuring ports on page 16 Some of the steps will be omitted for example you will not be asked if this is a redundant configuration as either all of the interfaces are running in a redundant environment or none of the interfaces are redundant If you entered n you will receive messages similar to the following as the installation process completes The KALATEL INST installation has completed successfully Checking if need to update nls files Picture Perfect NLS Check 4 5 04 10 09 Copyright C 2000 2009 GE Security Inc Tue Sep 15 09 08 17 EDT 2009 No nls files for kalatel
138. Q amp G i 5 x e P aap x T Ki Define input Group Parent input Groups Output Groups Description BTNO3 FFF 1 Connect Facility GLOBAL EN el Input Group State Open Condition Disabled Ignored Enabled Detected Boolean Type Short Condition O OR Any AND All Individual Ignored Detected Broadcast State Changes No Yes Alarm Station 01 Connect lt GLOB vw amp f V 2 Delay Time g HES Results 1 records Modifying an input group Follow these steps to modify an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 Enter the input group description you are looking for as the search criteria 3 Click Find The desired input group should appear 4 Edit the desired information 5 When completed save the input group by clicking Save Adding or modifying alarms Each Stentofon 9600 input group will need to be linked to an alarm record which can be routed to show up on the Alarm Monitor and be recorded in Alarm History The linking is done through the Input Group form after the alarm record has been established Creating alarm records that the input group records are linked to is required for the Stentofon interface to operate It is the combination of the input group description and alarm description that make up the Location and Alarm columns display
139. RI GEI en honra EE 60 Mapping CCTV monitored events iiisscscesssisseca kernel t yere rhe aad Owe eee boo EES EE S 61 Configuring and monitoring alarms in Picture Derierct esses 69 Advariced configuration ei dase SEELEN dE EELER shades aes DEA eet REES P RR te 69 elle 70 Multiple device Suppolt NENNEN NNN RR HR whe ee aguas Uu res exe CRANE tan uate nese eae 71 Interface data file backup and restore cece cece cence ene ee eee nent hm nn 72 Configuring a Central Station Interface 73 npe 74 Software requiremielits e bete enr EPI AIR des edid ee ter ex LER E ies eat 74 Hardwarewequirermehts soesc reete ppddemr e eX aceasta godsend UO T EEEDUI ERE EE TIVE 74 Configuration eese dae ehe reri Re kr e re eoa RES V MERI RE EET Meee Ta SERE ETUDES 76 Creating Picture Perfect alarms ette cree EE mb etn Ado E REN Uis 76 el elle elei gn TEE 78 Greating adri npt UE 79 Running thie cstgen tool NENNEN AN SEENEN NL a een Ee NEEN ENN ER Advanced configuration e acest d chaos ds seed iad EE EELER EES AER REESEN E 84 Multiple device Support ISSUES 0 e e e e ea 85 Single device ee 86 Interface data file backup and restore 0 0 cnn een een 87 Picture Perfect output to the Central Station system 87 Interface el e len EEN 87 Interface design and operotion 0 6 nee e e eee 88 Alarm event triggering of SIA message Output 88 SlAm ssage packet tomat sss etos pere Rer n PP UU e bL Enid eiut PEE eve 89 Interface specific message packet fo
140. SIA format The cstgen utility program described in the section Configuration on page 76 allows the operator to specify which Picture Perfect alarms are to be routed to the Central Station system Picture Perfect will act as a formatting agent of incoming alarm events for transfer to the Central Station system Upon successful transfer of an alarm event it will be removed from the Picture Perfect runtime database and Alarm Monitor This approach guarantees that operator notification and alarm response is handled by only one system Those alarm events not designated for transfer to the Central Station system will be handled normally by Picture Perfect Note For logical alarms removal of the alarm event from the Alarm Monitor screen is immediate For physical alarms the alarm event remains on the Alarm Monitor screen as an operator acknowledged pending event until the condition causing the alarm has reset See below for a discussion of logical and physical alarms Alarm event triggering of SIA message output There are currently five main types of input events in Picture Perfect These input events trigger alarm messages which may be logged displayed on a monitor printed or formatted into SIA messages for transfer to the Central Station system The five input types listed below cause logical alarms unless specifically indicated as physical alarms 1 Input events for a micro Badge History Overflow physical alarm Alarm History Overflow
141. TN03 01 Connect STN03 01 Busy STN03 01 Disconnect See Figure 124 for an input group record containing a valid input group description The procedure for adding or modifying input groups is described below Note that alarm records must be created prior to input group records as you must specify the alarm when defining the input group record A description of the procedure for defining alarm records may be found in Adding or modifying alarms on page 349 Note Input groups and associated alarms that are created manually will be removed if the uninstall portion of the stngen9600 tool is run since it removes records according to the input group prefix Adding an input group Follow these steps to add an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 Complete the Input Groups form for each input group These fields must be set as follows Delay Time 0 Boolean Type Individual Input Group State Enabled e Open Condition Ignored e Short Condition Ignored e Broadcast State Changes No Alarm Should point to the alarm record generated for this input group 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another input group Figure 124 Sample Input Groups screen 68 Inputs Outputs Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Uf Input Groups Inputs Output Groups Outputs Input Group Events Output Group Events Descripti Er lescription
142. TROUBLE CLR TB SYSTEM TROUBLE e ACL TB SYSTEM TROUBLE s SIGNAL SILENCE REQUESTED SYSTEM RESET ACTIVATED Ld DETECTOR TEST IN PROGRESS DETECTOR TEST ALL OK S DETECTOR TEST FAIL LAMP TEST ACTIVATED LAMP TEST COMPLETE BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE ALARM SILENCED Notifier 400 Specific e ACKNOWLEDGE Notifier 400 Specific MANUAL EVACUATE Notifier 400 Specific One alarm record is automatically generated for all the fixed message types which means each input group created will be associated to the same alarm record It will have the input group prefix attached to it in the description field just like the input group records The alarm record description field generated for the fixed message types is NOTIFIER PANEL For example if the input group prefix used is NFR1 and the fixed message type is SYSTEM RESET ACTIVATED then you would find the following input group description NFR1 SYSTEM RESET ACTIVATED The associated alarm record that this input group would point to would have the description NFR1 NOTIFIER PANEL Input group and alarm records generated by nfrgen The input file processed by nf rgen produces input group and alarm database records that are inserted into the databas
143. The delimiter character between fields must be the symbol There should be one line of data for each unique combination that is going to be monitored The format of a data record is as follows lt Block gt lt Station gt lt MessageType gt lt AlarmDesc gt lt facility gt lt cctvDeviceName gt lt cctvNumber gt lt port gt lt Block gt lt Station gt This is a four character identification number Valid values for this field are FFF1 to 9999 lt MessageType gt This is the type of Commend message and is one of the following 21 22 request 10 30 clear 12 31 acknowledge OA release 1D duress Note These message types are searched for in the Commend interface software when searching for the alarm record The Commend software will be unable to locate any others without modification lt AlarmDesc gt This is the unique alarm message text to be displayed on the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor screen and or logged to the history file lt facility gt Facility id to use for the input group and alarm record that is created If no facility is specified the default facility id specified by the user will be used lt cctvDeviceName gt and lt cctvNumber gt fields These fields if present identify a CCTV switcher and which camera is to be controlled when the alarm occurs lt cctvDeviceName gt Valid values for this field are defined in column 1 of Table 9 Supported CCTV switcher products on page 10
144. The input group prefix you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it The input group prefix you entered was NFR1 Is this correct y n y To confirm the input group prefix accept the default y by pressing Eve Enter n to re enter the prefix If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the value If you entered y messages similar to the following will display regarding the selection of a default facility for the Notifier interface kk k k KE Default Notifier Facility assignment portion Ek kk kxk When the input_group and alarm records are created they will require an associated facility You need to select the default facility that will be used when creating the input_group and alarm records if an explicit one is not specified The currently available defined facilities will be displayed and you will need to make a selection from the provided list If you need to create a new facility specifically for the Notifier input_groups and alarms then you should exit this program create the facility using the GUI then re run this program and then choose that facility Do you wish to exit this program now y n n Entera y to exitthe script oran n to enter a facility from the choices that will be provided Ifyou entered y you will exit the program and you may create a facility specifically for the Notifier interface if you wish then re run the script If you entered n a list of the currentl
145. UMBER gt lt STATUS gt lt USER NUMBER gt lt NUMBER ADDED gt where IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters ACCOUNT NUMBER is a five digit string 0 to 99999 STATUS is up to twelve characters and can be CODE ADDED CODE DELETED or CODE CHANGED USER NUMBER isa three digit string 0 to 999 NUMBER ADDED isa three digit string 0 to 999 Permanent Schedule N Temporary Schedule I Primary Schedule n Secondary Schedule i Message Types To recognize Permanent Temporary Primary and Secondary Schedule message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt ACCOUNT NUMBER MSG DESC USER NUMBER where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters ACCOUNT NUMBER isa five digit string 00 to 99999 e MSG DESC is the description of the type of the message and must be one of the following strings 155 PERM SCHD CHG TEMP SCHD CHG PRI SCHD CHG SEC SCHD CHG USER NUMBER isa two to four digit string 00 to 9999 The length of this field is based on SCS 1 programming and is specified for this interface during installation Variable Length Message with Type v To recognize variable length message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt ACCOUNT NUMBER MSG TYPE
146. a bits even parity and one stop bit e Serial ports AIX One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem Linux One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COM1 or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Firesine communication program is started 190 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Figure 59 Overview of a stand alone Picture Perfect and a Firepanel interface Redundant system If you have a Picture Perfect redundant system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual e AIX Linux Firesine 4100 panel A three wire full duplex serial data link that operates at 1200 baud 8 data bits even parity and one stop bit Serial ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a supp
147. able Updating tps daemons entry 54 cas bin msan R A 20030421 175910 statement UPDATE tps daemons SET pathname cas bin msan mi modify date 20030423 modify time 195449 WHERE id 54 statement processed OK 1 rows affected WHERE id 54 Statement processed OK 1 rows affected Successfully update tps daemons table entry 54 cas bin msan R A 20030421 175910 86 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Single device support To configure a Picture Perfect system to support output of CCTV commands to only one switcher device in response to a single Picture Perfect alarm event use the msan set single utility A sample execution of this utility is provided below Note that if multiple switcher devices are installed and Picture Perfect is configured for single device support a CCTV command will be sent to only one of the installed switcher devices in response to a Picture Perfect alarm event You may want to configure the system in this manner if each alarm event is to be routed to only one CCTV switcher and you require maximum interface performance A slight performance gain occurs since the switcher device mapping tables do not need to be searched for all matching entries As soon as the first match is found the search terminates To change the Picture Perfect CCTV switcher device support option to single perform the following steps 1 Log on to the system as root 2 Enter the command
148. ables it AlphaComNodeNum The node number of AlphaCom connected to this interface This value must be between 1 and 254 MyDeviceId The device Id of this interface as a unique device address when connected to AlphaCom This value must be between 1 and 64 PortName The name of the tty port where the cable is connected to the AlphaCom system For RISC platforms running the AIX operating system the port name is dev ttyN where N is a number For PC platforms running the Linux operating System the port name is dev ttyN where N is Dxxx digiboard port or Sxx COM port where x is a number Examples of valid port names are dev ttyl for AIX and dev ttyD001 for Linux PortBaud The baud rate of the tty port used for communication with the AlphaCom system CharSize The character size of the tty port used for communication with the AlphaCom system Parity The parity of the tty port used for communication with the AlphaCom system Stop Bits The stop bits of the tty port used for Thes permanent values ar RemoteConnAlarm PipeName PipeSize axRetries AlarmResendOnFailOver CharSize Parity StopBits The following values are installation responses AlphaCom 1 RemoteConnInGrpl AlphaComNodeNum1 yDeviceldl PortNamel PortBaudl AlphaCom 2 RemoteConnInGrp2 AlphaComNodeNum2 yDeviceld2 PortName2 PortBaud2 AlphaCom 3 RemoteConnInGrp3 AlphaComNodeNum3
149. absolutely necessary to change the file you must be knowledgeable about text editors such as vi Before you begin please call GE Security Customer Support for assistance The following is an example of the extended configuration file alphacom cfg 1 6 Copyright C 2000 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved alphacom cfg 1 6 04 21 03 This file contains the configuration information for the AlphaCom interface RemoteConnAlarm Defines the Picture Perfect alarm used to display a communication loss alarm with the AlphaCom system to the operator on the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor 41 42 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual RemoteConnInGrp Defines the Picture Perfect input group used to display a communication loss alarm with the AlphaCom system to the operator on the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor Each configured AlphaCom has a unique input group but all use the same RemoteConnAlarm alarm NumOfAlphaCom Total number of AlphaCom connected to this interface PipeName PipeSize Defines a buffer area and size for temporary storage of commands when the connection is broken to the AlphaCom system The interface will buffer commands until the area is full or communication is restored MaxRetries The maximum number of additional attempts to resend a command to the AlphaCom system AlarmResendOnFailOver Value 1 enables resending alarm on communication resumption Value 0 dis
150. ace User Manual Before creating an input file you will need to know The version of Picture Perfect you are running This is very important since the layout of the database records may differ depending on the version of Picture Perfect that is running The message type you wish to monitor for a device type The message types that can be monitored are discussed in later sections For each device to be monitored the device type and one of the following depending on the message type loop detector loop module zone number or annunciator number A report containing the installed devices can be obtained from the Notifier Panel through the point report function Please see your appropriate AFP1010 AM2020 or AFR400 operation manual A brief description that gives more detail about the device This information will be used as the alarm description field for an alarm record The last three bullets comprise the data format portion of the input file With this information the nfrgen tool will generate and load the database with the appropriate input group and alarm database records Picture Perfect version The first line of the input file must contain the Picture Perfect version that is running The version number is used by the nfrgen tool to determine the database input The current versions that are supported by the nfrgen tool are 1 7 RISC AIX 4 3 3 and Linux 7 2 2 0 RISC AIX 5 1 and Linux 7 3 4 0 RISC AIX 5L Version 5 2 or Red Hat
151. ace for that port Input group prefix usage when installing When using the install portion ofthe cmdgen tool the input group prefix is used as the prefix for the description field for all input group records generated Again it should be stressed that the input group prefix used by the tool must match the Commend interface that is being targeted 103 Input group prefix when un installing The input group prefix is used when using the uninstall portion of the cmdgen tool All input group records that have descriptions that match the input group prefix the first five characters will be removed from the database The Alarm records that each input group points to will be removed with one exception If the Alarm record is linked to any other input group records outside of the ones to be removed the tool will not remove any records and will notify the user of this condition This situation must be corrected by the user before any records can be removed using the tool The input group user interface can be used to correct this situation by re assigning the alarm that it is linked to so that it does not conflict with alarms that are going to be removed This is to prevent the accidental removal of alarm records to which other input group records are linked Input group and alarm records generated by cmdgen The input file processed by cmdgen produces input group and alarm database records that are inserted into the database when the tool is run The
152. add another alarm Figure 41 Sample alarm screen A Alarms Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Alarms AlarmColors Alarm Events Alarm Messages Alarm Responses E HEET x Qi Alarm Description instructions Description BLK 23 STA 13 Acknowledge Facility Route Definition v 22 alarm Routing MONITOR AND HISTORY m g online Color Picker No Color Picker Yi e Color Sample Inhibit Schedule Changes e No Background Foreground Reset Outputs Ai Auto Reset Outputs O Manual Reset Outputs Duration Reset Outputs Results 0 records 115 Follow these steps to modify an alarm description 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Inthe Description field of the Alarms screen enter the appropriate search criteria 3 Click Find 4 Edit the desired information 5 When completed save the alarm by clicking Save Adding or modifying output groups and outputs If you would like to trigger an output that is door strikes lights or sirens when Commend messages are received you will need to configure an Output Group and a Output The output group must be linked to the input group for the message to trigger an output for that output group The
153. al Introduction The Firesine interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the firepanel and recognizes only the predefined messages types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect Communication from the firepanel to the Picture Perfect host is using a serial line connection The communication is unidirectional meaning the interface only receives data from the firepanel and does not send anything back The Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor may be used to monitor messages from the firepanel The Firesine interface acts as a filter that recognizes predefined alarm conditions coming in over the serial line When an alarm condition has been detected the Firesine interface picks up a Start of Text STX Hex02 character over the serial connection The character following the STX character an F A or D determines the alarm or message type This is followed by a 6 digit code that along with the alarm type creating a 7 character alphanumeric id is combined with the input group prefix for the interface to create a unique string that is looked up in the Picture Perfect input group table This unique prefix and 7 character id must have been previously set up through the Input Group form in Picture Perfect along with an associated alarm from the Alarm form If there is a match meaning that the prefix and 7 character id was found along with an alarm an alarm message is sent to be processed by Picture Perfect an
154. an alarm is being deleted and you will be prompted for the Input Group Id of the alarm to be deleted Enter the Input Group Id of the alarm to be deleted Once a valid Input Group Id has been entered you will be prompted for the associated Alarm Id Enter the associated Alarm Id Once a valid Alarm Id has been entered you will be prompted for the associated Location Id Enter the associated Location Id Once a valid Location Id has been entered you will be prompted for the Outgoing AlphaCom Alarm Number to which the Picture Perfect alarm you have just specified is mapped Enter the number of the AlphaCom alarm The mapping file is checked to see if there are any lines that match the information entered If there are no lines the message No Matching Lines Found displays and you are returned to the Selection prompt where you may choose another mapping option to perform If a matching line is found you are asked to confirm the deletion If the entries are correct select y and all matching lines in the mapping files are removed and you are returned to the Selection prompt where you may choose another mapping option to perform If you select n the mapping files are not altered and you are returned to the Selection prompt where you may choose another mapping option to perform 38 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Figure 11 Example of deleting an AlphaCom alarm Se Be kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
155. an be set up to identify the specific message types coming from the Exchange for each paging station as identified in the Exchange protocol as described in Message types on page 354 The following is the structure of an input group record description lt GP gt lt IntercomStation gt lt MessageType gt lt IGP gt 348 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual The 5 character input group prefix described on page 338 lt IntercomStation gt This is the 2 character Intercom Station identifier valid values are 01 through 96 as described in Message types on page 354 lt MessageType gt Identifies the type of message and is one of Request Connect Busy or Disconnect corresponding to the Intercom protocol messages as defined in Message types on page 354 There must be a single period between the parts of the input group record description and spaces are not allowed anywhere within the description This structure must be followed in defining input group records so that the Stentofon 9600 interface software can look for matches in the database using input group descriptions constructed from protocol messages received from the Intercom For each intercom station that is to be monitored you should define an input group record for each message type An example of the input group record descriptions to monitor intercom station 7 for a Stentofon 9600 interface using input group prefix STNO3 is STN03 01 Request S
156. and recognizes only alarm and dismissed message types sent from the Facility Integrator All other messages are ignored The Facility Integrator computer is a PC based platform Communication with the Picture Perfect host is using a serial line connection using the PC s serial port The communication is unidirectional meaning the interface only receives data from the Facility Integrator and does not send anything back This interface is available for standalone or redundant systems Remote Alarm Notification The Picture Perfect Remote Alarm Notification RAN package enables alarms from the Picture Perfect system to be routed to a remote non Picture Perfect system The alarms can then be processed by and responded to from the remote system Both systems use the TCP IP protocol to communicate with each other This method of communication guarantees accurate transmission of all data and instant notification of a system that is no longer connected to the network The RAN interface is available for standalone enterprise or redundant systems OH Receiver The OH Receiver interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the NX 8E Ademco or Radionix panel and recognizes predefined message types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect The data transfer is uni directional from the OH Receiver System Network or Dial up to the interface on the Picture Perfect host across a serial line connection
157. ange to indicate that it is now the primary and the interface software will then conduct communications with the CCTV switcher Refer to Figure 28 Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and CCTV interface on page 57 49 Software requirements The software requirements for the CCTV system and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Standalone system If you are using a standalone Picture Perfect system the following items are required e Picture Perfect Base base package e One of the following Picture Perfect CCTV interface packages American Dynamics amdyn e Burle Allegiant a1legiant e Burle Allplex allplex Grundig grundig e Javelin javelin e Kalatel kalatel e MaxPro maxpro Panasonic Proteus panasonic Panasonic 550 panasonic550 e Pelco pelco e Vicon Viper viper Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required e Picture Perfect Base base package e Picture Perfect Redundant System pprs package e One of the following Picture Perfect CCTV interface packages e American Dynamics amdyn e Burle Allegiant allegiant e Burle Allplex allplex Grundig grundig e Javelin javelin e Kalatel kalatel e MaxPro maxpro Panasonic Proteus panasonic Panasonic 550 panasonic550 e Pelco pelco e Vicon Viper viper 50 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Hardware requirements The hardware requirements for
158. any of the COM ports COM1 or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the DMP SCS 1 communication program is started A standard splitter box Two pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to the standard splitter ports Refer to Figure 43 123 124 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Figure 45 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M Picture Perfect System Splitter Port DB25F DB25M Cable to connect from the splitter master port to the DMP SCS 1 receiver See figure below D d D E DM k DD d D E DM k Figure 46 Cable pinouts Splitter to SCS 1 receiver DB25F to DB25F Splitter Master DMP SCS 1 Port Receiver DB25F DB25F Shield 1 1 Shield Rxd 2 2 Rxd Txd 3 3 Txd 4 RTS 5 CTS 8 DCD SG 7 7 SG Figure 47 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitter DB25F To DMP SCS 1 Receiver To Primary Host DB25F To Redundant Host DB25M S aren Master Port 1 Port 2 Port DB25F DB25F DB25F Splitter DB25F Figure 48 Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and intrusion interface 23014384 125 126 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Configuring DMP SCS 1 The SCS 1 interface to Picture Perfect acts as a filter by recognizing predefined messages that are received over the se
159. are configured using the SMIT utility Once the serial port has been configured using the SMIT utility it will be recognized by Picture Perfect during the interface software package installation Follow the directions below to configure the ports 1 Loginas root and open a terminal window 2 Type smit maktty The SMIT utility will load and a list of TTY types will display Refer to Figure 1 Figure 1 TTY type screen TTY Type Move cursor to desired item and press Enter tty rs232 Asynchronous Terminal tty rs422 Asynchronous Terminal F2zRefresh F10 Exit n Find Next 3 Selectthe TTY tty rs232 Asynchronous Terminal A list of parent adapters for each available serial port will be displayed An example is shown in Figure 2 Parent adapter screen on page 12 12 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Figure 2 Parent adapter screen Parent Adapter Move cursor to desired item and press Enter sa2 Available 10 78 IBM 2 R5 422A PCI Adapte Available 01 51 5 Available 01 52 Sta Fi Help 2 Refres F3 Cancel FS Inage Enter Do Find 4 Determine where the interface line will be connected to the RISC System 6000 At least one of the two standard serial ports is used by the support modem sal The other standard serial port sa0 is used by the console if it is an ASCII terminal If a graphical console is present one of the serial ports may also be used for the interface if available The interface lin
160. are installation procedure automatically updates the Picture Perfect backup configuration list file cas db text backup cfg so that future backups will include the files required for the Notifier interface Refer to the Picture Perfect documentation for information on how to backup and restore files Table 14 Notifier interface data files Data File Name Description cas db text notifier cfg TTY port extended configuration definition files is the port name for example ttyl for AIX ttyD001 for Linux cas db text notifier redundant cfg Notifier redundant configuration file Indicates that this is a redundant configuration Contains the host names Appendix Configuring an OH Receiver interface This appendix provides information on configuring the OH Receiver interface to Picture Perfect which acts as a secondary monitoring system for the NX 8E Ademco Radionix or any panel that can report alarms in SIA or CID formats In this appendix EE EE 242 Software requirements cesses 243 Hardware requirements AEN e EEN et eR aed e Roe s 244 asc d du de bh dee EE KENNEN Gee A dE 250 Testing Une PICT PAO usse Ua sedes a be ba oben da eels 256 Extended configuration cese et eee tasi ewes 256 Interface data file backup and restore 00 0 06 258 242 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Introduction The OH Receiver interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the NX 8E Ademc
161. are not processed In the case of a failover the mode on the redundant host will change to indicate that it is now the primary and the interface software will then process the alarms received from the Notifier fire alarm system 203 Software requirements The software requirements for the firepanel system and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system If you are using a stand alone Picture Perfect system the following items are required e Picture Perfect base base package Picture Perfect Notifier interface notifier package For the Notifier AFP1010 AM2020 System The panel must be configured with the pager option enabled This option is available on Notifier systems equipped with revision 6 5 or later EPROMs See the AM2020 AFP1010 manual for instructions on enabling this option The panel must be configured with the Auxiliary Printer Monitoring option disabled See the AM2020 AFP1010 manual for instructions on disabling this option Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect Base base package Picture Perfect Redundant System pprs package Picture Perfect Notifier interface notifier package For the Notifier AFP 1010 AM2020 System The panel must be configured with the pager option enabled This option is available on Notifier systems equipped with revision 6 5 or later EPROMs See the AM2020 AFP1010 manual
162. arms INPUT_GROUP_ID NPUT_GROUP_DESC ALARM_ID 1 DOOR HELD OPEN 1 2 DOOR FORCED OPEN 2 3 NVALID BADGE 3 4 LOST BADGE 4 5 SUSPENDED BADGE 5 6 UNKNOWN BADGE 6 HOST TO MICRO COMM FAIL 7 8 BADGE HISTORY OVERFLOW 8 9 DOWNSTREAM MICRO COMM FAIL 9 10 0 READER COMM FAIL 10 11 APB BADGE VIOLATION l 12 ALARM HISTORY OVERFLOW 12 13 1 READER COMM FAIL 13 From the output you see two of the input groups 8 and 11 do not have valid Alarm IDs which means that the alarms were not properly defined This problem should be corrected by following the procedures to define or update input group and alarm records in the database as described in the Picture Perfect User Manual To determine which debugging report to use for a specific alarm event type refer to Table 6 on page 79 For each alarm event type given in the first column labelled Alarm Event Description the third column labelled Database Table identifies the corresponding debugging report For database table door use report CSTATION Doors For database table reader use report CSTATION Readers For database table micro use report CSTATION Micros Finally for database table inputs use report CSTATION Inputs The debugging report CSTATION Alarms is used to check the input groups for all alarm event types Running the cstgen tool The following conditions must be true in order to run the cstgen tool e The Picture Perfect database must be operational A valid account tab
163. as been accomplished alarm notification events will be routed from Picture Perfect to the Central Station system automatically without operator intervention Detailed information on the specifics of the Central Station interface and the tool that is used to specify which alarms are to be routed to the Central Station system is provided in Configuration on page 76 It is strongly recommended that this section be read before installing the Central Station interface software The Central Station interface to Picture Perfect can exist in standalone subhost and network host versions of Picture Perfect It is not available for Redundant Picture Perfect systems due to the single serial connection between the Picture Perfect host and Central Station system In all applications there is a one to one correspondence between Picture Perfect and a Central Station system receiver port You will not be able to connect all subhosts in a network to a single Central Station system receiver port Each subhost must interface with its own Central Station system receiver port Software requirements e Picture Perfect Base base package e Picture Perfect Central Station interface cstation package Hardware requirements The following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual e Serial ports AIX One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the CO
164. asked to confirm it The input group prefix you entered was CMDO1 Is this correct y n y Entera y to confirm or an n to re enter the prefix If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the value If you entered y messages similar to the following will be displayed regarding the selection of a default facility for the Commend interface kk kk Default Commend Facility assignment portion We kk kxk When the input_group and alarm records are created they will require an associated facility You need to select the default facility that will be used when creating the input_group and alarm records if an explicit one is not specified The currently available defined facilities will be displayed and you will need to make a selection from the provided list If you need to create a new facility specifically for the Commend input groups and alarms then you should exit this program create the facility using the GUI then re run this program and then choose that facility Do you wish to exit this program now y n n Entera y toexitthescriptoran n to enter a facility from the choices that will be provided If you entered y you will exit the program and you may create a facility specifically for the Commend interface if you so desire then re run the script 106 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual 11 12 If you entered n a list of the currently defined facilities on your system will be displayed
165. asonic 550 cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to Panasonic 550 DB25F to DB25M Picture Perfect Host DB25F Tx Rx GND DSR oan wn DCD 2 Rx 3 Tx 7 GND 4 5 DTR 20 Panasonic 550 Matrix Controller DB25M 53 54 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Figure 22 Panasonic Proteus Pelco Pelcob cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to Bridge PC Panasonic Proteus Pelco or Pelcob CM9750 DT DB25F to DB9F Picture Perfect System DB25F Tx 2 Rx 3 GND 7 RTS 4 CTS 5 DSR 6 DCD8 DTR 20 Panasonic Proteus Pelco Bridge PC Pelcob CM9750 DT DB9F Rx Tx GND DTR DSR RTS CTS on O E Om Go PM Figure 23 Pelco cable pinouts pelco only Bridge PC to controller DB9F to DB9F Pelco Bridge PC DB9F Pelco CM9750 Controller DB9F 3 Rx 2 Tx 5 GND Figure 24 Vicon Viper cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to switcher DB25F to DB9M Picture Perfect System DB25F Tx 2 Rx 3 RTS 4 CTS 5 GND 7 Viper Console Port DB9M Rx Tx RTS CTS GND zl E On WwW Video loss monitoring and reporting If you are using a controller that provides video loss and alarm reporting you will also need the items listed below e A second RS 232 C serial port e A second cable is wired to connect the Picture Perfect system to the CCTV switcher printer port Refer to Figure 25 Overview of the Picture Perfect and CCTV interface
166. at have come in multiple times To remove Commend alarms from the Alarm Monitor use the remove or purge button to remove all alarms or double click on the alarm to bring up an individual window and remove them individually The time displayed in the Alarm Monitor is the time that Picture Perfect received the message from the Commend system Figure 42 Sample alarm monitor screen A Alarm Monitor Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor User Monitor Performance Monitor Alarm Monitor fil Q E X SC Q New Alarms Total Alarms 6 Display is now active Highest Priority 20 Priori Alarm Description Condition D Device Date Device Time 20 HOST TOMIERS SOMES Fait MERO 301 MPX N A 61 08 2008 08 07 35 Crip ss BLK 23 STA 13 Request CMD07 FF23 FF13 21 22 01 06 2005 07 35 33 01 06 2005 BLK 23 STA 13 Acknowledge CMDO7 FF23 FF13 12 31 01 06 2005 07 05 55 01 06 2005 BLK 23 STA 13 Clear CMDO7 FF23 FF13 10 30 01 06 2005 07 04 50 01 06 2005 BLK 23 STA 13 Release CMDO7 FF23 FF13 0A 01 06 2005 07 03 48 01 06 2005 BLK 23 COD 01 Duress CMDO7 FF23 FF01 1D 01 06 2005 07 02 21 01 06 2005 116 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual The above figure of the Alarm Monitor shows a possible alarm sequence This scenario would be for a system that used the input group prefix CMD07 and has appropriate input group and alarm records to recognize the conditions coming from the Commend
167. at you will need to know about mapping alarms to the AlphaCom system To add or delete an alarm from the CCTV system you must know the Alarm Id Input Group Id and Location Id 33 These reports detail the alarm conditions defined within your system and display the required information The information includes e Alarm Id e Input Group Id e Location Id For example If you want an alarm to be sent to the AlphaCom system whenever the door with the description 000 1 00 DOOR is forced open you must first generate a CCTV Doors Report to obtain the required information Generating a SQL Report Follow these steps to generate a SQL report 1 From the Reports menu select the Report menu item then click the Report tab 2 From the Select a Report Category list pane select the category for this report When you select a category the existing reports in that category display in the Select a Report list pane 3 To open an existing report select it from the Select a Report list pane then from the toolbar click Run 4 Click Print to display the Print Preview page From this window you may Save to pdf or Print to your local printer Mapping CCTV Monitored Events Use the program alphacom map to add delete and print the alarms that are sent to and received from the AlphaCom system The alphacom map program does not allow you to edit an alarm To make changes to an alarm you must first delete the alarm and then add a new alarm If
168. ata lines for the message types to be monitored for the described devices You must know the input group prefix used by the Stentofon interface that is being targeted for data generation See the section nput group prefix on page 308 for more information Follow these steps to use the stngen tool to install database records 1 2 3 4 5 Log in as a user with system permission Open a new window Type su root to become the root user Change to the directory where the input file is located Type cas bin profile This will ensure you have the correct PATH environment variable that will give you access to the stngen tool and the database tools it uses Type stngen Messages similar to the following will appear on the screen Stentofon Data Generator 2 0 Would you like to i nstall or u ninstall data records i u i To use the install option type i The following messages will display You have chosen to install database record Please enter input file name Enter the name of your input file The input file you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it You entered as the input file name stn inp Is this correct y n y To confirm the input file name accept the default y by pressing Ever Enter n to change the name 10 11 12 311 If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the name If you entered y the following messages will display Enter the inpu
169. ated manually or by the nfrgen tool Device types This table lists the valid device types that can be monitored and is provided as a convenience It is not necessarily a complete list of all available device types If you have a device type that needs to be monitored and it is not listed here you can enter a new device type up to 12 characters in length Table 13 Device Types Detectors Monitor Modules Control Modules Zones 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 SMOKE PHOTO MONITOR CONTROL FORWARD ZONE SMOKE ION PULL STATION TELEPHONE REVERSE ZONE HEAT ANALOG WATER FLOW FORM C RELAY FIXED HEAT D SMOKE CONV POWER CONV FIXED PHOT D SPRNKLR MNTR ALARMS PEND ION DUCT DET TRBL MONITOR TRBLS PEND NON ALM MON GENERAL PEND MON NORM CLD CMX CONTROL MON PULL STA CMX FORM C MONITOR PAGE SPEAKER 237 Table 13 Device Types continued Detectors Monitor Modules Control Modules Zones 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 NON ALARM GN ALARM EVC GN ALARM GN ALRM FORC GN WATER FLW GN TRBL FORC GN WAT FORC GN SPSU FORC TROUBLE TROUBLE FORC PAGE FORMC MANUAL Testing the interface Once the input groups and alarm database records have been set up and the interface 1s running it should be tested to make sure messages are being correctly recognized by the interface If the fixed message types s
170. ation definition file isthe port name eg ttyl forAIX ttyDOO1 for Linux cas db text cstation map Alarm map file that defines the Picture Perfect alarm events to be forwarded to the Central Station system cas db text cstation input Protected input file usedto createthe cstation map file cas db text cstation accounts table The file defining Central Station system account numbers corresponding to Picture Perfect micro IDs Picture Perfect output to the Central Station system The Picture Perfect to Central Station System interface is generic and is recognizable by any Central Station system that accepts SIA formatted data ABM Data Systems and Monitoring Automation Systems MAS have been targeted as two candidates for the Central Station interface initial implementation Picture Perfect Acts as a receiver of incoming alarms Processes selective types of data such as card and administrative maintenance on the Micro 5 intelligent field panels e Reformats alarm information into the industry accepted standard SIA format e Outputs the SIA formatted data Picture Perfect s primary roles are to offer the functionality of card access control and to output alarm information in standard format to the Central Station system The Picture Perfect to Central Station interface supports a single Central Station system connection per Picture Perfect host computer Interface port requirements The co
171. ation on how to backup and restore files Table 18 Simplex interface data file Data file name Description cas db text simplex cfg TTY port extended configuration definition files is the port name for example tty1 for AIX ttyD001 for Linux cas db text simplex redundant cfg Simplex redundant configuration file Indicates that this is a redundant configuration Contains the host names 298 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Appendix M Configuring a Stentofon Touchline interface This appendix provides information on configuring the Stentofon interface to Picture Perfect which acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Stentofon TouchLine Intercom System In this appendix EE EE 300 Software requirements ccce 301 Hardware reguirements AEN e EEN etes ed e Roe ee 301 a ur T 305 DU dud RH 323 Extended configuration ccce 326 Interface data file backup and restore 0 cee 328 300 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Introduction The Stentofon interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Stentofon Intercom System and recognizes only the predefined message types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect The Stentofon Intercom System communicates with the Picture Perfect host through a serial line connection Messages or alarms recognized by the Stentofon interface are looked up in the Picture Perfect database using the
172. aud CharacterSize Parity StopBits Xon Xoff to the Notifier interface do not Interlogix CASI n based on your installation responses Notifier AM2020 AFP1010 NFR1 dev tty5 2400 8 M FO cas db text notifier redundant cfg The presence of this file indicates that it is a redundant installation The file contains the names of the two redundant hosts and an indication of whether or not the interface is to run redundantly The following is an example of the contents of the Notifier redundant configuration file cas db text notifier redundant cfg a DO NOT touch these lines RedundantOper RedundantHosts notifier redundant cfg 1 11 Copyright C 1995 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved notifier redundant cfg 1 12 06 18 03 D This file contains the configuration information for the NOTIFIER FIRE ALARM interface for redundant operations These values are set up at installation and are permanent Y primaryl backupl 239 240 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Interface data file backup and restore The Notifier interface software requires several data files for its operation These files are created during the software installation process and are summarized in Table 14 Notifier interface data files on page 240 Backups should be done on a regular basis A good practice is to do it at the same time the Picture Perfect database is backed up The Notifier softw
173. ault facility DEFAULT FACILITY Building 1 Building 2 Building 3 Building 4 Building 5 BLDG 1 2 3 4 5 AND PARKING BLDG 2 STUDIO BLDG 2 DESIGN AID Security Control Center Head Office k p 400 10 G vs C ho r H Ove we eo 144 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual 2 Building 1 Garage 3 Building 2 Garage 4 Building 3 Garage 15 Building 4 Garage 16 Building 5 Garage 7 Head Office Garage 8 Penthouse Press RETURN for more 19 B 1 COMP ROOMS 20 REGENT COURT 21 Facility A 22 Facility B 23 SCS Facility Enter the value of the default SCS facility 1 23 1 11 Enter the number of the default facility to use with the SCS interface This value will be used when 12 13 14 15 creating input group and alarm records from the entries in the input file for which a specific facility is not specified The facility you selected will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it You have selected as the default facility SCS Facility Is this ok y n y Entera y to confirm or an n to re enter the default facility If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the value If you entered a y the facility you selected and its id will be displayed and you will be prompted for the default alarm priority to use for the alarms created Default Facility chosen is SCS Facility Default Facility s id is 35 p P e MM
174. ay communication between the Notifier panel and Picture Perfect Note Configuring output groups and outputs is optional nfrgen does not create outputs or link them to input groups so if the nfrgen uninstall option is used to remove the Notifier records then they are recreated with nfrgen install the output group linkings will need to be recreated manually Monitoring alarms You are now finished with the basic configuration of the Notifier package The Notifier messages that have been recognized through the input groups and linked to an alarm can be monitored through the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor For any alarm to be monitored or recorded the appropriate routing must be selected from the Alarms form for each alarm The Alarm Description and Location columns correspond to the Alarm and Input Group record description fields respectively From this information the operator should be able to tell the type of device status and loop number and detector module number of the reported alarm The complete message of the alarm should be read from the Notifier panel or from a printer connected to that panel The operator will be able to respond and remove these alarm conditions from the monitor but no communication will be sent back to the Notifier panel since this is a one way communication All messages recognized by the Notifier interface will show a condition of Alarm and an Input State of N A As with other Picture Perfect alarms that come into
175. bes how to configure a redundant system The instructions are listed below Informational messages followed by a question display to give you the option of installing the interface on a redundant host The messages will be similar to the following Updating Picture Perfect backup configuration Picture Perfect backup configuration update completed Is this interface to run in a redundant Picture Perfect environment y n n l Press y to accept the default setting or n depending on whether or not the interface is to run in a redundant Picture Perfect environment If you selected n skip to Configuring additional interfaces on page 19 as the installation process for this interface is complete If you selected y a message similar to the following will appear Installation MUST be performed on the primary host It is assumed that this host primaryl is the primary host The redundant host name must be different from the primary host name Pleas nter the name of the redundant host 2 Enter the name of the redundant host The host name you specified will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it Redundant host is backupl Is this correct y n y 3 Entery to accept or press n to change the redundant host name If you selected n you will be asked to re enter the redundant host name If you selected y the following messages will appear Checking to verify backupl is reachable Updating redundant
176. bus EL M REG gud DS OF EEUU ARE Eb E 271 Redunddantsystem ebe eebe tree edic ie EE b beet d Ub ed ARIETE 271 Hardware overviews vise rdi mE rU EEN ERR ERAN TEX VAR VENE NCC E YR Eege 272 Configuration 2 2 Ene PE Al det nd cared Haass DU es Ue i de bonus e dues tee A watt deme E 273 Configuring aladrmro ting Criterig eee er nr Rr RR ERR EK anus ERU DU ee e d d ERE REN UE 273 Remote Connection Lost Alomm es e ea 274 Advanced configuration e ere p REIS I eer EIERE BEER RES ERREESEER 277 How long to wait for a COMNECtION nis sesso eg ois er repPX REQUE ERE een 279 Options or CONN lost aldrtis 5 er eet erdt ENEE EEN YET 279 What Happens When the Connechonslost s n 279 Alarm response EE 280 TCP IP COMTIJULGt OM ME EE 280 Message format from Picture Perfect Version 1 55 or higher 00 cece eee cee eee eee eens 281 Message format from the remote SYSTEM ENEE EN NENNEN ENEE LER RR EN 281 Error E EE 281 x Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Appendix L Appendix M Configuring a Simplex Interface 285 INGMODUCHON EELER REES EELER EES ERG ERE EE RR E 286 REGUNCONESYSLEMS EE 286 Software requirements og EE cence ved e e Eg dee casa ee dang EE RE NER E n etd ERR IR Uca 287 elle Wee EE 287 Red nddht Syst Misi ENNEN ERAN AEN dE EE a d 287 Hardwareirequirement eier ged epe RI Er cee seb ned eR I E DIDI ERN Re 288 Standsalonie SYSTEM 0355 chee sc ov eaten ent tee beer a rado a hd CREER VETERE A TEE
177. can be informed immediately When the lost connection alarm is displayed on the Alarm Monitor it displays the Alarm Description and Location from the data just modified above The Condition of the alarm will be either Alarm or Reset and the Input State is always N A Refer to Standalone on page 270 for a discussion of alarm priorities and parameters The process state changes from Alarm or Reset state to Remote when forwarded A sample Alarm Monitor form displays in Figure 101 277 Figure 102 Alarm monitor form W Alarm Monitor Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor User Monitor Performance Monitor ill Qa x oa New Alarms 3 Total Alarms 3 Display is now active Highest Priority 45 MO RM SY Location Conditi Device Date Device Time ARM NO ATION A A 06 200 ES ONN R Wi A 0 9 31 0 MFAIL MICRO 0 SA1 0 01 06 2005 19 35 33 01 06 2005 UCS COMM FAILURE ERROR UCS NOT RESPONDING 01 06 2005 19 36 55 01 06 2005 Advanced configuration The RAN system supports an extended configuration that allows you to alter its behavior This configuration information is kept in the cas db text rantcpip cfg file This file consists of a series of text lines each containing a variable name followed by a value or setting Note DO NOT change this file unless absolutely necessary If you find it absolutely necessary to change this file you must be knowledgeable about text edit The
178. can be removed from the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor without being reset 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another alarm Figure 64 The alarms screen A Alarms Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones i Alarm Description Instructions Alarms Alarm Colors Alarm Events Alarm Messages Alarm Responses Description Q Bj X wo P ap De CL EC Gi i Description 1 Facility Priority 0 Route Definition ta Alarm Routing a Online O No i Yes Inhibit Schedule Changes O No D Yes Immediate Reset Input No 1 e j Yes Immediate Dial Required No e Yes l Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Manual Reset Outputs I C Duration Reset Outputs Color Picker Color Picker Color Sample Background Foreground Results 0 records Follow these steps to modify the alarm 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Inthe description field of the Alarms form enter the description from the alarm text area on the associated input group record as the search criteria 3 Click Find The desired alarm should appear 4 Edit the desired information 5 When completed save the alarm by clicking
179. cas bin profile 3 Enter e command cas bin msan set single The following is a sample output from this command Querying the tps daemons table Updating tps daemons entry 54 cas bin msan R A 20030421 175910 statement UPDATE tps daemons SET pathname cas bin msan modify date 20030423 modify time 195449 WHERE id 54 statement processed OK 1 rows affected WHERE id 54 Statement processed OK 1 rows affected Successfully update tps daemons table entry 54 cas bin msan R A 20030421 175910 87 Interface data file backup and restore The Central Station interface software requires several data files for its operation These files are created during the software installation process and are summarized in Table 7 below Normal use of the interface software may cause changes to one or more of these files Backups should be done on a regular basis A good practice is to do it at the same time the Picture Perfect database is backed up The Central Station interface installation procedure automatically updates the Picture Perfect backup configuration list file cas db text backup cfg so that future backups will include the files required for the Central Station interface Refer to the Picture Perfect documentation for information on how to backup and restore files Table7 Central Station interface data files Data file name Description cas db text cstation comm cfg TTY port extended configur
180. cas db text cstation map has been created Do you want to inform the system to use the new file y n y Sending signal USR2 to task msan Invalid records were saved in file cstation input bad Saved input file my input as my input processed A log of this run was saved in file cstgen log 83 84 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual In the previous example one error was detected and flagged by the asterisk character when attempting to route the Badge History Overflow alarm for Micro ID number to the Central Station system A more detailed error message is contained in the cstgen log log file indicating the database record or field that is incorrect or missing For this particular error no input group was assigned for the Badge History Overflow alarm event type for the specified micro The Picture Perfect database should be corrected to include this definition and the cstgen tool should then be re executed See the discussion earlier in this chapter on using SQL reports to identify missing database information Advanced configuration The Central Station interface supports an extended configuration that allows you to alter its behavior This configuration information is kept in the cas db text cstation comm ttyN cfg file where ttyN is the name of the tty port specified for the interface The file consists of a series of text lines each containing a variable name followed by a value or setting Note DO NOT change this f
181. ccounts table provides a Central Station account number for each Picture Perfect micro defined in the Picture Perfect database The table must be created prior to using the cstgen tool and should be updated whenever new micros are defined in the Picture Perfect database The accounts table file can be created using any text editor An empty table file is created during installation of the Picture Perfect to the Central Station interface software It is only necessary to add records to this table for those micro s whose alarm events are to be forwarded to the Central Station system A record consists of the Picture Perfect Micro ID number not the micro entry database record number and the corresponding Central Station system account number separated by a vertical bar pipe with no intervening spaces The Micro ID numbers can be determined through the Picture Perfect user interface by executing the CSTATION Micros SQL report as described in the section Running the reports on page 81 Valid account numbers are 1 to 9998 Account number 9999 1s reserved for host to host communication failure alarms which are independent of micros Use the utility cstgen Validate Accounts Table to verify the contents of the accounts table It scans the entries in the accounts table and verifies that the specified Micro ID values are defined in the Picture Perfect database and that the account numbers are within the proper range Invalid records are pre pended with a poun
182. ceiver 01 on Line 1 from zone 003 Monitoring events The Event Monitor displays the armed disarmed open close type messages The priority description and the date and time of the occurrence of the event is displayed in priority order Messages of the same priority are sorted by Date Time with the oldest at the top If a record appears on the event monitor the panel described is disarmed Open If no records are displayed all panels are armed Closed Testing the interface Once the input groups and alarm database records have been set up and the interface 1s running it should be tested to make sure messages are being correctly recognized by the interface Extended configuration The OH Receiver interface supports an extended configuration that allows you to alter its behavior This configuration information is kept in the following files cas db text oh receiver ttyN cfg cas db text oh receiver redundant cfg where ttyN is the name of the port specified for the interface cas db text oh receiver ttyN cfg This file contains configuration information specific to the copy of the interface that connects to the OH Receiver device attached to the tt yN port It consists of a series of text lines each containing a variable name followed by a value or setting The OH Receiver interface reads the file upon startup to configure the port and the interface Note DO NOT change this file unless absolutely necessary If you find it ab
183. ch input group These fields must be set as follows Delay Time 0 Boolean Type Individual Input Group State Enabled Open Condition Ignored Short Condition Ignored Broadcast State Changes No Alarm Should point to the alarm record generated for this input group Facility Facility the input group resides in 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another input group Figure 116 Sample input groups screen B Inputs Outputs Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Lf input Groups Inputs Output Groups Outputs Input Group Events Output Group Events ipti d Description EI Q x bS E x 6 p 4 E Se g Define Input Group Parent input Groups Output Groups Description BTNO3 FFF1 Connect Facility GLOBAL el el Input Group State Open Condition Disabled 9 Ignored Enabled Detected Boolean Type OR Any O AND All Individual Short Condition Ignored Detected Broadcast State Changes No Yes Alarm Station 01 Connect lt GLOBA v geo m E DH Delay Time g HRS Results 1 records 319 Modifying an input group Follow these steps to modify an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 Enter the input group description you are looking for as the sea
184. ch other input group records are linked Note Any input group using the targeted input group prefix to be uninstalled that was created manually through the Picture Perfect Input Group Form will be removed That means it will be permanently lost if its data was not originally part of the input file It is recommended that any input group alarm pairs created manually be added to the stngen9600 input file so they can be recreated if the uninstall option is used Using stngen uninstall Before you start e You must have root permissions to run the stngen9600 tool e The database must be running stngen9600 will check this when the tool is invoked If the database is not running the tool will attempt to start it up You must know the input group prefix used by the Stentofon 9600 interface that is being targeted for uninstallation 346 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Follow these steps to use the stngen9600 tool to uninstall database records 1 2 3 4 5 Log in as a user with system permission Open a new window Type su root to become the root user Change to the directory where the input file name is located Type cas bin profile This will ensure you have the correct PATH environment variable that will give you access to the stngen9600 tool and the database tools it uses Type stngen9600 Messages similar to the following will appear on the screen Stentofon Data Generator 2 0 Would you like
185. connection alarm generated after the appropriate timer expires during which the connection was not re established Configuration file is missing variable_name parameter A mandatory variable is missing from the cas db text rantcpip cfg file If you are unable to replace the variable in the file then re install the RAN package could not PP smalloc an Alarm message could not PP smalloc TPMessage could not PP smalloc TPAlarmStateChangeData could not PP smalloc remote TPMessage could not PP smalloc remote TPAlarmStateChangeData All these errors indicate an internal system resource has been exceeded The only way to correct this is to restart the Picture Perfect system Could not open pipe filename error xx RAN is unable to create the alarm pipe file This is typically the result of an invalid PipeName variable Error retrieving an alarm from the pipe errno xx An error occurred while trying to retrieve an alarm from the hard disk to send to the remote system Check the file system sizes failed to register with the frontend errno xx An internal component of RAN is missing Shutdown and restart the Picture Perfect system Failed fetching alarm from frontend errno xx An error was encountered while trying to get an alarm from the system to send to the remote system The alarm was not sent to the remote system only received xx of yy RAN received only xx bytes out the yy bytes that it expected to receive The remote syste
186. controlled alarm P Print a hardcopy of all AlphaCom controlled alarms 0X o X OR E 0 X X X Exit kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk EE E Refer to Figure 13 Example printed report sorted by input group id on page 40 for a sample of a printed report 40 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Figure 13 Example printed report sorted by input group id Picture Perfect to AlphaCom mapped alarms Input LocId AlphaCom Alarm Type Group IdAlarmId InpType Alarm Task Name Description 0 28 10 17 25 alphacom_comm 00 1 00 Door Held Open 0 102 21 45 15 alphacom_comm 00 1 00 Door Forced Open 0 39 201 51 202 alphacom comm RDR 00 1 00 Invalid Badge AlphaCom Alarm Number to AlphaCom Node Numbers mappings AlphaCom AlphaCom Alarm Node Numbers 15 1 25 2 20 202 1 2 10 Exiting the program If you have made any changes to the mapping file while running alphacom_map and you select X to exit you will be asked if you want to inform the rest of the system of your changes If you select y then the system is informed of your mapping file changes The system will re read the mapping file and use it to determine which alarms will be routed to the AlphaCom Exchange controller Any existing active alarms will not be re run through the mapping file only newly occurring alarms If you are not finished making your changes but are leaving the a1phacom map program temporarily you can enter n This
187. current versions that are supported by the stngen tool are 1 7 RISC AIX 4 3 3 and Red Hat Linux 7 2 e 2 0 RISC AIX 5 1L and Red Hat Linux 7 3 4 0 RISC AIX 5L Version 5 2 or Red Hat Linux WS ES or AS 4 0 4 5 RISC AIX 6 1 or Red Hat Linux 5 3 Input file data format The lines of data that follow the version information should contain rows of delimited text data that define the paging station identifier the communication activity and optionally a CCTV device or switcher name and the CCTV alarm number The delimiter character between fields must be the symbol There should be one line of data for each unique combination that is going to be monitored The format of a data record is as follows lt Station gt lt CommActivity gt lt AlarmDesc gt lt Facility gt lt CCTVDeviceName gt lt CCTVNumber gt lt Port gt lt Station gt This is the 4 character pager station identification number lt CommActivity gt This is the type of communication activity Request Connect Disconnect as described in Message types on page 323 lt AlarmDesc gt This is the unique alarm message text to be displayed on the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor screen and or logged to the history file lt Facility gt This id of the facility that will be used for the input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the stngen program you will be prompted to select a default Stentofon facility from the currently
188. d if they weren t preceded by a comment symbol S07 S88 S99 To have all copies of the interface ignore signals S07 S88 and S99 except the interfaces for which there is a specific cas db text scs signals ttyN cfg file remove the comment at the beginning of the lines Any other signals to be ignored should be added to the file starting in column 1 165 cas db text scs redundant cfg This presence of this file indicates that it is a redundant installation The file contains the names of the two redundant hosts and an indication of whether or not the interface is to run redundantly The following are the contents of a sample SCS redundant configuration file scs redundant cfg 1 5 Copyright C 1995 2003 GE Interlogix CASI All Rights Reserved Scs redundant cfg 1 5 05 14 02 This file contains the configuration information for the SCS ALARM interface for redundant operations These values are set up at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines RedundantOper x RedundantHosts primaryl backupl Interface data file backup and restore The DMP SCS 1 interface software requires several data files for its operation These files are created during the software installation process and are summarized in Table 11 below Normal use of the interface software may cause changes to one or more of these files Backups should be done on a regular basis A good practice is to do it at the same t
189. d and you will be asked to confirm it The input group prefix you entered was STN01 Is this correct y n y To continue press y To stop press n If you chose to continue the records will be deleted and you will see messages similar to the following m The input group prefix being used is STNO1 Making alarm id checks Deleting input group and alarm records n The following log files contain the SQL statements and errors logged during the delete process tmp stn inpgrp del Log tmp stn alarm del Log Successfully deleted entries from switcher device allplex map file Successfully deleted entries from switcher device kalatel map file Un install completed You have made changes to one or more CCTV mapping files Do you want to inform the system of these changes y n y If this script was called from the removal script then select n to not inform the system now since it s not running When re started the changes will take effect If the Picture Perfect system is running select y if you want these changes to take effect now or n if you want them to take effect at the next restart If n was selected you will return to the prompt or back to the removal script If y was selected messages similar to the following will appear then you will exit the script Sending signal USR2 to task ktd tty5 Sending signal USR2 to task msan Using Picture Perfect to configure the Stentofon interface F
190. d displayed on the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor The Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor will display the Input Group Prefix the 7 character id and a user defined alarm description Further message information should be obtained from the primary monitoring device which is the Firesine panel Optionally an output group and associated outputs can be associated with an input group Messages or alarms recognized by the firepanel interface are looked up in the Picture Perfect database using the input group table Picture Perfect must be set up with the appropriate input groups and alarms before they can be recognized Optionally an output group and associated outputs can be associated with an input group Redundant systems The Firesine interface to Picture Perfect also supports operations in a Picture Perfect Redundant System pprs environment where two hosts connect to a single Firesine system Connectivity is achieved using a splitter between the Picture Perfect system and the Firesine system This allows the physical connection of the Firesine system to an RS 232 serial port on each Picture Perfect host computer In a redundant configuration the Firesine system interface software executes on both Picture Perfect hosts and both receive alarm notifications However only the interface software executing on the primary host processes the alarm and forwards it to the Alarm Monitor Normal pprs processing will result in the alarm appearing on the backup h
191. d door CSTATION DoorHeld Door Forced Open DoorForced door CSTATION DoorForced nvalid Badge Read InvBadge reader CSTATION InvBadge Suspended Badge Read SuspBadge reader CSTATION SuspBadge Lost Badge Read LostBadge reader CSTATION LostBadge Unknown Badge Read UnkBadge reader CSTATION UnkBadge Anti Passback Violation APBBadge reader CSTATION APBBadge Duress Violation DurBadge reader CSTATION DurBadge Reader Failure ReaderFail reader CSTATION ReaderFail 80 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Table 6 Forwardable alarm notification events Alarm Event Description Alarm Event Name Database Table SQL Report Name Upstream Communication UpStream micro CSTATION UpStream Failure Downstream Communication DownStream micro CSTATION DownStream Failure Alarm History Overflow AlmHistOvfl micro CSTATION AlmHistOvfl Badge History Overflow BdgHistOvfl micro CSTATION BdgHistOvfl Host Communication Failure HostComm host CSTATION HostComm DI Board Input Point DIPoint input CSTATION DIPoint 1 Available only in enterprise networked Picture Perfect configurations Input file format The cstgen tool s input file consists of optional comment lines denoted by a leading pound sign 7 character followed by data lines specifying the alarm events to be forwarded to the Central Station system Each data line consists of an alarm event name taken from Table 6 on page 79 followed by one or
192. d for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem Linux One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COMI or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the DMP SCS 1 communication program is started Cable to connect the Picture Perfect system to the intrusion system console port Refer to Figure 43 Figure 43 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to SCS 1 receiver DB25F to DB25F Picture Perfect Host DMP SCS 1 Receiver Computer DB25F DB25F Shield 1 1 Shield Rxd 2 2 Rxd Txd 3 3 Txd 4 RTS 5 CTS 8 DCD SG 7 7 SG Figure 44 Overview of a Picture Perfect system and an intrusion interface 5301431A Redundant system If you have a Picture Perfect redundant system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual e e AIX Linux DMP SCS 1 receiver provided by the manufacturer Serial Ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If
193. d in the following section These messages must be configured on the Picture Perfect system Note The est3gen application should only be used to configure EST3 systems Refer to EST3 configuration on page 181 Alarms recognized by the EST interface The particular alarms that have been predefined into the EST interface are as follows 0 FIRE ALARM SUPERVISORY SHORT 2 SUPERVISORY OPEN 4 RESTORE Fire Alarm Supervisory Short or Open The where is the alarm type is always located at the beginning of an alarm line that is retrieved from the serial port When the EST interface finds this pattern it then searches for the panel device id by first advancing past the initial alarm line a set number of lines depending on the alarm type Once that line is found EST looks for the first colon After the first colon there will be a four digit id This is the panel device id EST then searches the input groups category of the Picture Perfect database for the combination of the Input Group Prefix and the panel device id See Input group prefix on page 175 for more information If it is found an alarm is sent to Picture Perfect from the EST interface with an input state that maps to the particular alarm The different alarm types are recognized by Picture Perfect and the Alarm Monitor The Alarm Monitor maps the alarm types in the Condition and Input State fields The mapping of the Alarm to Condition and Input fields is discussed in
194. d of the appropriate input group record which was created manually or by the stngen tool Lines 1 3 Paging Station completed a communication sequence with the Stentofon Exchange It issued a request for communication received a connection and then terminated the connection Lines 4 5 Paging Station 10 is in the process of communicating with the Stentofon Exchange It issued a request for communication and received a connection which has not yet terminated Line 6 Paging Station 3 has requested communication with the Stentofon Exchange but has not yet been connected 323 Testing the interface Once the input groups and alarm database records have been set up and the interface is running it should be tested to make sure messages are being correctly recognized by the interface The Alarm Monitor should receive the appropriate messages if they have been set up correctly If the Alarms are not being shown on the Alarm Monitor then the appropriate input group description should be checked to make sure that it follows the format specified for that message type listed under the Adding or modifying input groupssection of this document Make sure the appropriate Input Group prefix is being used in the description field and that it matches the one established upon installation inthe stn_ttyN cfg configuration file Also check the alarm routing field of the corresponding alarm record to make sure that the routing includes Monitor If there i
195. d sign character which converts them into comment lines and an error message is appended to the end of the line The invalid lines can then be corrected and the utility re executed until all lines have been validated Remember to remove both the pound sign and the error message before re executing the utility Note that you must have root permission to execute the cstgen Validate Accounts Table utility 79 Creating an input file An input file is required when using the cstgen tool It describes the alarm notification events to be forwarded to the Central Station system as described in Picture Perfect output to the Central Station system on page 87 The input file is a text editable file that must be created prior to running the cstgen tool During the Picture Perfect to Central Station interface installation process the protected input file cas db text cstation input is created This file should never be edited directly Instead copy it to another directory preferably with a different name and edit the copy to add or remove records as desired During processing of the copied file the cstgen utility will construct and install a new protected copy of the cas db text cstation input input file the previous version will be saved as a backup The format and rules for the structure of the input file are discussed in the following sections See the file cas db text cstation input sample for an example of how to populate the input file
196. d to receiving only the standard alarms such as invalid badge door held open door forced open generated by the Picture Perfect system alone Redundant systems The Simplex System interface to Picture Perfect supports operations in a Redundant Picture Perfect environment where two hosts have connectivity to a single Simplex System Connectivity is achieved using a splitter between the Picture Perfect system and the Simplex System This allows the physical connection of the Simplex System to an RS 232 serial port on each Picture Perfect host computer In a redundant configuration the Simplex System interface software executes on both Picture Perfect hosts and both receive alarm notifications from the Simplex System However only the interface software executing on the primary host processes the alarms Whenever an alarm notification is received by the interface software it determines if it is executing on the primary host Alarm notifications received by the interface software executing on the redundant host are not processed In the case of a failover the mode on the redundant host will change to indicate that it is now the primary and the interface software will then conduct communications with the Simplex System Software requirements The software requirements for the firepanel system and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system If you are using a stand alone Picture Perfect system the following items ar
197. dant configuration file Indicates that this is a redundant configuration Contains the host names Appendix J Configuring a Siebe CBAS interface This appendix provides information on configuring the Siebe Environmental Control s Facility Integrator CBAS interface to Picture Perfect which acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Facility Integrator In this appendix EE Dah ode 260 Extended configuration cesses 266 Interface data file backup and restore ccce cece 267 260 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Introduction The Siebe Environmental Control s Facility Integrator CBAS interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Facility Integrator and recognizes only alarm and dismissed message types sent from the Facility Integrator as described in the Engineer 5 Guide Building the FI Database Revision A Part Number MAN FIEG All other messages are ignored The Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor may be used to monitor messages from the Facility Integrator Alarm messages generate entries in the Alarm Monitor containing the prefix CBAS the alarm ID the time value from the message and the alarm type keyword ALARM ALMHI or ALMLO and as much of the alarm description as can be held in the Alarm Monitor s description string Further message information should be obtained from the primary monitoring device which is the Facility Integrator and its associa
198. data Installing Records DBLOAD Load Utility INFORMIX SOL Version 11 50 UC3 Table input group had 18 row s loaded into it Table alarm had 18 row s loaded into it Installation complete Your basic EST3 interface is complete 183 184 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Advanced configuration The EST system supports an extended configuration that allows you to alter its behavior This configuration information is kept in the cas db text est tty cfg file where tty is the name of the port to which the instance of the EST interface is connected This file consists of a series of text lines each containing a variable name followed by a value or setting The EST interface reads this file upon startup to configure the port and the interface Note DO NOT change this file unless absolutely necessary If you find it absolutely necessary to change this file you must be knowledgeable about text editors such as vi Before you begin please call GE Security Customer Support for assistance The following is a sample est c g file est tty2 cfg 1 23 Copyright C 1994 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved This file generated by the following installation script est inst 1 8 05 29 03 This file contains the configuration information for the EST FIRE ALARM interface Each interface that is running on a Picture Perfect system must have its own configuration file which c
199. dded U Code Number Changed Account Column two is the five digit account number with a range of 00000 99999 User Column three is used to specify the number of the user who was granted access It is a two to four digit string with a range of 00 9999 based upon the SCS 1 programming Added The number added is a 3 digit string with a range of 000 999 Alarm Description The fifth column is used as the alarm description field for the alarm record that is created for the associated input group record This description is what appears on the Alarm Monitor when an alarm occurs and should be used as a custom device label that helps describe more information about the device or detector and the event that occurred It can be up to 60 characters in length and either upper or lower case It is acceptable to use the same alarm description for multiple input file data lines when installing the data generator records Only one alarm record will be generated in this case and the appropriate input group records will point to the same alarm record Note Do not use an alarm description that matches the description field of an already existing alarm record in the Picture Perfect database This is an illegal condition that scsgen checks for before any data is generated 135 Facility The sixth column is used to specify the facility id that will be used for the input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the scsgen program you wi
200. ded by Alarm History The linking 1s done through the Input Group form after the alarm record has been established Creating alarm records that the input group records are linked to is required for the Notifier interface to operate It is the combination of the input group description and alarm description that make up the location and alarm columns displayed on the Alarm Monitor The alarm record description field should be used to further identify or describe the Notifier input group it is going to be linked to Several input group records can be linked to the same alarm but it would be prudent to set up one alarm record for each input group record s that have the same device and location The description field has no restrictions or required format since all the unique information for a message type is located in the input group description If there are similar alarm descriptions that apply to unique devices then separate alarm records and input group records should be created for each unique device to be recognized For example if you are going to be monitoring alarm messages and the four possible status conditions for a detector you would have four input groups that could point to one alarm record The alarm record could further describe the location of the detector An example of this alarm record is shown in Figure 73 For message types that are of a fixed nature as described in the sections Fixed messages types on page 214 and Adding or modifyin
201. defined facilities on the system If a facility value is not specified in the input file then the default Stentofon facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid facility id values create a SQL report using as the SQL statement SELECT id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file lt CCTVDeviceName gt lt CCTVNumber gt and Port fields These fields are optional but if present identify a CCTV switcher which camera is to be controlled when the alarm occurs and which port lt CCTVDeviceName gt Valid values for the field are defined in column 1 of Zable 19 Supported CCTV switcher products on page 306 308 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual lt CCTVNumber gt This is the CCTV alarm number Refer to the appropriate Picture Perfect CCTV interface document for information on how to specify CCTV information lt Port gt The TTY port on which the CCTV switcher is connected to the Picture Perfect host When specifying the port use only the tty portion of the name For example if the CCTV switcher is connected on dev tty2 only specify tty2 Example input file The following is an example of an input file for a Picture Perfect 4 5 system 4 5 F401 Request Station F401 Request kalatel 0O tty2 F401 Connect Station F401 Connect kalatel l tty2 F401 Disconnect Station F401 Disconnect kalatel 2 tty2 F110 Request S
202. described below For compatibility with existing systems the default mode during CCTV switcher interface software installation or upgrade is single device support You must shut down and restart Picture Perfect for the change to take effect Note If a new CCTV switcher interface is installed or you are upgrading an existing CCTV switcher interface and you were previously using the multiple device support feature you must re activate the multiple device support feature after installation Multiple device support To configure a Picture Perfect system to support output of CCTV commands to multiple switcher devices in response to a single Picture Perfect alarm event use the msan set multiple utility A sample execution of this utility is provided below Note You should configure the Picture Perfect software for multiple device support only if CCTV commands are to be routed to more than one switcher device for an alarm event There is a slight performance penalty for this configuration as the switcher device mapping tables must be fully searched to find all matches indicating the routing of a CCTV command for the specific alarm event To change the Picture Perfect CCTV switcher device support option to multiple perform the following steps 1 Log on to the system as root 2 Enterthe command cas bin profile 3 Enterthe command cas bin msan set multiple The following is a sample output from this command Querying the tps daemons t
203. device was configured If you have performed a redundant installation you must perform Database Recovery on the backup host prior to starting redundant Picture Perfect on the backup host Refer to the Picture Perfect 4 5 Redundant Edition User Manual for details 22 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Removal The removal script will automatically detect whether or not you are running in a redundant Picture Perfect environment If you are running in a redundant environment additional messages will appear during the removal process Note Picture Perfect must be stopped prior to package removal If running in a redundant Picture Perfect environment Picture Perfect on the redundant host must also be stopped prior to package removal Follow these steps to remove the Picture Perfect Interface Server package 1 2 Log in to the system as root and open a terminal window Type cd Start the removal program by typing ppr Messages similar to the following will appear on the screen Picture Perfect Package Removal custom pp bin ppr 2 0 02 12 03 Copyright C 1992 2003 GE Interlogix Inc WARNING THIS PROGRAM WILL COMPLETELY REMOVE PICTURE PERFECT PACKAGES AND ANY DATABASES USED BY THE PACKAGE SELECTING base OR all WILL REMOVE PICTURE PERFECT ENTIRELY ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO PROCEED Type yes and press the Enter key to proceed I
204. dgeable about text editors such as vi Before you begin please call GE Security Customer Support for assistance The following is an example of the contents of the port configuration file for a Stentofon device attached to port dev tty5 cas db text stn ttyb cfg stn tty5 cfg Copyright C 1995 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved This file generated from the following installation script I stentofon inst 1 18 06 18 03 This file contains the configuration information for the STENTOFON alarm interface Each interface that is running on a Picture Perfect system must have its own configuration file which contains the information on the specific serial line port the interface is going to read from It also contains the unique input group prefix that the interface will use to recognize specific input group database records using this prefix The InpGrpPrefix parameter is a required parameter in the configuration file This parameter is the prefix that must be used in the description field for all input groups that are to be recognized by the interface If this parameter is changed here it must be changed for all the input groups that are using it as a prefix This prefix is case sensitive so the declaration in here must match the one used in the input group description This description must be 5 characters with the last two being numeric The input group prefix declared in here will be read when the interfac i
205. ding signal USR2 to task ktd tty2 Sending signal USR2 to task allp tty3 Sending signal USR2 to task msan 150 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Using Picture Perfect to configure the DMP SCS 1 interface For a successful configuration follow these steps 1 Add or modify input groups for the possible messages Add or modify alarms 2 3 Add or modify output groups and outputs if desired 4 Monitor alarms Adding or modifying input groups The input group record description field is the key to identifying specific DMP SCS 1 receiver messages The format of the input group description is defined such that it can be set up to identify the specific message types coming from the receiver for a specific device type Due to the numerous device types statuses and possible locations a set of rules must be established for the interface when defining an input group description The rules are basically formatting issues so that the interface can look for matches in the database using input groups in the description field These rules will vary depending on the message type to be monitored Message types that have device and or status variability are as follows Message type abbreviation A T R Message type Alarm Trouble Restore Force Arm Fault System Alarm Trouble Supervisory System Message with Modifier System Alarm Trouble Supervisory 92 unique messages Loop Bypass Loop Reset Loop messages
206. dundant configuration file cas db text univ intr redundant cig univ_intr redundant cfg 1 5 Copyright C 2000 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved univ_intr redundant cfg 1 6 02 17 03 This file contains the configuration information for the Universal Intrusion interface for redundant operations These values are set up at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines RedundantOper Y RedundantHosts primaryl backupl Interface data file backup and restore The Universal Intrusion interface software requires several data files for its operation These files are created during the software installation process and are summarized in Table 24 Universal Intrusion Interface Data Files Backups should be done on a regular basis A good practice is to do it at the same time the Picture Perfect database is backed up The Universal Intrusion software installation procedure automatically updates the Picture Perfect backup configuration list file cas db text backup cfg so that future backups will include the files required for the Universal Intrusion interface Refer to the Picture Perfect documentation for information on how to backup and restore files Table 24 Universal Intrusion Interface Data Files Data file name Description cas db text univ intr cfg TTY port extended configuration definition files is the port name for example ttyl for AIX ttyD001 for Linux cas db text univ intr red
207. dware requirements 331 duci ooo P 335 Message TUER Sa hed CER Fs RS A UGG Geo UR dU PU ee d 354 Extended Configurar occ ses eet hed e RI RIEN EAR 355 Interface data file backup and restore 0 0 cee 357 330 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Introduction The Stentofon 9600 interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Stentofon Intercom System and recognizes only the predefined message types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect The Stentofon 9600 Intercom System communicates with the Picture Perfect host through a serial line connection Messages or alarms recognized by the Stentofon interface are looked up in the Picture Perfect database using the Input Group table Picture Perfect will have to be set up with the appropriate input groups and alarms before they can be recognized Optionally an output group and associated outputs can be tied to an input group This is the standard method for setting up other hardware on a Picture Perfect system The details of setting up the appropriate database records will be covered in more detail in Configuration on page 335 The communication from the Stentofon 9600 Intercom System to the host is unidirectional No handshaking is required for the interface The protocol of the interface is the serial transfer of information one line at a time Redundant systems The Stentofon 9600 Intercom System interface to Picture Perfect su
208. e SCS 1 receiver Please see your SCS 1 operation manual e A brief description that gives more detail about the device This information will be used as the alarm description field for an alarm record The last three check boxes comprise the data format part of the input file With this information the scsgen tool will generate and load the database with the appropriate input group and alarm database records Picture Perfect version The first line ofthe input file must contain the Picture Perfect version that is running The version number is used by the scsgen tool to determine the database input The current versions that are supported by the scsgen tool are e 7 RISC AIX 4 3 3 and higher and Red Hat Linux 7 2 and higher e 2 0 RISC AIX 5L and higher and Red Hat Linux 7 3 and higher 4 0 RISC AIX SL Version 5 2 or Red Hat Linux WS ES or AS 4 0 4 5 RISC AIX 6 1 or Red Hat Linux 5 3 Input file data format The lines of data that follow the Picture Perfect version number should contain rows of delimited text data that describe the message type device type location and alarm description The delimiter character must be the symbol There should be one line of data for each unique combination of message type message account number loop number loop type loop status user number and area number that is going to be monitored Each of the supported message types require variable columns of data and are illustrated in
209. e after installation To configure a Picture Perfect system to support output of CCTV commands to multiple switcher devices in response to a single Picture Perfect alarm event usethe msan set multiple utility A sample execution of this utility is provided below Note You should configure the Picture Perfect software for multiple device support only if CCTV commands are to be routed to more than one switcher device for an alarm event There is a slight performance penalty for this configuration as the switcher device mapping tables must be fully searched to find all matches indicating the routing of a CCTV command for the specific alarm event To change the Picture Perfect CCTV switcher device support option to multiple perform the following steps l Login to the system as root 2 Enterthe command cas bin profile 3 Enterthe command cas bin msan set multiple The following is a sample output from this command Querying the tps daemons table Updating tps daemons entry 54 cas bin msan R A 20030421 175910 statement UPDATE tps daemons SET pathname cas bin msan m modify date 20030423 modify time 195449 WHERE id 54 statement processed OK 1 rows affected WHERE id 54 Statement processed OK 1 rows affected Successfully update tps daemons table entry 54 cas bin msan R A 20030421 175910 71 72 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Interface data file backup and re
210. e interface Note DO NOT change this file unless absolutely necessary If you find it absolutely necessary to change this file you must be knowledgeable about text editors such as vi Before you begin please call GE Security Customer Support for assistance The following is a sample firesine cfg file firesine cfg Copyright C 1994 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved This file generated by the following installation script firesine inst 1 5 05 29 03 This file contains the configuration information for the Firesine FIRE ALARM interface Each interface that is running on a Picture Perfect system must have its own configuration file which contains the information on the specific serial line port the interface is going to read from All information is divided into two sections configuration item label and the desired setting The following values are unique to the Firesine interface do not change unless instructed by GE Interlogix CASI The ResetMsg must be established within an input group description It must contain this exact character string if the interface is going to recognize Firesine System Reset messages If changed it must not contain any spaces and it must be within the description of the input group ResetMsg FIRESINE RESET a The InpGrpPrefix parameter used as a required prefix to the alarm id This makes a unique input group descri
211. e not correct select n and the mapping options display that is you will return to step 1 where you may perform another selection or exit the program If the entries are correct select y If only one AlphaCom node is configured then you will get a message informing you that the Outgoing AlphaCom Alarm Number you specified is mapped to that AlphaCom node number The mapping data you have specified will be added to the alphacom map file You will be returned to step 1 where you may make another mapping option selection If multiple AlphaCom nodes were configured a list will be displayed showing each node number that was configured and the name of the port it is on You will need to enter the node numbers of the 10 35 AlphaCom devices to which the Outgoing AlphaCom Alarm Number you specified is to be sent when the Picture Perfect alarm occurs Enter the Node Numbers The node numbers you specified will be verified against the ones configured and if they are valid you will be asked to confirm the node number selection that you made If the alarm number to node number mappings are correct select y and the mapping data you have specified will be added to the alphacom map file You will be returned to step 1 where you may make another mapping option selection If the mapping data is incorrect select n and you will return to step 9 where you will once again be prompted for the node number mappings 36 Picture Perfect 4 5 In
212. e required Picture Perfect base base package e Picture Perfect Simplex interface simplex package Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required e Picture Perfect base base package e Picture Perfect redundant system pprs package e Picture Perfect Simplex interface simplex package 287 288 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Hardware requirements The hardware requirements for the Picture Perfect stand alone and the Picture Perfect redundant system are listed below Stand alone system If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual e Serial ports AIX One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem Linux One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COM1 or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Simplex communication program is started Figure 103 Overview of a stand alone Picture Perfect and a Firepanel interface Redundant syst
213. e section entitled Using Picture Perfect to configure the Stentofon interface Note Adding outputs and output groups must be done manually using Picture Perfect Using stngen The command line data generator tool stngen can be used to install or uninstall database records that are associated with the Stentofon Intercom System alarm interface It is part of the Stentofon alarm interface package for Picture Perfect and is available when that package has been installed The Stentofon Intercom System is capable of producing a large number of messages for all of the pagers and exchanges that may be installed For Picture Perfect to monitor the numerous message combinations would require a large number of input group and alarm database records to be entered on the system To add to the complexity there may be more than one Stentofon Intercom System interface running on a Picture Perfect system The stngen tool will aid in the maintenance aspect when there are multiple Stentofon Intercom System interfaces installed and running When a Stentofon intercom is added or removed the tool can be used to quickly install or uninstall those database records associated with a particular interface This is possible by carefully segregating the input group and alarm database records for each Stentofon interface running on the Picture Perfect system The install portion of this tool is explained in the section stngen uninstall on page 314 stngen Install
214. e the data records using the modified input file and the same input group prefix that was used to uninstall nfrgen uninstall This portion of nf rgen removes the database records associated with a specific Notifier interface Before running the uninstall program you will need to know the input group prefix Note Itis a good idea to backup the database before using the uninstall portion of the nfrgen tool This can be done through the Control Backup form See your Picture Perfect documentation for more details Input group prefix All input group records that have descriptions that match the input group prefix the first 3 to 4 characters will be removed from the database The alarm records that each input group points to will be removed as well but with one exception If the Alarm record is associated to any other input group records outside of the ones to be removed the n rgen tool will not remove any records and will notify the user of this condition This situation must be corrected by the user before any records can be removed using the nf rgen tool The input group user interface can be used to correct this situation by re assigning the alarm that it 1s linked to so that it is does not conflict with alarms that are going to be removed This is to prevent the accidental removal of alarm records that other input group records are linked Note Any input group using the targeted input group prefix to be un installed that was created manual
215. e to the directory where the input file name is located Type cas bin profile This will ensure you have the correct path environment variable that will give you access to the nfrgen tool and the database tools it uses Type nfrgen The following message appears on the screen Notifier Data Generator 2 0 Would you like to i nstall or u n install data records To use the install option type i The following messages will display You have chosen to install database records Please enter input file name Enter the name of your input file The input file you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it You entered as the input file name panel inp Is this correct y n y To confirm the input file name accept the default y by pressing Eve Enter n to change the name 218 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual 10 11 Ifyou entered n you will be asked to re enter the name If you entered y the following messages will display Enter the input group prefix to be used when creating the records It must be 3 to 4 characters with the last character s numeric For example NFR1 NOTE This prefix must be the same one that is used by the interface that is being targeted Refer to the documentation for more information about input group prefixes Enter the input group prefix secere etia mh eaa ue D Enter the name of your input group prefix
216. e used to monitor messages from the DMP SCS 1 receiver The information displayed in the Alarm Monitor will show the account number status loop and detector module number and a user defined description field of message types known to the interface Messages for an unknown account number but a known message type along with messages of an unknown message type will also be displayed For these messages the Location field Input Group Description on the Alarm Monitor will begin with the Input Group Prefix followed by three asterisks See the section dentifying the input group prefix on page 147 for more information The Alarm Description field will contain as much of the message received from the SCS 1 receiver as possible up to a maximum of 60 characters Further message information should be obtained from the primary monitoring device which is the DMP SCS 1 receiver and its associated printer Communication from the DMP SCS 1 system to the Picture Perfect host is using a serial line connection The communication is bidirectional The interface will receive messages and send ACK NAK and other special case messages back to the SCS 1 system Messages or alarms recognized by the DMP SCS 1 interface are looked up in the Picture Perfect database using the input group table Picture Perfect must be set up with the appropriate input groups and alarms before they can be recognized Optionally an output group and associated outputs can be associated with
217. e when the tool is run The input group records created are unique for each valid line in the input file This is done by combining the input group prefix message status possibilities device type and loop detector or zone number into the description field of an input group record For example use the following line of data and assume an input group prefix of NFR1 A SMOKE PHOTO 103 BLDG 3 ROOM 7 EXHAUST HOOD 25 10 This message would generate four input group records with a facility id of 25 and the following description fields NFR1 ALARM SMOKE PHOTO 103 NFR1 ACK AL SMOKE PHOTO 103 NFR1 CLR AL SMOKE PHOTO 103 215 216 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual NFR1 ACL AL SMOKE PHOTO 103 One alarm record would be generated with a facility id of 25 a priority of 10 and the following description field BLDG 3 ROOM 7 EXHAUST HOOD Each of the four input group records would be linked to this alarm These four input group records allow the interface to monitor the various status conditions for each message as they arrive for that device and loop detector or zone number The nfrgen tool knows the status conditions for each message type and will generate the appropriate input group records There are obviously other important fields to an input group and alarm record that automatically get filled in by the generator For the input group records the following fields are set accordingly D
218. e will be connected to a multiport adapter which must be installed and connected to the RISC System 6000 in order to appear on this list Since your system may have one or more multiport adapters sa2 sa3 sa4 etc select the one you will be using for this communication line 5 Select the parent adapter and press Enter Figure 3 displays next Figure 3 Add a TTY screen Add a TTY c select values in entry fields Enter AFTER ga ZE changes TOP Entry Fields TTY type t r4 nchronous Terminal TIME befor TERMINAL type FLOW CONTROL to OPEN SCIPLINE STTY attributes MORE 14 F1i0 Exit Enter Do 6 Move the cursor to the PORT Number field a Press to display the list of ports The ports are numbered sequentially and should be labeled on the RS 232 connector b Highlight the port to which the interface line will be connected c Press and the port you selected should be displayed in the PORT Number field Chapter 2 13 Installing and removing 7 Verify the parameters have the values you configured on the interface device s port for example e BAUD rate 1200 s PARITY none BITS per character 8 Number of STOP BITS 1 e XON XOFF FLOW CONTROL none Ifthe parameters are not correct move the cursor by using the up and down arrow keys and change the entry by typing over the existing value 8 Move to the field STTY attributes for RUN time a Delete the default entry b Replace
219. each alarm define just one Picture Perfect alarm as shown in Figure 109 This choice is strictly at the discretion of the operator You must define an alarm and input group for every point that is detected by the Simplex system When alarms and resets are received they are transmitted to the Picture Perfect system for processing Each alarm will be routed to the Alarm Monitor and history Alarms are handled as logical alarms so they can be responded to and removed without being physically reset 293 294 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual The Description field of the Alarms screen simply displays to the Picture Perfect system that a Simplex alarm has been triggered and identifies the priority of the alarm Follow these steps to add a Simplex alarm 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Complete the Alarms form Make sure that Alarm Routing is set for at least MONITOR but preferably MONITOR AND HISTORY Online and Inhibit Schedule Changes are set to Yes e Reset Outputs is set to Auto Reset Outputs so the alarm can be removed from the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor without being reset 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another alarm Figure 109 The alarms screen A Alarms Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Alarms Alarm Colors Alarm Events Alarm Messages Alarm Responses i Al xo ab L e Alarm Descriptio
220. ecause you know at what reader the lost badge is being used See Zable 3 for a listing of location types and alarm conditions Detailed information can be found in the Picture Perfect User Manual Table 3 Where input groups are used Location Type Alarm Condition Area Invalid Badge expired or no category match Suspended Badge Lost Badge Unknown Badge Anti Passback Duress Door Forced Open Held Open Pre alarm Reader Valid Badge exit button tamper only Invalid Badge all badge errors except Unknown Input Point Alarm Micro Badge History Overflow Alarm History Overflow Upstream Micro Communications Failure Downstream Micro Communications Failure Reader Communications Failure Host Host to Host Communications Failure Network Database Communications Failure 60 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Using SQL reports During the installation process nine SQL reports are installed e CCTV Areas e CCTV Doors e CCTV Inputs e CCTV Micros CommFailure e CCTV Micros Overflow e CCTV Micros ReaderFailure e CCTV Readers e CCTV Hosts e CCTV Alarms These reports provide you with the information that you will need to know about mapping alarms to a CCTV system To add or delete an alarm from the CCTV system you must know the Alarm Id Input Group Id Location Id and the CCTV alarm number These reports detail the alarm conditions defined wi
221. ecords Follow these steps to modify an alarm description 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab In the Description field of the Alarms screen enter the appropriate search criteria Click Find Edit the desired information ch a iS When completed save the alarm by clicking Save 352 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Adding or modifying output groups and outputs If you would like to trigger an output that is door strikes lights or sirens when Stentofon 9600 messages are received you will need to configure an Output Group and a Output The output group must be linked to the input group for the message to trigger an output for that output group The instructions for setting up outputs and output groups are described in the Picture Perfect User Manual All fields and options in the Outputs forms may not apply since this is a one way communication between the Stentofon 9600 and Picture Perfect Note Configuring output groups and outputs is optional If the stngen9600 tool is used to uninstall database records any outputs and output groups that you defined will be lost Monitoring alarms You are now finished with the basic configuration of the Stentofon 9600 interface The intercom messages that have been recognized through the input groups and linked to an alarm can be monitored through the Picture Perfect Alarm Moni
222. ect and intercom interface 99 Configuration The Commend interface to Picture Perfect acts as a filter by recognizing predefined messages that are received over the serial line The messages used by the Commend interface were derived from the Commend protocol as described in Commend Intercom System Message Structure on page 117 These messages must be configured on the Picture Perfect system There are two methods available to configure these messages 1 Automatically using the cmdgen data generator tool 2 Manually using Picture Perfect If you plan to enter many messages at once we strongly recommend you use the cndgen command line tool Using cmdgen exclusively to create or modify data records will enable you to keep track of the specific messages that are being monitored for a particular panel on a specific port This tool is explained in detail in the following section However if you choose to use Picture Perfect to insert the database records this procedure is explained starting on page 110 with the section entitled Using Picture Perfect to configure the Commend interface Note Adding outputs and output groups must be done manually using the Picture Perfect graphical user interface Using cmdgen The command line data generator tool cmdgen can be used to install or uninstall database records that are associated with the Commend Intercom System alarm interface It is part of the Commend alarm interface package for P
223. ecurity Software Package 64401 for instructions on how to program the Stentofon to forward data to an external system This configuration must be done prior to installation of the Picture Perfect Stentofon Interface Software package e Serial ports AIX One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem Linux One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COM1 or COM2 are available they may also be used 302 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual This configuration is done automatically when the Stentofon communication program is started Cable to connect the Picture Perfect system to the intercom console port Refer to Figure 111 Figure 111 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to intercom system DB25F to Port C Picture Perfect Stentofon TouchLine Host Computer Intercom System DB25F Port C GND 7 Pin 80B GND Rx3 Pin 82B Tx Pin 83B CTS Pin 84B RTS Figure 112 Overview of the Picture Perfect and Intercom interface 530132005 303 Redundant system If you have a Picture Perfect redundant system the following items are required in addition to those listed in
224. ed input group record This description is what appears on the Alarm Monitor when an alarm occurs and should be used as a custom device label that helps describe more information about the device or detector and the event that occurred It can be up to 60 characters in length and either upper or lower case Itis acceptable to use the same alarm description for multiple input field data lines when installing the data generator records Only one alarm record will be generated in this case and the appropriate input group records will point to the same alarm record Note Do not use an alarm description that matches the description field of an already existing alarm record in the Picture Perfect database This is an illegal condition that scsgen checks for before any data is generated Facility The sixth column is used to specify the facility id that will be used for the input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted to select a Default SCS Facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a Facility value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid facility id values create a report using as the SQL statement Select id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file Priority The seventh column is used to specify the priority that will be used for the alar
225. ed for the input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted to select a Default SCS Facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a Facility value is not specified 134 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual in the input file then the Default SCS Facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid facility id values create a report using as the SQL statement Select id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file Priority The seventh column is used to specify the priority that will be used for the alarm record generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted for the Default SCS Priority a number in the range 1 500 If a Priority value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Priority will be used Column Descriptions for p Code Number Deleted P Code Number Added and U Code Number Changed Message Types Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Msg Type Account User Added Alarm Description Facility Priority 1 char 5 digits 3 digits 3 digits 1 to 60 characters 1 to 10 digits 1 to 3 digits p P or U 0 999 0 999 lor 1 500 1 2 147 483 647 Msg Type This column is a one character abbreviation of the message type to be monitored The following list defines the message type abbreviations p Code Number Deleted P Code Number A
226. ed on the Alarm Monitor 349 350 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual The alarm record description field should be used to further identify or describe the Stentofon 9600 input group to which it will be linked Several input group records can be linked to the same alarm for example one alarm per paging station but it would be prudent to set up one alarm record for each input group record The alarm description field has no restrictions other than a maximum length of 30 characters or required format since all of the unique information for the intercom s protocol message is located in the input group description However each alarm description in the database must be unique The recommended format for alarm descriptions is to identify the paging station and the type of action that occurred For the example input group descriptions given previously the corresponding alarm descriptions might be as follows Station 01 Request Station 01 Connect Station 01 Busy Station 01 Disconnect An example of a valid alarm record is shown in Figure 125 on page 351 Alternatively a single alarm could be defined for all three actions as follows Intercom Station 7 The Alarm Routing should be set to the desired routing If you do not want a particular alarm to be routed to the monitor printer or history file then you should select None from the Set Alarm Routing picklist Follow these steps to add an alarm description 1 Selec
227. ee page 214 have been installed the simplest way to begin testing 1s to generate some messages from the Notifier panel by clicking the Signal Silence System Reset System Test or Lamp Test buttons on the panel The Alarm Monitor should receive the appropriate messages if they have been set up correctly If the alarms are not being shown on the Alarm Monitor then the appropriate input group description should be checked to make sure that it follows the format specified for that message type listed under the Adding or modifying input groupssection of this document Make sure the appropriate Input Group Prefix is being used in the description field and that it matches the one established upon installation in the notifier XX cfg configuration file Actual device testing should be performed for those devices that are going to be monitored If the Walk Test messages are being monitored for each device then a Walk Test could be performed to test the devices without actually triggering an actual alarm condition If there is a printer hooked up to the Notifier panel then the resulting messages that are being monitored by the interface can be compared against the printed output in terms of the parts of a message that are used to make up an input group or alarm record description field If there are messages that are not being recognized by the interface that have been set up to do so and they are being printed then call Customer Support for further assistance
228. ee Occ e dod bee e eod 173 EST3configHr l oH in iee se esr ex ER AE RR RA eR 181 Advanced configuration ossis t or sie re I RR RIS 184 168 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Introduction The EST interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the EST panel and recognizes only the predefined message types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect The Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor may be used to monitor messages from the firepanel The EST interface acts as a filter that recognizes predefined alarm conditions coming in over the serial line When an alarm condition has been detected the EST interface picks up a unique panel device id contained in one of the message lines from the serial port This unique panel device id must have been previously set up through the Input Group form in Picture Perfect along with an associated alarm from the Alarm form If there is a match meaning that the panel device id was found along with an alarm an alarm message is sent to be processed by Picture Perfect and displayed on the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor The Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor will display the Input Group Prefix for the specific instance of the EST interface the unique panel device id and a user defined alarm description Further message information should be obtained from the primary monitoring device which is the EST panel Communication from the EST firepanel to the Picture Perfec
229. efix for the Notifier interface is stored in the configuration file for that interface and is read every time it is started With this in mind it is a requirement to know the input group prefix of the interface for which the n rgen tool is going to generate database records To determine this you must look in the appropriate Cas db text notifier XXX cfg file where XXX is the tty name of the port for which the interface is configured Examine the appropriate file and look for a line that starts with InpGrpPrefix The value following this string is the input group prefix being used by the Notifier interface for that port Fixed messages types The nfrgen tool will optionally allow you to install the fixed message types which are messages that do not have a device type associated with them These are messages that are generated by the Notifier panel rather than a specific device type It is recommended that these messages be installed as they provide information about the panel and events that are triggered on the panel Individual message types can later be disabled through the input group user interface if they are deemed unnecessary The following fixed message types will be generated for the description field of the input group records with the input group prefix attached to them in the description field An example follows the fixed message types listed below ALL SYSTEMS NORMAL e TROUBL SYSTEM TROUBLE e ACK TB SYSTEM
230. efore you start e You must have root permission to run the scsgen tool e The database must be running This will be checked by scsgen when the tool is invoked A valid input file must exist that contains the Picture Perfect version and data lines for the message types to be monitored for the described devices e You must know the input group prefix used by the SCS 1 interface that is being targeted for data generation See the section Identifying the Input Group Prefix on page 140 for more information 142 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Follow these steps to use the scsgen tool to install database records 1 Log inas root or su root if already logged in but not as the root user You should see a prompt Change to the directory where the input file is located Type cas bin profile This will ensure you have the correct PATH environment variable that will give you access to the scsgen tool and the database tools it uses Type scsgen Messages similar to the following appear on the screen SCS 1 Data Generator 2 0 Would you like to i nstall or u n install data records i u i To use the install option press ortype i The following messages will display You have chosen to install database records Please enter input file name A Enter the name of your input file The input file you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it You entered as the input file name
231. el 3 tty4 05 Disconnect Station 05 Disconnect An example of the input groups and alarm records that are generated from one line of an input file is shown in the section Input group and alarm records generated by stngen9600 on page 339 Input file recommendations Always keep the input file for future reference on how your system has been set up It will be extremely useful in understanding what database records have been generated It will be required information for Customer Support should you need help in configuring the interface DO NOT re use the original input file that has had data added to it without doing an uninstall first Uninstalls are discussed in later sections If you have new data for the generator and have not uninstalled using stngen9600 then you should uninstall or put it in a separate input file Input file error checking The input file will be checked for error conditions before any data records are generated If an error occurs within the input file the stngen9600 tool will display the error on the screen The type of error the column it occurred in and the line it occurred on in the input file will be given The input file must be error free before any data records are generated Input group prefix The Stentofon 9600 interface uses the input group prefix to search specific input group records for messages that are to be monitored This input group prefix was established at installation time
232. el is under Walk Test mode Messages with the status of UNPROG UNINST and UNTEST are recognized when those types of reports are generated through the panel Messages with the TESTXX status are recognized as they occur and are ignored during a Tested Devices Report See your Notifier Operation manual for information on Walk Tests lt IGP gt STATUS lt DEV TYPE lt LDD gt where IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters e STATUS can be one of the following UNPROG UNINST TESTXX UNTEST e DEV TYPE is one of the device types from the detector monitor module or control module device types listed in Table 13 Device Types on page 236 For unprogrammed devices DETECTOR or MODULE LDDis the loop number and detector module number L equates to the loop number 1 9 0 10 DD equates to the detector module number 1 99 For example to configure a SPRNKLR MNTR detector located at LDD 405 for the four available status types you would create four input groups each with the following descriptions NFR1 UNPROG SPRNKLR MNTR 405 NFR1 UNINST SPRNKLR MNTR 405 NFR1 TESTXX SPRNKLR MNTR 405 NFR1 UNTEST SPRNKLR MNTR 405 The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation Note When monitoring this message type with the TESTXX status you must consult the Notifier panel or printer for the test count whic
233. elay Time 0 Boolean Type Individual Input Group State Enabled Open Condition Ignored Short Condition Ignored Broadcast State Changes No Alarm Should point to the alarm record generated for this input group Parent Input Group BLANK Output Group BLANK Facility Value specified in input file or default value The default values for the alarm records are Online Yes Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Alarm Routing Monitor and History Priority Default value selected when prompted for by nfrgen Facility Default value selected when prompted for by nfrgen 217 Using nfrgen install Before you start You must have root permission to run the nf rgen tool The database must be running nfrgen will check this when the tool is invoked If it is not running it will attempt to start it A valid input file must exist that contains the Picture Perfect version and data lines for the message types to be monitored for the described devices You must know the input group prefix used by the Notifier interface that is being targeted for data generation See the section nput group prefix on page 214 for more information If in a redundant Picture Perfect environment ensure you are on the current primary host or if the system 1s down the host that will be started as primary when the system is brought back up Follow these steps to use the nfrgen tool to install database records 1 2 3 Log in as root Chang
234. em If you have a Picture Perfect redundant system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual e Serial ports AIX One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem Linux One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COM1 or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Simplex communication program is started A standard splitter box e Two pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to the standard splitter ports Refer to Figure 104 289 290 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Figure 104 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M Picture Perfect System Splitter Port DB25F DB25M Cable to connect the splitter master port to the standard splitter ports Refer to Figure 105 D d D E UM Ww k o d D E DM k Figure 105 Cable pinouts splitter to switcher DB25M to DB9M Splitter Master Switcher Port DB25M DB9M Tx 2 2 Rx Rx 3 3 Tx CTS 5 5 RTS SGND 7 7 SGND DCD
235. em has been set up It will be extremely useful in understanding what database records have been generated It will be required information for Customer Support should you need help in configuring the interface Do not use an Alarm Description that matches an existing alarm record This is an illegal condition that nfrgen checks before any data is generated Do not re use the original input file that has had data added to it without doing an uninstall first Un installs are discussed in later sections If you have new data for the generator and have not un installed using nfrgen then you should uninstall or put it in a separate input file Make sure the Alarm Description does not match an existing alarm record This is an illegal condition that nf rgen checks before any data is generated Input file error checking The input file will be checked for error conditions before any data records are generated If an error occurs within the input file the n rgen tool will display the error on the screen The type of error the column it occurred in and the line it occurred on in the input file will be given The input file must be error free before any data records are generated Input group prefix The Notifier interface uses the input group prefix to search specific input group records for messages that are to be monitored This input group prefix was established during installation of the interface for every serial line that was configured The pr
236. ement Select id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file Priority The seventh column is used to specify the priority that will be used for the alarm record generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted for the Default SCS Priority a number in the range 1 500 If a Priority value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Priority will be used 133 Column descriptions for O Disarmed C Armed and L Late to Arm Message Types Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Msg Type Account User Area Alarm Description Facility Priority 1 char 5 digits 3 digits 2 digits 1 to 60 characters 1 to 10 digits 1 to 3 digits Got 0 999 0 99 lor 1 500 1 2 147 483 647 Note Three additional optional fields may be specified identifying a CCTV switcher name see the list of Picture Perfect supported CCTV names in the section Mapping CCTV monitored events on page 61 such as kalatel or allplex a CCTV number the CCTV alarm number that will be sent to the switcher when the SCS alarm is received and the TTY port by which the switcher is connected to the Picture Perfect host When specifying the port only use the tty portion of the name For example if the switcher is connected on dev tty2 only specify tty2 Msg Type This column is a one character abbreviation of the message type to be monitored The following list defines t
237. eo signal has been lost Burle Allplex Currently only model TC8298B is supported This interface supports up to ten Burle Allplex TC8298B controllers on a Picture Perfect host computer Grundig The interface between the Grundig Matrix VAZ300 controller and Picture Perfect provides the capability to automatically control CCTV cameras Javelin The interface between the Javelin Model JO326HI communication arbitrator and Picture Perfect is bi directional and provides the capability to automatically control CCTV cameras as well as monitor camera video or sync loss Kalatel also known as GE analog video The interface between the Kalatel KTD 312 Computer Interface Unit and Picture Perfect provides the capability to automatically control CCTV cameras The full KTD 312 Computer Interface Unit command set is available to the interface providing support for camera position and zoom operations MAXPRO The interface between the MAXPRO RD AT100 MAX1000 controller and Picture Perfect provides the capability to automatically control CCTV cameras 3 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Panasonic Proteus The interface between the Panasonic Proteus Model 500 controller and Picture Perfect provides the capability to automatically control CCTV cameras The Picture Perfect system will communicate with a bridge PC running a Windows program called PFW Proteus For Windows Panasonic 550 The interface between Panasonic 550 WJ SX550A cont
238. erface User Manual Message types All message types that will be recognized by the Stentofon 9600 interface software follow a uniform structure The format will always be a 5 character record preceded by a start of text st x 02hex character and followed by a carriage return CR 0D hex character and line feed LF 0A hex character pair The following is a representation of this line structure lt STX gt TSXXY lt CR gt lt LF gt lt STX gt This is the start of text character T This is the ASCII character transmit from master designator S A specific code defining the type of message line A Call from substation Request B Master selected substation Connected Busy e C Master released substation Disconnect XX This represents a substation number 01 96 Y Used to determine if there was a successful connection IfS A and Y 1 2 or 3 Button Pushed IfS B and Y 1 Connected IfS B and Y 2 Busy lt CR gt lt LF gt This is the carriage return and line feed message line terminator pair The types of message lines as defined by the S field that are accepted and processed by the Stentofon 9600 interface software are described in the following paragraphs Message Type A Request This message type defines an intercom request to connect to the Stentofon 9600 Intercom System master exchange from a local location Message Type B Connect Busy This message type defines a connection of the
239. erfect that is running and this tool can generate different output depending on the version The paging locations pager station ID s to be monitored e For each paging location whether or not an alarm condition should be generated for the various types of communication activities possible as discussed later For each paging location and communication activity whether or not that activity requires CCTV activation and if so the CCTV switcher device name CCTV number and the port to which it is attached There are eleven CCTV switcher products currently supported as listed below The last three bullets comprise the data format part of the input file With this information the stngen tool will generate and load the database with the appropriate input group and alarm database records Table 19 Supported CCTV switcher products Switcher name Manufacturers product designation allegiant Burle Allegiant TC8xOy allplex Burle Allplex TC8928B amdyn American Dynamics grundig Grundig VAZ300 javelin Javelin JO326HI kalatel Kalatel KTD 312 maxpro MAXPRO RD AT100 panasonic Panasonic PFW Model 500 panasonic550 Panasonic WJ SX550A pelco pelcob Pelco CM9750 viper Vicon Viper VPS1330 and VPS1344 307 Picture Perfect version The first line of the input file must contain the Picture Perfect version that is running The version number is used by the stngen tool to determine the database input The
240. erstanding of the input file will result in ease of use and maintenance The following recommendations should help in setting up the input file It is recommended that the same Alarm Description be used across different message types where the device type and LDD combinations are the same This is shown in the example input file in the previous section Note Since the same alarm description is used in the example input file for different message types they are all using the same alarm record As a result only the first occurrence of the alarm priority need be included as the alarm is created only once and only the first priority specified will be used for that alarm record It is recommended that all the possible message types that apply to similar Device Type LDD combination with the same Alarm Description be declared initially so they can be generated when using the installation portion of the tool This is shown in the input file example for the two smoke detectors which each have a separate line entry for the A T and W message types The three lines declared for the same smoke detector will generate 12 input group records that point to one alarm record If particular statuses for a message type need to be disabled or deemed unimportant they can be disabled individually through the Input Group form of Picture Perfect 214 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Always keep the input file around for future reference on how your syst
241. ext scs ttyN cfg cas db text scs signals ttyN cfg or cas db text scs signals cfg cas db text scs redundant cfg where ttyN is the name of the tt y port specified for the interface cas db text scs ttyN cfg This file contains configuration information specific to the copy of the interface that connects to the DMP SCS 1 device attached to the ttyN port Note DO NOT change this file unless absolutely necessary If you find it absolutely necessary to change the file you must be knowledgeable about text editors such as vi Before you begin please call GE Security Customer Support for assistance The following is an example of the contents of the port configuration file for a DMP SCS 1 device attached to the dev tty5 scs tty5 cfg Copyright C 1995 2003 GE Interlogix CASI All Rights Reserved This file generated by the following installation script scs inst 1 5 5 14 02 This file contains the configuration information for the SCS alarm interface Each interface that is running on a Picture Perfect System must have its own configuration file which contains the information on the specific serial line port the interface is going to read from It also contains the unique input group prefix that the interface will use to recognize specific input group database records using this prefix The InpGrpPrefix parameter is a required parameter in the configuration file This parameter is the prefix that must be used in
242. ext time it is restarted and you will exit the script If you entered y a message will be sent to the running interface and the new map changes will be re read and take effect immediately Messages similar to the following will appear then you will exit the script Sending Sending Sending Sending signal USR2 signal USR2 signal USR2 signal USR2 to to to to task alle tty2 task allp tty3 task ktd tty4 task msan Using stngen9600 to generate new paging station data after an initial installation If there are new paging stations to be monitored by the Stentofon 9600 interface after an stngen9600 installation then one of the following methods should be used when using the stngen9600 tool If you are going to be changing paging station data in the input file for existing database records then use Method 2 below Method 1 1 Create a new input file with the new data lines 2 Invoke stngen9600 and use the new input file 345 Method 2 1 Use stngen9600 to uninstall all the data records based upon the input group prefix An uninstall removes all input group records and associated alarm records that have the given input group prefix Note Any input group using the targeted input group prefix to be uninstalled that was created manually through the Picture Perfect Input Group Form will be removed which means it will be permanently lost if its data was not originally part of the input file Output and output
243. ey are as follows PositionDateAlarm The position of the alarm date in the messages received from the remote system PositionTimeAlarm The position of the alarm time in the messages received from the remote system InGrpPrefix The input group prefix for this interface It was selected during installation and should not be changed AlarmTimeIsSystemTime Indicates whether or not we will use the system tim for tagging messages that come in from the remote system or whether the remote system will provide the time of the messag ExternalSysAlarmNumLgth Specifies the length of the alarm number that is set from the remote system PortName The name of the port being used by this interface PortBaud The baud rate of the port being used by this interface CharacterSize The size of a character in messages that flow on the port Parity Indicates whether or not parity checking is done on the port StopBits Number of stop bits used on the port Xon Xon port setting from the remote system Xoff Xoff port setting Icanon Icanon port setting PortReInitializationTime Specifies the time to wait in minutes in which if there are no messages received from the remote system will never be reset The following values are unique to the UNIV INTR interface do not change unless inst
244. f you have a Picture Perfect redundant system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual For the Picture Perfect system e Serial Ports AIX One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem Linux One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COM1 or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Notifier communication program is started For each Notifier interface panel A standard splitter box e Two pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to the standard splitter ports Refer to Figure 66 Figure 68 Cable Pinouts Picture Perfect System to Splitter DB25F to DB25M Picture Perfect System Splitter Port DB25F DB25M 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 7 7 8 8 20 20 Cable to connect the splitter master port to the Notifier port For the Notifier AFP1010 or AM2020 system e Notifier Interface Panel AFP1010 or AM2020 equipped with revision 6 5 or later EPROMs The Notifier Interface uses the printer connections on the appropriate SIB 232 SIB 2048 or SI
245. failover the mode on the redundant host will change to indicate that it is now the primary and the interface software will then conduct communications with the DMP SCS 1 receiver Software requirements The software requirements for the DMP SCS 1 system and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system If you are using a stand alone Picture Perfect system the following items are required e Picture Perfect base base package e Picture Perfect DMP SCS 1 interface scs package Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required e Picture Perfect base base package e Picture Perfect redundant system pprs package e Picture Perfect DMP SCS 1 interface scs package 121 122 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Hardware requirements The hardware requirements for the Picture Perfect stand alone and the Picture Perfect redundant system are listed below Stand alone system If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual DMP SCS 1 receiver provided by the manufacturer e Serial ports AIX One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserve
246. fect application prior to installation If running in a redundant environment Picture Perfect on the redundant backup host must also be stopped prior to package installation If Picture Perfect is not stopped the interface will not start until the next restart of Picture Perfect Follow these steps to install the interface software 1 Log on as ppadmin and open a terminal window 2 Type the following to shut down Picture Perfect cas bin profile rc pperf k Switch users to root by typing the following command Enter your root password and then press Enter Insert the Picture Perfect v4 5 Installation DVD into your server Wait for the DVD ROM LED to stop blinking before proceeding Linux Unmount the DVD by typing the following command umount media pp45 Mount the DVD by typing the following command Linux mount dev dvd media AIX mount v cdrfs r dev cdO0 mnt Change to the root directory by typing ca Ent To display a list of installation options type Linux media Linux INSTALL i AIX mnt AIX INSTALL i You will receive messages similar to those shown below followed by a list of packages Chapter 2 15 Installing and removing Picture Perfect CD ROM Installation 4 5 04 10 09 Copyright C 1989 2009 GE Security Inc The following Interface product s are available Prod Name and Descriptions 0 allegiant Burle Allegiant CCTV Interface T allple
247. ficatighi 2 s epos ga dE GE RE cree a a we ted B ed e ege 8 e MET EE 8 iv Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Chapter 2 Appendix A installing and removing EEN 9 OVetrVIeW sis deb ri ERERRES PRI eens Mane eiu RAN E DES ERU ReREPRCRRERERSFAPCRIRRERC R TR ans 10 Defining d Dort ssec Ru tr s E Pe e ere E EAT AF Exe YF NEVER a ass coe hess 11 ie c ET 11 n crc 11 Installing Picture Perfect base software 13 Installing on a Redundant system cece ccc ccc eee ence enne hh 13 Installing the interface software 14 Configuring hee CN 16 Installing on a Redundant System 2 eee arrr EEEE e e eee 19 Contiguring additional iNteMACeS EE 19 Verifying the installation cece cece eee een eR Hh Hm hr hn 21 dune 22 Redundatntsysteims unonsbetbiobbevrer te ibt pP ebbe ce adr UE CUSRPbpU EAE 23 Configuring an AlphaCom interface sees 25 nsi 26 Redu ndattsystelms uento rb br t ter Rr eter esp P d nb tt doppelt ad 26 Software requirements VS ENNEN ey repr e Y rx Rap err P Fu e rer UE T a ELS VEG 26 tele Ve ee EE 26 REGUMGOM SYSTEM EE 27 Hardware requirements cc cece ccc eee cence eee ehh hh hh hh nnn 27 ees Gelle 27 Redundant Syste Miss isores iiinis eikit ned Eege dara na et EE 28 fe rne EE 31 Defining Input groups EENG 31 af iere SE 31 Using SOL FEDER ee rat ER 32 Mapping CCTV Monitored Events 33 Adding OM alar aoi eee Et bert pen Ab bete cer odo E eR Er p n 34 Del tin
248. follow the format for the appropriate message type Exactly one space must be used between the columns for each of the message types described in the following sections For messages types that have a DEV TYPE column the spacing within the column must be the same as is listed in Table 13 Device Types on page 236 226 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Note Be aware that input groups and associated alarms that are created manually will be removed if the uninstall portion of the nfrgen tool is run since it removes records according to the input group prefix Database records added manually using Picture Perfect should be added to a nfrgen input file so they may later be recreated if necessary in the event nfrgen uninstall option is used Alarm Message Type To recognize Alarm Message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt STATUS gt lt DEV TYPE gt lt LDD gt where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters e STATUS is one ofthe following ALARM ACK AL CLR ALOrACL AL DEV TYPE is one of the device types from the detector or monitor module types listed in Table 13 Device Types on page 236 e LDDis the loop number and detector module number L equates to the loop number 1 9 0 10 DD equates to the detector module number 1 99 For example to configure a SMOKE ION detectorlocated at LDD 905 for the four available status types you
249. following is the contents of the rantcpip cfg file rantcpip cfg 1 8 Copyright C 1992 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved rantcpip cfg 1 8 06 10 03 This file contains the configuration information for the RAN TCP IP service All information is divided into two sections configuration item label and the desired setting True False labels can be answered with either TRUE FALSE YES NO RemoteConnResetReqd is a Yes No Value If set to yes then the loss of remote system connection alarm cannot be removed until the connection is re established RemoteConnColdTO sets the number of seconds after startup that if the remote connection is still not established it will generate the remote system connection lost alarm 0 means wait forever RemoteConnWarmTO sets the number of seconds to wait after a remote connection is lost before an alarm is generated If the remote system reconnects before the specified number of seconds elapses then no alarm is reported ReplyToAlarmTO sets the number of seconds in which the remote host must reply to the alarm message or a non response from 278 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual remote host alarm will be generated Change this value to 0 zero below if the remote host will not be responding PipeName and PipeSiz RANRedundant AlarmLossChk MaxBindRetries AlarmDisposition
250. for a specific device type The panel device id field described in the section Alarms recognized by the EST interface on page 173 must be entered in the description field One unique panel device id per input group record will be required It is the panel device field in combination with the Input Group Prefix discussed in the following section that the EST interface will look up in the input group along with the associated alarm to determine if the alarm should be sent to Picture Perfect This combination id must be the first item entered in the description field Other 175 information may follow the Input Group Prefix and the panel device id part of the description The actual description of the alarm is set up in the Alarm form and tied in to each input group Input group prefix The EST interface uses the concept of an input group prefix to more readily identify the input groups that are defined and to separate the input groups of one instance of the EST interface from another You must use the following combination of the prefix EST and panel device id in the beginning of each input group record description Combine this with the panel device ID of the message s you wish to recognize There should be one space between the prefix and panel device ID The Panel Device ID field is described in the section Alarms recognized by the EST interface on page 173 For example If the Panel Device ID is 0103 and was located in Room 304 of a bui
251. from the OH Receiver and does not send anything back Messages or alarms recognized by the OH Receiver are looked up in the Picture Perfect database using the Input Group table Picture Perfect must be set up with the appropriate input groups and alarms before they can be recognized Optionally an output group and associated outputs can be associated with an input group Note The monitoring function set up using Picture Perfect OH Receivers and NX 8E panels can be used in conjunction with access control using Picture Perfect Micro 5 controllers and Model 940 readers When using this configuration the NX 8E keypad must be installed adjacent to the Model 940 Proximity Card Reader and the OH2000 Receiver must be installed adjacent to the Picture Perfect host in order to be UL compliant Redundant systems The OH Receiver interface to Picture Perfect will support operations in a Redundant Picture Perfect environment where two hosts have connectivity to a single OH Receiver Connectivity is achieved using a splitter between the Picture Perfect system and the OH Receiver This allows the physical connection of the OH Receiver to an RS 232 serial port on each Picture Perfect host computer In a redundant configuration the OH Receiver software executes on both Picture Perfect hosts and both receive alarm notifications from the OH Receiver However only the interface software executing on the primary host processes the alarms Whenever an alarm notif
252. g a Central Station interface This appendix provides information on configuring the Central Station interface which provides a communication mechanism between Picture Perfect and central monitoring systems that allows control of activities for multiple systems and both local and remote sites from a single location In this appendix EE PREMIERE 74 d ocioo e EE 76 Advanced configuration cc cc ccc cece ens 84 74 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Introduction The Central Station interface provides a communication mechanism between Picture Perfect and central monitoring systems that allows control of activities for multiple systems and both local and remote sites from a single location The interface supports the ABM Data Systems Inc and Monitoring Automation Systems MAS Central Station products Once Picture Perfect and Central Station interface systems are set up and configured alarm notifications are routed from Picture Perfect to the Central Station system for handling This allows monitoring and response to activities from the Central Station system The first step is to set up the Picture Perfect system and configure the Central Station system for a new receiver or verify set up if this is an existing system Refer to the Central Station system product documentation for configuration information Next specify to the Central Station interface which alarms are to be routed to the Central Station system After this h
253. g input groups on page 225 the description field could be filled in with information on the Notifier panel With this concept in mind only one alarm record would have to be created to handle those types The input groups for those fixed message type would all be linked to the same alarm record which may have a description like Notifier Panel 1 Bldg 7 The alarm routing should be set up to according to the desired routing If you do not want a particular alarm to be routed to the monitor printer or history file then you should select NONE from the Set Alarm Routing picklist Follow these steps to add an alarm description 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Complete the Alarms form These fields should be set as follows Online Yes e Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs 233 234 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Set the priority alarm routing and instructions as needed Note The routing must be set to one of the possible selections that includes the monitor for an alarm to show up on the Alarm Monitor 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another alarm Figure 73 Sample alarm screen 4 Alarms Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Alarms AlarmColors AlarmEvents AlarmMessages AlarmResponses Description E Q amp xi E x Bi a P We a d Gi Alarm Description Instructions Description
254. g installation you are prompted to choose whether you want the system to automatically assign default records or if you want to manually create them If you choose the default which is automatic the system will create generic input group records to identify the specific message types coming from the panel for a specific device type If you choose to manually create them a specific format must be followed for the description due to the numerous device types statuses and possible locations The specific format allows the interface to look for matches in the database using the input group description field The format is as follows OH R Receiver L Line P Partition Account Event Zone User For example the following input group description defines an event message on Receiver 01 Line 01 for Account 001000 indicating a Panic Alarm by User 000 OH RO1 LO1 P01 001000 PAOOO Receiver 01 Line 01 Partition 01 Account 001000 Panic Alarm User 000 Adding an input group Follow these steps to add an input group 251 Note The Input Group description must follow the format described in Input group records on page 250 If you want the alarm message to be more easily identifiable such as by location a unique alarm record may be defined for each input group and the alarm record description may be modified to include more descriptive data See Alarm records on page 253 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Gro
255. g message will display Enter the input group prefix Enter the input group prefix The input group prefix you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it The input group prefix you entered was CMD07 Is this correct y n y 110 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual To continue press y To stop press n If you chose to continue the records will be deleted and you will see messages similar to the following Making alarm id checks Deleting input group and alarm records The following log files contain the SQL statements and errors logged during the delete process tmp cmd inpgrp del Log tmp cmd alarm del log Successfully deleted entries from switcher device grundig map file Un install completed You have made changes to one or more CCTV mapping files Do you want to inform the system of these changes y n y If this script was called from the removal script then select n to not inform the system now since it s not running When re started the changes will take effect If the Picture Perfect system 1s running select y ifyou want these changes to take effect now or n if you want them to take effect at the next restart If n was selected you will return to the prompt or back to the removal script If y was selected messages similar to the following will appear then you will exit the script Sending signal USR2 to task grundig comm Sending signal USR2 to task msan
256. gix Inc All Rights Reserved cbas redundant cfg 1 4 05 28 03 This file contains the configuration information for the Siebe Environmental Control s Facility Integrator CBAS Interface for redundant operations These values are set up at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines RedundantOper Y RedundantHosts primaryl backupl Interface data file backup and restore The CBAS interface software requires several data files for its operation These files are created during the software installation process and are summarized in Table 16 CBAS interface data files Backups should be done on a regular basis A good practice is to do it at the same time the Picture Perfect database is backed up The CBAS software installation procedure automatically updates the Picture Perfect backup configuration list file cas db text backup cfg so that future backups will include the files required for the CBAS interface Refer to the Picture Perfect documentation for information on how to backup and restore files Table 16 CBAS interface data files Data file name Description cas db text cbas cfg TTY port extended configuration definition files is the port name for example tty1 forAIX ttyD001 for Linux cas db text cbas redundant cfg CBAS redundant configuration file Indicates that this is a redundant configuration Contains the host names 268 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Appe
257. group description is constructed by concatenating a prefix string default FIRESINE a blank space the 1 character command type F A or D and the 3 or 6 digit id A text string is used for the System Reset default FIRESINE RESET instead of the 3 or 6 digit id The cas db text firesine cfg file contains the length of the numeric id in the AlarmIdLen variable The default is 3 The cas db text firesine cfg file also contains the prefix string and the reset message string definitions in the respective InGrpPrefix and ResetMsg variables These may be changed but must match the description in the input group description These strings must contain no blanks If the strings are to be changed it is strongly suggested that they be changed before the first input group records are created because if they are changed afterwards all of the already created records will need to have their description altered Sample input group descriptions would be FIRESINE F123Input group description for a 3 digit id Hy FIRESINE F123456Input group description for a 6 digit id FIRESINE FIRESINE RESETThe reset message input group description Adding or modifying an input group Each Firesine alarm must have an individual input group assigned which includes the command type and a three digit or six digit identifier The description field in the Input Group screen wh
258. group records on page 250 If you want the alarm message to be more easily identifiable such as by location a unique alarm record may be defined for each input group and the alarm record description may be modified to include more descriptive data See Alarm records on page 253 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups Enter the input group description you are looking for as the search criteria Click Find The desired input group should appear Edit the desired information When completed save the input group by clicking Save 253 Alarm records During installation you are prompted to choose whether you want the system to automatically assign default records or if you want to manually create them If you choose the default which is automatic the system will create generic alarm records to identify the specific message types coming from the panel for a specific device type and they will be linked to the corresponding input group records If you choose to manually create them each OH Receiver input group will need to be linked to an alarm record which can be routed to show up on the Alarm Monitor and be recorded by Alarm History The linking is done through the Input Group form after the alarm record has been established Creating alarm records that the input group records are linked to is required for the OH Receiver interface to operate It is the combination of the input group description and alarm description that make
259. h have been configured with an associated PP Alarm Input Group 185 pair are not being annunciated on the Alarm Monitor then diagnostics should be turned on on the PP host and the smx MMDD log file checked to see what is being expected versus the actual reality of what is being transmitted from the EST If it should be 8 and 12 then this configuration file should be updated and the interface re started to enable it to read and use the new values The following values are unique to the EST interface Do not change unless instructed by GE Interlogix CASI StdAlarmLF 4 FireAlarmLF Icanon y The following values are set up based on your installation responses InpGrpPrefix ESTO1 PortName dev tty2 PortBaud 1200 CharacterSize 8 Parity e StopBits 1 Xon n Xoff n 186 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Appendix G Configuring a Firesine interface This appendix provides information on configuring the Firesine interface to Picture Perfect which acts as a secondary monitoring system for the firepanel and recognizes only the predefined messages types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect In this appendix EE 188 Software requirements i ccce co cse v e ee a e A d ea 189 Hardware requirements cesses 189 EEN 193 Advanced configuration 0 0 0 0 nee tenes 199 188 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manu
260. h will be shown in place of the XX Module Activation Message Type To recognize Module Activation message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt STATUS lt DEV TYPE lt LDD gt where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters STATUS can be one of the following ACTIVE or CLEAR DEV TYPE is one of the non Alarm Monitor module or control module device types listed in Device types on page 236 e LDD is the loop number and detector module number L equates to the loop number 1 9 0 10 DD equates to the detector module number 1 99 229 For example to configure a SPEAKER device located at LDD 105 for the two available status types you would create four input groups each with the following descriptions NFR1 ACTIVE SPEAKER 105 NFR1 CLEAR SPEAKER 105 The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation Supervisory Activation Message Type To recognize Supervisory Activation message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt STATUS gt lt DEV TYPE gt lt LDD gt where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters e STATUS can be one of the following ACTIVE or CLR ACT DEV TYPE is one of the non Alarm Monitor module or control module device types listed in Table 13 Device Types o
261. he scsgen tool and the database tools it uses Type scsgen Messages similar to the following appear on the screen SCS 1 Data Generator 1 2 Would you like to i nstall or u n install data records i To use the uninstall option type u The following messages will display You have chosen the UN INSTALL portion of this script You must enter the input group prefix to un install the SCS 1 database records This is the first 3 to 4 characters used in the description field of the input group records Entering this prefix will result in the removal of the input group and associated alarm records from the database If running multiple interfaces make sure you enter the prefix that matches the input group prefix used for that particular interface If properly installed each SCS 1 interface should have a different input group prefix that is used specifically for that interface Do you know the input group prefix and want to continue y n y To continue accept the default y by pressing Ere To stop press n If you choose to continue a message similar to the following will display Enter the input group prefix e l e e tea ie mes ele EE aus ee Enter the input group prefix 149 The input group prefix you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it The input group prefix you entered was SCS1 Is this correct y n y To continue accept the default y by pressing Ene To re enter t
262. he RAN and remote systems are having trouble connecting with one another over the Ethernet network SERVER IPC call name failed errno xx An error has occurred while trying to talk on the network RAN usually recovers by itself with no data being lost TPS does not appear to be running Picture Perfect is not completely running Shut down and restart Picture Perfect If this problem persists call a GE Security Customer Support representative for assistance Unable to establish RANTCPIP services RAN was unable to establish the necessary requirements for operating on the network Possible reasons for this can be a bad or missing etc services or etc hosts files Unable to open configuration file filename errno xx The cas db text rantcpip cfg is either missing or has the wrong permissions If this problem persists re install RAN Unable to store HOSTaa INPUTbb ALARMcc INPUT GROUPdd errno xx This message indicates that an error was encountered while attempting to save an alarm on the hard disk The host input alarm and input group IDs are all displayed Check the file system sizes Unable to store HOSTaa INPUTbb ALARMcc INPUT GROUPdd pipe full This message indicates that RAN tried to save more alarms to the hard disk than it was configured for The alarm causing this message does not send to the remote system but is shown in the log If this is a common problem try increasing the PipeSize variable 284 Pic
263. he message type abbreviations and the possible status information that the message type can produce O Disarmed C Armed L Late to Arm Account Column two is the five digit account number with a range of 00000 99999 User Column three is used to specify the number of the user who was granted access It is a two to four digit string with a range of 00 9999 based upon the SCS 1 programming Area The area number is a two digit string with a range of 00 99 Alarm Description The fifth column is used as the alarm description field for the alarm record that is created for the associated input group record This description is what appears on the Alarm Monitor when an alarm occurs and should be used as a custom device label that helps describe more information about the device or detector and the event that occurred It can be up to 60 characters in length and either upper or lower case It is acceptable to use the same alarm description for multiple input file data lines when installing the data generator records Only one alarm record will be generated in this case and the appropriate input group records will point to the same alarm record Note Do not use an alarm description that matches the description field of an already existing alarm record in the Picture Perfect database This is an illegal condition that scsgen checks for before any data is generated Facility The sixth column is used to specify the facility id that will be us
264. he prefix press n If you chose to continue the records will be deleted and you will see messages similar to the following Making alarm id checks for input group prefix scsl Deleting input group and alarm records The following log files contain the SQL statements and errors logged during the delete process tmp scs inpgrp del Log tmp scs alarm del log Successfully deleted entries from switcher device kalatel map file Successfully deleted entries from switcher device allplex map file Un install completed You have made changes to one or more cctv mapping files Do you want to inform the system of these changes y n y If this script was called from the removal script then select n to not inform the system now since it s not running When re started the changes will take effect If the Picture Perfect system 1s running select y ifyou want these changes to take effect now or n if you want them to take effect at the next restart If n was selected you will return to the prompt or back to the removal script If y was selected messages similar to the following will appear then you will exit the script In a redundant environment messages similar to the following will also appear Bring host backupl up to date with host primaryl Successfully copied primaryl cas db text ktd map to backupl cas db text ktd map Successfully copied primaryl cas db text allp map to backupl cas db text allp map Sen
265. he tool will check this when stngen9600 is invoked If the database is not running the tool will attempt to start it up A valid input file must exist that contains the Picture Perfect version and data lines for the message types to be monitored for the described devices You must know the input group prefix used by the Stentofon 9600 interface that is being targeted for data generation See the section nput group prefix on page 338 for more information Follow these steps to use the stngen9600 tool to install database records 1 2 3 4 5 Log in as a user with system permission Open a new window Type su root to become the root user Change to the directory where the input file is located Type cas bin profile This will ensure you have the correct PATH environment variable that will give you access to the stngen9600 tool and the database tools it uses Type stngen9600 10 11 341 Messages similar to the following will appear on the screen Stentofon 9600 Data Generator 2 0 Would you like to i nstall or u ninstall data records i u i To use the install option type i The following messages will display You have chosen to install database records Please enter input file name Enter the name of your input file The input file you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it You entered as the input file name stn9600 inp Is this correct y n y To confirm the
266. hed at installation System Reset Message To recognize System Reset messages use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt SYSTEM RESET ACTIVATED gt where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters e SYSTEM RESET ACTIVATED isa fixed field For example NFR1 SYSTEM RESET ACTIVATED The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation System Test Message To recognize System Test message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt TEST TYPE gt where IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters e TEST TYPE is one of three fixed fields DETECTOR TEST IN PROGRESS DETECTOR TEST ALL OK DETECTOR TEST FAIL For example to configure for System Test messages for the 3 test types you would configure the following input group descriptions NFR1 DETECTOR TEST IN PROGRESS NFR1 DETECTOR TEST ALL OK NFR1 DETECTOR TEST FAIL The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation Note When monitoring this message type you must consult the Notifier panel or printer for the list of detectors on each lib in the case of DETECTOR TEST ALL OK The Notifier panel or printe
267. his system can exist in a stand alone redundant or enterprise environment Universal Intrusion The Universal Intrusion interface acts as a secondary monitoring system for external devices that send data in a specific configurable format to the interface It is a serial line interface designed to annunciate alarms and their resets that have been entered into the Picture Perfect database to the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor This interface supports operations in a stand alone redundant or enterprise environment Chapter 1 Interface overview Intercom systems supported by Picture Perfect The Picture Perfect intercom interfaces can exist in stand alone redundant two Picture Perfect hosts have connectivity to a single intercom system port by means of a splitter and enterprise environments An instance of an intercom interface has a one to one correspondence between Picture Perfect and the serial line port connecting it to the intercom hardware The interface will generate alarms when user configurable message traffic control messages are received Communication is uni directional unless otherwise indicated using a serial line connection meaning the Picture Perfect interface only receives data from the interface and does not send anything back AlphaCom The interface between the Stentofon AlphaCom Exchange and Picture Perfect provides the capability to automatically generate AlphaCom alarms in response to Picture Perfect alarms for Pic
268. ial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COM1 or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the EST communication program is started e A standard splitter box Two pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to the standard splitter ports Refer to Figure 53 Figure 53 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M Picture Perfect System DB25F D d D E UM Ww Hp Splitter Port DB25M DD d D E DM k 20 Figure 54 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitter DB9M To Redundant Host DB25F To Primary Host DB25F To Firepanel DB25M DB25M Tm Master Porti Port 2 Port DB25F DB25F DB25F Splitter 171 172 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Figure 55 Overview of a redundant Picture Perfect and a Firepanel interface Se G S Dm 530113002B 173 EST configuration The EST interface to Picture Perfect acts as a filter by recognizing predefined messages that are received over the serial line These messages types and formats used by the EST interface are discusse
269. ication is received by the interface software it determines if it is executing on the primary host Alarm notifications received by the interface software executing on the redundant host are not processed In the case of a failover the mode on the redundant host will change to indicate that it is now the primary and the interface software will then conduct communications with the OH Receiver 1 The OH Network Receiver is not part of the UL evaluated configuration Software requirements The software requirements for the OH Receiver interface and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system If you are using a stand alone Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect Base base package e Picture Perfect OH Receiver oh_ receiver package Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required e Picture Perfect Base base package e Picture Perfect Redundant System pprs package e Picture Perfect OH Receiver oh_receiver package 243 244 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Hardware requirements The hardware requirements for the Picture Perfect stand alone and the Picture Perfect redundant system are listed below Stand alone system If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual For the OH Receiver syste
270. ich allows for 60 alphanumeric characters as shown in Figure 63 must be such that it is meaningful and must match the three digit or six digit identifier number as part of its description Follow these steps to add an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups Complete the Input Groups form for each input group Click Save Be p ge Click New to add another input group Figure 63 The input group screen 68 Inputs Outputs Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones L Input Groups Inputs Output Groups Outputs Input Group Events Output Group Events Description 2 o i G i D I w e 7 X g Define Input Group Parent Input Groups Output Groups Description FIRESINE F001 FIRE 1 Facility GLOBAL E el input Group State Open Condition Disabled Ignored Enabled Detected Boolean Type Short Condition O OR An Any Ignored AND All Individual Detected Broadcast State Changes No Yes Alarm Delay Time 0 FSINE DN 101 lt GLOBAL gt x sz Y 2 Results 1records Follow these steps to modify an input group l 2 3 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups In the Description field of the Input Groups form enter F
271. icture Perfect and is available when that package has been installed The Commend intercom system is capable of producing a large number of messages for all of the control panels and doors that may be installed For Picture Perfect to monitor the numerous message combinations would require a large number of input group and alarm database records to be entered on the system To add to the complexity there may be more than one Commend Intercom System interface running on a Picture Perfect system The cmdgen tool will aid in the maintenance aspect when there are multiple Commend Intercom System interfaces installed and running When a Commend interface is added or removed the tool can be used to quickly install or uninstall those database records associated with a particular interface This is possible by carefully segregating the input group and alarm database records for each Commend interface running on the Picture Perfect system The install portion of this tool is explained in the next section See Cmdgen uninstall on page 108 for an explanation of the uninstall portion Cmdgen Install The install portion of the tool generates input group and alarm database records Before running the install program you will need to e Create an input file e Know the input group prefix e Create a list of the Blocks Stations that are going to be monitored This kind of report can be obtained from the Commend Intercom system Jfnecessary create a
272. ields and options in the Outputs forms may not apply since this is a one way communication between the Universal Intrusion panel and Picture Perfect Note Configuring output groups and outputs is optional Monitoring alarms You are now finished with the basic configuration of the Universal Intrusion package The Universal Intrusion messages that have been recognized through the input groups and linked to an alarm can be monitored through the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor For any alarm to be monitored or recorded the appropriate routing must be selected from the alarms form for each alarm The alarm Description and Location columns correspond to the alarm and input group record description fields respectively From this information the operator should be able to tell the panel and location of the reported alarm depending on the descriptive information used in the alarm creation The complete message of the alarm should be read from the Universal Intrusion panel or from a printer hooked up to that panel The operator will be able to respond and remove these alarm conditions from the monitor but no communication will be sent back to the Universal Intrusion panel since this is a one way communication All messages recognized by the Universal Intrusion interface will show a condition and input state As with other Picture Perfect alarms that come into the Alarm Monitor the Count column will increment for those alarms that have come in multiple t
273. ifth column is optional and contains the priority of the alarm record that will be created for the Alarm Description field It is an integer value in the range 1 500 If this field is not present the default alarm priority specified during the running of nfrgen will be used Example input file The following is an example of an input file for a Picture Perfect 4 5 system 4 5 A SMOKE PHOTO 103 BLDG 3 ROOM 7 EXHAUST HOOD 25 10 T SMOKE PHOTO 103 BLDG 3 ROOM 7 EXHAUST HOOD 25 W SMOKE PHOTO 103 BLDG 3 ROOM 7 EXHAUST HOOCD 25 A SMOKE ION 104 BLDG 3 ROOM 8 LABORATORY 25 T SMOKE ION 104 BLDG 3 ROOM 8 LABORATORY W SMOKE ION 104 BLDG 3 ROOM 8 LABORATORY Z FORWARD ZONE ZOO1 BLDG 3 ROOMS 1 8 45 N Ol1 SECURITY STATION LOBBY 1 The first six data lines after the Picture Perfect version line define several alarm and trouble message types to be monitored for some smoke detectors The last two lines describe a zone disable and annunciator message type An example of the input groups and alarm records that are generated from one line of an input file is shown in the section nput group and alarm records generated by nfrgen on page 215 Input file recommendations Setting up the input file requires knowledge of the system that is going to be monitored There are numerous message types that can be monitored for a device Making the monitoring decisions seems complicated but careful use and und
274. ig aralartri et ER dE EN RE Ee ENEE e ER Chanongo arialantriss suco ueas o ovra On ei EROR E DIR eere pae M eed UO ROTE RR ds 38 Printing theTap TIle EE 38 Exiting the Progra EE 40 Advanced configuration eer rrr rer Rede E EE REEL d nre Re pte d dain des EE 41 Single device support acces ices eter ag RE ER hee sad Geared es e ER Ri M rea EARS 44 Mu ltiple device supportissues i222 cessit ceed b Ert re RReecL eee EE ere ODE EPRREY RANT Ta 44 M ultiple deviceupport EE 45 Interface data file backup and restore een nmn 46 Appendix B Appendix C Configuring d CCTV InterfUEB iiusas aaa cha FRE RERAAWRXO RATE DAS EAE 113 9 R4 47 Initrod ctioh ies rb Re cease TN ss EE 48 Redundant Systems isse booa rater Erbe e pLIAqueu Read duos EE 48 Software requirements ais e cece dais aa EELER vegan dele ENEE EE EELSTEN REL PER ID PER Ud 49 Stamd dlone SV LEE 49 REGUNGONUSYStOM lt icanws den code eevee dc 49 Hardware requirements evo cede aes bale De Rx E Ge I pUODREN eaa C EP MP E RUE RR 50 Stand alone System scar ext RR Re nbbeee e re yan ar ee UU UP TERRA MEER ERE YN 50 Redundantsysteri enu niter ERR aee pp e Md Min tete ridet V UU C EUER RR ER 55 Configurdtion err rk e rr rre date Rer ese ewer ee RI FE I ENER SEELEN EE 58 Defining inp t graups 2550 05 see tre ERE REPE TT Ne LER Ie ecedarer dd pp gau end EE KMS 58 Identifying location YPES s e eere me EE tere bero R M ppUbe ci bid deo DINE PNE Ma vo 59 Heim EDD aere we See TE
275. ile unless absolutely necessary If you find it absolutely necessary to change the file you must be knowledgeable about text editors such as vi Before you begin please call GE Security Customer Support for assistance The following is the contents of the extended configuration file cas db text cstation comm tty2 cfg Copyright C 1996 2003 GE Interlogix CASI All Rights Reserved cstation inst 1 0 06 03 03 This file contains the configuration information for the Central Station interface These values are setup at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines RemoteConnAlarm 439 RemoteConnInGrp 348 The following values are setup based on your installation responses PortName dev tty2 PortBaud 1200 CharacterSize 7 Parity o StopBits 2 XonXoff y ReceiverId 01 LineId 01 MaxRetries 3 RetryWait 5 85 Multiple device support issues The original design of the switcher interfaces supported only a single CCTV switcher device and allowed only one CCTV command to be sent to a switcher in response to a Picture Perfect alarm event With the introduction of enhanced switcher interfaces the design has been extended to support multiple CCTV switcher devices connected to a single Picture Perfect host system In addition any Picture Perfect alarm event can cause output of CCTV commands to multiple switcher devices Two utilities are provided to turn the multiple device feature on or off These are
276. ility using the GUI then re run this program and then choose that facility Do you wish to exit this program now y n n Entera y toexitthescriptoran n to enter a facility from the choices that will be provided If you entered y you will exit the program and you may create a facility specifically for the Stentofon interface if you so desire then re run the script If you entered n a list of the currently defined facilities on your system will be displayed and you will need to make a selection If the number of facilities on your system exceeds 18 you will need to press to continue through the list until you get to the prompt When you observe the facility that you desire to use by default with the interface keep track of the number This list will be similar to the following Acquiring facility list from database Please wait 312 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual 13 14 The following facilities are defined on your system and available to be chosen as the default facility DEFAULT FACILITY Building 1 Building 2 Building 3 Building 4 Building 5 BLDG 1 2 3 4 5 AND PARKING BLDG 2 STUDIO BLDG 2 DESIGN AID Security Control Center Head Office Building 1 Garage Building 2 Garage Building 3 Garage Building 4 Garage Building 5 Garage Head Office Garage Penthouse VO OO JO 0143 Ai ES DI p mnbmpbmbpmpemnpbmimnwnuop t Z oco AU bs AHA Oe as Press RETU for more 19
277. ill appear then you will exit the script In a redundant environment messages similar to the following will also appear Bring host backupl up to date with host primaryl Successfully copied primaryl cas db text ktd map to backupl cas db text ktd map Successfully copied primaryl cas db text allp map to backupl cas db text allp map Sending signal USR2 to task ktd tty2 Sending signal USR2 to task allp tty3 Sending signal USR2 to task msan Using scsgen to generate new device data after an initial installation If there are new devices to be monitored by the SCS 1 interface after an scsgen installation then one of the following methods should be used when using the scsgen tool Use these methods when you are adding new devices to be monitored by the interface If you are going to be adding or changing message types in the input file for existing database records then proceed to the Using scsgen to change or add message types for an existing device after an initial installation on page 147 Method 1 1 Create a new input file with the new data lines 2 Invoke scsgen anduse the new input file Method 2 1 Use scsgen to uninstall all the data records based upon the input group prefix An uninstall removes all input group records and associated alarm records that have the given input group prefix except for the entries reserved for dynamic generated alarms Note Any input group and its associated alarm using the in
278. ill result in the removal of the input group and associated alarm records from the database If running multiple interfaces make sure you enter the prefix that matches the input group prefix used for that particular interface If properly installed each Notifier interface should have a different input group prefix that is used specifically for that interface Do you know the input group prefix and want to continue y n y To continue press y To stop press n If you chose to continue the following message will display Enter the input group prefix H Enter the input group prefix The input group prefix you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it 224 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual The input group prefix you entered was NFR1 Is this correct y n y To continue press y Tostop press n If you chose to continue the records will be deleted and you will see messages similar to the following Making alarm id checks Deleting records Complete The following log files contain the SQL statements and errors logged during the delete process tmp nfr inpgrp del log tmp nfr alarm del log Un install completed The un installation is complete You will return to the prompt or back to the removal script Using Picture Perfect to configure the Notifier interface For a successful configuration follow these steps which will be detailed
279. ime the Picture Perfect database is backed up The DMP SCS 1 software installation procedure automatically updates the Picture Perfect base backup configuration list file cas db text backup cfg so that future backups will include the files required for the DMP SCH interface Refer to the Picture Perfect documentation for information on how to backup and restore files Table 11 DMP SCS 1 interface data files Data File Name Description cas db text scs cfg TTY port extended configuration definition files is the port name for example tty1 for AIX ttyD001 for Linux cas db text scs redundant cfg DMP SCS 1 redundant configuration file Indicates that this is a redundant configuration Contains the host names cas db text scs signals cfg Signalsto ignore configuration file for a specific copy of the SCS interface is the port name for example ttyl forAIX ttyD001 for Linux oas db text sces signals cfg Default signals to ignore configuration file Unless overridden by a specific signal configuration file this file will apply to all copies of the SCS interface installed 166 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Appendix D Configuring a Commend interface This appendix provides information on configuring the Commend interface to Picture Perfect which acts as a secondary monitoring system for the intercom system and recognizes only the predefined message types built into the interface and se
280. imes Figure 135 Sample Alarm Monitor screen a ld dd dp dg Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor User Monitor Performance Monitor Alarm Monitor il QE x STI New Alarms 5 Total Alarms 5 Display is now active Highest Priority 20 0 Perimeter A E Perimeter B Zone 1 Alarm UI03 01010111 Perimeter B 01 06 2005 15 38 33 01 06 2005 Perimeter B Zone 2 Alarm UI03 01010112 Perimeter B 01 06 2005 15 38 55 01 06 2005 BLK 23 STA 13 Acknowledge CMDO7 FF23 FF13 12 31 01 06 2005 15 39 50 01 06 2005 DOOR HELD OPEN DOOR HELD OPEN 01 06 2005 15 40 48 01 06 2005 Location Condition D Device Date Device Time Host Date Reset N A 01 06 200 E 01 06 200 The above figure of the Alarm Monitor shows a possible alarm sequence This scenario would be for a system with two Universal Intrusion interfaces that use the input group prefixes UI02 and UI03 and have appropriate input group alarm records to recognize the conditions coming from the panels Below is a line by line explanation 373 The Alarm Description column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate Alarm record that was created The Location column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate input group record Line 1 A Perimeter A Zone 1 alarm condition was reset at device UI02 01010111 Line 2 A Perimeter B Zone 1 alarm condition was completed but not yet reset at device UI0
281. in debugging the problem 238 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Advanced configuration The Notifier interface supports an extended configuration that allows you to alter its behavior This configuration information is kept in the following files cas db text notifier ttyN cfg cas db text notifier redundant cfg where ttyN is the name of the port specified for the interface cas db text notifier ttyN cfg This file contains configuration information specific to the copy of the interface that connects to the Notifier device attached to the ttyN port It consists of a series of text lines each containing a variable name followed by a value or setting The Notifier interface reads the file upon startup to configure the port and the interface Note DO NOT change this file unless absolutely necessary If you find it absolutely necessary to change the file you must be knowledgeable about text editors such as vi Before you begin please call GE Security Customer Support for assistance The following is an example of the contents of the port configuration file for a Notifier device attached to port dev tty5 cas db text notifier tty5 cfg notifier tty5 cfg Copyright C 1995 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved This file generated from the following installation script notifier inst 1 18 06 18 03 This file contains the configuration information for the NOTIFIER Fire alarm interface Each interface
282. in the input file the stngen tool will display the error on the screen The type of error the column it occurred in and the line it occurred on in the input file will be given The input file must be error free before any data records are generated Input group prefix The Stentofon interface uses the input group prefix to search specific input group records for messages that are to be monitored This input group prefix was established during the interface s installation for every serial line that was configured The prefix for the Stentofon interface is stored in the configuration file for that interface and is read every time it is started With this in mind it is a requirement to know the input group prefix of the 309 interface for which the stngen tool is going to generate database records To determine this you must look in the appropriate cas db text stn_ttyN cfg file where ttyN is the tty name of the port for which the interface is configured Examine the appropriate file and look for a line that starts with InpGrpPrefix The value following this string is the input group prefix being used by the Stentofon interface for that port Input group prefix usage when installing When using the install portion of the stngen tool the input group prefix is used as the prefix for the description field for all input group records generated Again it should be stressed that the input group prefix used by the tool must match the Stentofon inte
283. in the sections that follow l 2 3 4 Add or modify input groups for the 13 possible messages Add or modify alarms Add or modify output groups and outputs 1f desired Monitor alarms Note Ifthe Notifier package is installed in a Redundant Picture Perfect environment all operations should be performed on the current primary machine The normal operation of the redundant Picture Perfect system will sweep any database changes made over to the backup machine 225 Adding or modifying input groups The input group record description field is the key to identifying specific Notifier panel messages The format of the input group description is defined such that it can be set up to identify the specific message types coming from the panel for a specific device type Due to the numerous device types statuses and possible locations a set of rules must be established for the interface when defining an input group description The rules are basically formatting issues so that the interface can look for matches in the database using the input group description field These rules will vary depending on the message type to be monitored Message types that have device and or status variability are as follows Alarm Trouble Zone Disable e System Trouble Annunciator Trouble e Walk Test Module Activation e Supervisory Activation Message types that do not have a device type or status are considered fixed messages and will
284. ing Description field Station 01 Request The input group record would be linked to this alarm Since CCTV information has been provided a new entry will be added to the Kalatel interface program mapping table file to enable control of Kalatel camera 6 for this input group specification After CCTV switcher mapping table files are updated signals may be sent to the CCTV switcher interface tasks to force a reload of the mapping files to make CCTV control for the Stentofon active 340 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual There are obviously other important fields to an input group and alarm record that automatically get filled in by the generator For the input group records the following fields are set accordingly Delay Time 0 Boolean Type Individual Input Group State Enabled Open Condition Ignored Short Condition Ignored Broadcast State Changes No Alarm Should point to the alarm record generated for this input group Parent Input Group should all be lt BLANK gt Output Group should all be lt BLANK gt Facility Facility id specified for this inout group alarm pair The default values for the alarm records are Online Yes Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Alarm Routing Monitor and History Priority 50 Facility Facility id specified for this input group alarm pair Using stngen9600 install Before you start e You must have root permission to run the stngen9600 tool The database must be running T
285. ing a splitter between the Picture Perfect system and the intrusion receiver This allows the physical connection of the intrusion receiver to an RS 232 serial port on each Picture Perfect host computer In a redundant configuration the intrusion interface software executes on both Picture Perfect hosts and both receive alarm notifications However only the interface software executing on the primary host communicates with the intrusion receiver Whenever an alarm notification is received by the interface software it determines if it is executing on the primary host Alarm notifications received by the interface software executing on the redundant host are processed but output to the receiver is suppressed In the case of a failover the mode on the redundant host will change to indicate that it is now the primary and the interface software will then conduct communications with the Universal Intrusion receiver Software requirements The software requirements for the Universal Intrusion system and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system If you are using a stand alone Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect base base package e Picture Perfect Universal Intrusion interface univ intr package 361 Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required e Picture Perfect base base package e Picture Perfect redundant system pprs
286. ing entry should be added to the input file so that ALL of the SCS data may be automatically recreated at a later date 2 Change or add the message types in the original input file Records added manually should have been added to the file by the person who created them See note on page 126 3 Invoke scsgen and use the modified input file to re create the data records scsgen removal This portion of scsgen removes the database records associated with a specific DMP SCS 1 interface Before running the uninstall program you will need to know the input group prefix Note Itis a good idea to backup the database before using the uninstall portion of the scsgen tool This can be done through the Control Backup form See your Picture Perfect documentation for more details Identifying the input group prefix All input group records that have descriptions that match the input group prefix the first 3 to 4 characters will be removed from the database except for the entries reserved for dynamically generated alarms The alarm records that each input group points to will be removed as well but with one exception If the alarm record is associated to any other input group records outside of the ones to be removed the scsgen tool will not remove any records and will notify the user of this condition This situation must be corrected by the user before any records can be removed using the scsgen tool The input group user interface can be used to c
287. input file name accept the default y by pressing Ere Enter n to change the name If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the name If you entered y the following messages will display Enter the input group prefix to be used when creating the records It must be 5 to 5 characters with the last character s numeric For example STNO1 NOTE This prefix must be the same one that is used by the interface that is being targeted Refer to the documentation for more information about input group prefixes Enter the input group prefix Enter the name of your input group prefix The input group prefix you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it The input group prefix you entered was STNO1 Is this correct y n y To confirm the input group prefix accept the default y by pressing Enter Enter n to re enter the prefix 342 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual 12 If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the value If you entered y messages similar to the following will be displayed regarding the selection of a default facility for the Stentofon 9600 interface The input group prefix being used is STNO1 kk ck E Default Stentofon Facility assignment portion k k K When the input group and alarm records are created they will require an associated facility You need to select the default facility that will be used when creating the input group
288. input group record The description field has no restrictions or required format since all the unique information for a message type is located in the input group description If there are similar alarm descriptions that apply to unique devices then separate alarm records and input group records should be created for each unique device to be recognized the alarm routing should be set up to according to the desired routing if you do not want a particular alarm to be routed to the monitor printer or history file then you should select none from the set alarm routing picklist Follow these steps to add an alarm description 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Complete the Alarms form These fields should be set as follows Online Yes e Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Set the priority alarm routing facility and instructions as needed Note The routing must be set to one of the possible selections that includes the MONITOR for an alarm to show up on the Alarm Monitor 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another alarm 371 Figure 134 Sample Alarm screen A Alarms Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Alarms AlarmColors AlarmEvents Alarm Messages Alarm Responses Description 19 dd su El X o axy O8 l Alarm Description Instructions i Description
289. input group records created are unique for each valid line in the input file This is done by combining the input group prefix From To Station identification numbers and communication activity information into the description field of an input group record If optional CCTV information is specified a new entry will be created and appended to the mapping table file for the specified CCTV switcher interface program For example let s examine the first line of data in the example input file described earlier and assume an input group prefix of cmd07 FF23 FF13 21 22 BLK 23 STA 13 Request 1 grundig 25510 tty3 This line would generate one input group record with the following value CMD07 FF23 FF13 21 22 One alarm record would be generated with the following description field BLK 23 STA 13 Request The input group record would be linked to this alarm Since CCTV information has been provided a new entry will be added to the grundig interface program mapping table file to enable control of grundig camera 255 in block 10 for this input group specification for the grundig switcher connected to port dev tty3 After CCTV switcher mapping table files are updated signals may be sent to the CCTV switcher interface tasks to force a reload of the mapping files to make CCTV control for the Commend active There are obviously other important fields to an input group and alarm record that automatically get filled in by the generator For the input group reco
290. ion on page 221 Note Ifthe Notifier interface is running in a Redundant Picture Perfect environment nfrgen must be run on the current primary machine only The normal operation of the redundant Picture Perfect system will sweep the database updates made by nfrgen on the primary machine over to the backup machine Method 1 1 Create a new input file with the new data lines 2 Invoke nfrgen and use the new input file Do not install the fixed message types if they have been previously installed The n rgen tool will always ask whether you want to install these message types 3 Once the new inputs have been added you can append them to the original input file for that interface so that there exists a single input file with all the data Method 2 1 Usenfrgen to uninstall all the data records based upon the input group prefix An uninstall removes all input group records and associated alarm records that have the given input group prefix Note Any input group using the targeted input group prefix to be un installed that was created manually through the Picture Perfect Input Group Form will be removed which means it will be permanently lost if its data was not originally part of the input file 2 Addthe new device data to the existing input file 3 Invoke nfrgen and use the modified input file to re create the data records Using nfrgen to change or add message types for an existing device after an initial installation If you
291. ior to running the tool The installation portion of the tool will ask you the name of the input file you want to use The input file will be parsed by the tool and the appropriate input group and alarm records will be created If the input specifies activation of CCTV devices the appropriate definition records will be generated and appended to the mapping file specific to each CCTV switcher interface The CCTV switcher interface tasks can be signalled to access the new information making CCTV control active with the new information The format and rules for the file are discussed in the following sections To create an input file you will need to know e The version of Picture Perfect you are running This is very important because the layout of the database records may be different depending on the version of Picture Perfect that 1s running and this tool can generate different output depending on the version The paging locations pager station ID s to be monitored Foreach paging location whether or not an alarm condition should be generated for the various types of communication activities possible as discussed later For each paging location and communication activity whether or not that activity requires CCTV activation and if so the CCTV switcher device name and CCTV number There are eleven CCTV switcher products currently supported as listed below The last three bullets comprise the data format part of the input file With thi
292. ironment variable that will give you access to the cmdgen tool and the database tools it uses Type cmdgen Messages similar to the following appear on the screen Commend Data Generator 2 0 If the Commend package was configured for operation in a redundant Picture Perfect environment you will also see messages similar to the following Redundant commend interface configuration detected This host primaryl Other host backupl Redundant commend operation is ENABLED The commend interface changes will be reflected on the other host Would you like to i nstall or u ninstall data records To use the install option type u The following messages will display You have chosen the UN INSTALL portion of this script You must enter the input group prefix to un install the Commend database records This is the first 4 to 5 characters used in the description field of the input group records Entering this prefix will result in the removal of the input group and associated alarm records from the database If running multiple interfaces make sure you enter the prefix that matches the input group prefix used for that particular interface If properly installed each Commend interface should have a different input group prefix that is used specifically for that interface Do you know the input group prefix and want to continue y n y To continue press y To stop press n If you chose to continue the followin
293. is unique for each ALARM or DEVICE FAIL alarm that comes in A SYSTEM RESET message is the reset for the matching 367 ALARM message and the DEVICE RESET message is the reset for the matching DEVICE FAIL message The complementary pairs should have the same Event Code as that is what will be used to correlate the reset to the initial alarm Within the Picture Perfect paradigm the ALARM and DEVICE FAIL messages generate Picture Perfect alarms and the SYSTEM RESET and DEVICE RESET messages generate respective alarm resets Using Picture Perfect to configure the Universal Intrusion interface For a successful configuration follow these steps 1 Add or modify input groups 2 Add or modify alarms 3 Add or modify output groups and outputs if desired 4 Monitor alarms Adding or modifying input groups The input group record description field is the key to identifying specific Universal Intrusion panel messages The format of the input group description is defined such that it can be set up to identify the specific message types coming from the panel for a specific panel The Event_ Code field described in the section Alarms recognized by the Universal Intrusion interface on page 366 must be entered in the description field of the input group record A unique Event Code will be required for each specific ALARM t
294. is used as the alarm description field for the alarm record that is created for the associated input group record This description is what appears on the Alarm Monitor when an alarm occurs and should be used as a custom device label that helps describe more information about the device or detector and the event that occurred It can be up to 60 characters in length and either upper or lower case It is acceptable to use the same alarm description for multiple input file data lines when installing the data generator records Only one alarm record will be generated in this case and the appropriate input group records will point to the same alarm record Note Do not use an alarm description that matches the description field of an already existing alarm record in the Picture Perfect database This is an illegal condition that scsgen checks for before any data is generated Facility The sixth column is used to specify the facility id that will be used for the input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted to select a Default SCS Facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a Facility value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid facility id values create a report using as the SQL statement Select id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file P
295. istrator For more information refer to Advanced configuration on page 277 Once the RAN package is installed you need to configure the system Only the following are mandatory 1 Configure the alarm routing criteria For an alarm to be routed to a remote system the alarm routing must include routing to the monitor Use the Configuration Alarms form to set up the alarm routing 2 Entera priority and time delay for alarms sent to a remote system See Configuring alarm routing criteria on page 273 The steps listed below are optional All have default parameters that were setup during installation You can run the RAN system with these defaults or you can change them 3 Change the alarm descriptions that are displayed when connection is lost with the remote system See Remote Connection Lost Alarm on page 274 4 Change the length of time the system waits for a connection between the Picture Perfect and remote systems before reporting a connection lost alarm See How long to wait for a connection on page 279 5 Change the location and the number of alarms that will be buffered while communications are down between Picture Perfect and the remote system See What Happens When the Connection is Lost on page 279 Configuring alarm routing criteria Completion of this section is mandatory You need to set an upper range for alarm priority For any alarms with a priority equal to or higher than the alarm priority set here this would be a nume
296. iver Picture Perfect Server running one or more instances of the oh_receiver interface mE Local or Wide Area Network Ethernet TCP IP NX 8E with an NX 590E network module lt 4 na A f xig 00000000000000 00000000000000 OH2000E NX 8E Ademco Radionix Redundant system If you have a Picture Perfect redundant system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual For the OH Receiver system OH Network system OH Network Receiver s NX 8E panel OH Dial up system e OH2000E Receiver e NX 8E Ademco or Radionix panel Note Any panel that connects to the OH2000E Receiver must transmit using one of the following protocols in order to be recognized by Picture Perfect e SIA e CID e Radionics Modem 6112 e Radionics Modem 8112 e Radionics Modem 7112 e Radionics Modem 9112 e Radionics Modem 7212 For the Picture Perfect system e AIX Linux Figure 82 Figure 83 Figure 84 Serial ports 247 One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi
297. kkkkkkkkkkkk A Add an outgoing AlphaCom controlled alarm D Delete an outgoing AlphaCom controlled alarm Ro X P Print a hardcopy of all AlphaCom controlled alarms X Exit kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Selection d Deleting an outgoing AlphaCom controlled alarm Input Group ID 1 999999 102 Picture Perfect Alarm ID 1 999999 21 Location ID 1 999999 45 Outgoing AlphaCom alarm number 1 9999 15 Are you sure yn y kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk A Add an outgoing AlphaCom controlled alarm D Delete an outgoing AlphaCom controlled alarm 0x 00 0 X P Print a hardcopy of all AlphaCom controlled alarms X Exit Sedi ebd e is de E ed VP pa P Changing an alarm The alphacom map program does not permit editing an entry If you need to change any ofthe information for an alarm follow these steps Delete the existing alarm Refer to Deleting an alarm on page 37 Add anew alarm Refer to Adding an alarm on page 34 Typically only the AlphaCom alarm number might change which requires re entering the information Printing the map file This section describes how to print the a1phacom map file Follow these steps to print the file 1 Atthe Selection prompt type p to print the AlphaCom controlled alarms 2 Enter the printer name 3 Indicate if you want to sort the report
298. lding and this is an alarm for the EST interface with the prefix ESTO1 configured you would enter the Input Group Description as ESTO1 0103 Room 304 The ESTO1 0103 portion is the required part where Room 304 is the descriptive portion The Alarm that Is linked to this input group could be used to further describe the alarm Adding an input group Follow these steps to add an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 Complete the Input Groups form for each input group These fields must be set as follows Delay Time 0 Boolean Type Individual Input Group State Enabled Open Condition Ignored Short Condition Ignored Broadcast State Changes No Alarm Should point to the alarm record generated for this input group 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another input group 176 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Figure 56 Sample input groups screen 48 Define input Group Parent input Groups Output Groups ESTO1 0103 Room 304 input Group State Open Condition Disabled Ignored Enabled Detected Joen Type Short Condition OR A OR Any mored O AND All Individual Detected Broadcast State Changes No O Yes Alarm Put Station Bldg 2 South Wall w el pelen Time i o 1records Modifying an input group
299. le by the Central Station system An alarm event is a collection of information which includes an Input Group ID an Alarm ID and an Input ID These ID values identify specific records in the Picture Perfect database describing the alarm The Central Station system requires an account number designation for all inputs This information must be provided to Picture Perfect so it can correctly identify events for the Central Station system After the Picture Perfect database has been populated you can identify the alarms events to be forwarded to the Central Station system through the use of the cstgen tool described below For a successful configuration follow these steps 1 Create alarms in Picture Perfect for any alarm events that may occur 2 Create a valid account table file to map Picture Perfect Micro ID numbers to Central Station system account numbers 3 Create input files to describe the alarm notification events to be forwarded to the Central Station system 4 Run the cstgen tool to validate the input file and to create a map file for the Picture Perfect Central Station interface that defines the alarm events to be forwarded to the Central Station system Creating Picture Perfect alarms The Picture Perfect software uses a comprehensive set of database tables to define the objects and relationships between them which implement the customer s specific security solution The cstgen tool accesses a subset of this information as defi
300. le changes will be reflected on the other host Updating Picture Perfect backup configuration Removing entry for Kalatel interface from the port database table Removing redundant Kalatel interface installation from the remote system backupl The Kalatel CCTV Interface package has been successfully removed The system needs to be rebooted for the changes to take effect Reboot the system y n y 7 Enter y the default value to reboot the system or press n if you do not want to reboot at this time A CAUTION If the interface package was running in a redundant Picture Perfect environment then you MUST synchronize the database on the backup host with the primary host by performing Database Recovery on the backup host prior to starting redundant Picture Perfect on the backup host Refer to the Picture Perfect 4 5 Redundant Edition User Manual for details 24 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Appendix A Configuring an AlphaCom interface This appendix provides information on configuring the interface between the Stentofon AlphaCom Exchange and Picture Perfect which provides the capability to automatically generate AlphaCom alarms in response to Picture Perfect alarms In this appendix EE EE ed EE EE EE 26 Software requirements 0 ccsssssesee eee 26 Hardware VeauiFeUmenis AEN e cens Pt eb e os Ce taa 27 Conn onran MM 31 Advanced configuration oe oc ce bbe tresa eae a ENN
301. le file must have been created to map Picture Perfect Micro ID numbers to Central Station system account numbers An input file must have been created containing event names and database Record ID s defining the alarms that are to be forwarded to the Central Station Follow these steps to invoke the cstgen tool 1 Loginas root orbecome root byusingthe su root command 2 Change to the directory where the input file is located 3 To establish the proper environment that provides access to the cst gen tool and the Picture Perfect database type cas bin profile 4 Type cstgen A typical execution sequence is as follows cstgen Central Station Data Generator v1 0 Enter name of input file or CR to exit my input Processing summary will be written to file cstgen log Validating input file records completed Extracting Picture Perfect Database Information completed Loading Picture Perfect Database Information completed Processing input file records BdgHistOvfl 1 Error Micro Badge History Overflow input group not defined BdgHistOvfl 2 Good Map entry 0 2 2 99 525021099 cstation comm DoorForced 1 Good Map entry 0 75 20 22 525041022 cstation comm Saving cas db text cstation map as cas db text cstation map old Creating new map file cas db text cstation map Saving cas db text cstation input as cas db text cstation input old Creating new data file cas db text cstation input A new map file
302. lick Find 4 Edit the desired information 5 When completed save the alarm by clicking Save 255 Output group and output records If you would like to trigger an output i e door strikes lights or sirens when OH Receiver messages are received you will need to configure an output group and a output The output group must be linked to the input group for the OH Receiver message to trigger an output for that output group The instructions for setting up outputs and output groups are described in the Picture Perfect manual All fields and options in the Outputs forms may not apply since this is a one way communication between the OH Receiver and Picture Perfect Note Configuring output groups and outputs is optional Monitoring alarms You are now finished with the basic configuration of the OH Receiver package The OH Receiver messages that have been recognized through the input groups and linked to an alarm can be monitored through the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor For any alarm to be monitored or recorded the appropriate routing must be selected from the Alarms form for each alarm The Alarm Description and Location columns correspond to the Alarm and Input Group record description fields respectively From this information the operator should be able to tell the receiver line partition and account of the reported alarm The complete message of the alarm should be read from the OH Receiver or from a printer hooked up to that pa
303. ll be prompted to select a Default SCS Facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a Facility value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid facility id values create a report using as the SOL statement Select id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file Priority The seventh column is used to specify the priority that will be used for the alarm record generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted for the Default SCS Priority a number in the range 1 500 If a Priority value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Priority will be used Column descriptions for S System Alarm Trouble Supervisory Message Types Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Msg Type Account Facility Priority 1 char 5 digits 1 to 10 digits 1 to 3 digits S 1 or 1 500 1 2 147 483 647 Msg Type This column is always S for System Alarm Trouble Supervisory messages Account Column two is the five digit account number with a range of 00000 99999 Facility The sixth column is used to specify the facility id that will be used for the input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted to select a Default SCS Facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a Facility value is not specified in the input
304. ll first Un installs are discussed in later sections If you have new data for the generator and have not un installed using cmdgen then you should uninstall or put it in a separate input file Input file error checking The input file will be checked for error conditions before any data records are generated If an error occurs within the input file the cmdgen tool will display the error on the screen The type of error the column it occurred in and the line it occurred on in the input file will be given The input file must be error free before any data records are generated Input group prefix The Commend interface uses the input group prefix to search specific input group records for messages that are to be monitored This input group prefix was established at installation time of the interface for every serial line that was configured The prefix for the Commend interface is stored in the configuration file for that interface and is read every time it is started With this in mind it is a requirement to know the input group prefix of the interface for which the cmdgen tool is going to generate database records To determine this you must look in the appropriate cas db text cmd ttyN cfg file where ttyN is the tty name of the port for which the interface is configured Examine the appropriate file and look for a line that starts with InpGrpPrefix The value following this string is the input group prefix being used by the Commend interf
305. ll then control the appropriate cameras and monitors No operator intervention is required As an alarm is cleared by the operator from the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor screen the CCTV system will be informed that the alarm has been reset and the appropriate camera will turn off The CCTV interface to Picture Perfect supports the configuration of multiple CCTV devices connecting to the Picture Perfect host Refer to Figure 25 Overview of the Picture Perfect and CCTV interface on page 55 Redundant systems The CCTV interface to Picture Perfect supports operations in a redundant Picture Perfect environment where two hosts have connectivity to a single CCTV switcher Connectivity is achieved by using a splitter between the Picture Perfect system and the CCTV switcher This allows the physical connection of the CCTV switcher to an RS 232 serial port on each Picture Perfect host computer In a redundant configuration the CCTV interface software executes on both Picture Perfect hosts and both receive alarm notifications However only the interface software executing on the primary host communicates with the CCTV switcher Whenever an alarm notification is received by the interface software it determines if it is executing on the primary host Alarm notifications received by the interface software executing on the redundant host are processed but output to the switcher is suppressed In the case of a failover the mode on the redundant host will ch
306. local substation to the Stentofon 9600 Intercom system Note that many type B messages for a station can occur before the connection is established However once the connection is established no further requests will be honored until the intercom station has been disconnected Message TypeC Disconnect This message type defines disconnection of a pager from the Stentofon 9600 Intercom System 355 Extended configuration The Stentofon 9600 interface supports an extended configuration that allows you to alter its behavior This configuration information is kept in the following files cas db text stn9600 ttyN cfg cas db text stentofon9600 redundant cfg where ttyN isthe name of the port specified for the interface cas db text stn9600 ttyN cfg This file contains configuration information specific to the copy of the interface that connects to the Stentofon 9600 device attached to the tt yN port It consists of a series of text lines each containing a variable name followed by a value or setting Lines beginning with a number sign are comments The Stentofon 9600 interface reads the file upon startup to configure the port and the interface Note DO NOT change this file unless absolutely necessary If you find it absolutely necessary to change the file you must be knowledgeable about text editors such as vi Before you begin please call GE Security Customer Support for assistance The following is an example of the content
307. locate any others without modification There must be a single period between the parts of the input group record description and spaces are not allowed anywhere within the description This structure must be followed in defining input group records so that the Commend interface software can look for matches in the database using input group descriptions constructed from protocol messages received from the Commend system For each block station that is to be monitored you should define an input group record for each message type An example of the input group record descriptions to monitor Block FF23 Station FF13 for a Commend interface using input group prefix CMD07 is CMD07 FF23 FF13 21 22 CMD07 FF23 FF13 10 30 CMD07 FF23 FF13 12 31 CMD07 FF23 FF13 0A CMD07 FF23 FF13 1D See Figure 40 Sample input groups screen on page 112 for an input group record containing a valid input group description The procedure for adding or modifying input groups is described below Note that alarm records must be created prior to input group records as you must specify the alarm when defining the input group record A description of the procedure for defining alarm records may be found in Adding or modifying alarms on page 113 Note Be aware that input groups and associated alarms that are created manually will be removed if the uninstall portion of the cmdgen tool is run since it removes records according to the input group prefix For all input groups and as
308. look for matches in the database using input group descriptions constructed from protocol messages received from the Exchange For each paging station that is to be monitored you should define an input group record for each message type An example of the input group record descriptions to monitor paging station FFF7 for a Stentofon interface using input group prefix STNO1 is STNO1L FFF7 Request STNO1 FFF7 Connect STNO1L FFF7 Disconnect See Figure 116 for an input group record containing a valid input group description The procedure for adding or modifying input groups is described below Note that alarm records must be created prior to input group records as you must specify the alarm when defining the input group record A description of the procedure for defining alarm records may be found in Adding or modifying alarms on page 319 Note Input groups and associated alarms that are created manually will be removed if the uninstall portion of the stngen tool is run since it removes records according to the input group prefix Therefore it is recommended that any manually created input_group alarm pairs be added to the stngen input file so they will be recreated if stngen uninstall then stngen install have to be performed 318 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Adding an input group Follow these steps to add an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 Complete the Input Groups form for ea
309. lplex a CCTV number the CCTV alarm number that will be sent to the switcher when the SCS alarm is received and the TTY port by which the switcher is connected to the Picture Perfect host When specifying the port only use the tty portion of the name For example if the switcher is connected on dev tty2 only specify tty2 Msg Type This column is a one character abbreviation of the message type to be monitored The following list defines the message type abbreviations and the possible status information that the message type can produce X Loop Bypass Y Loop Reset Account Column two is the five digit account number with a range of 00000 99999 Loop The loop number is a three digit string with a range of 000 999 User Column three is used to specify the number of the user who was granted access It is a two to four digit string with a range of 00 9999 based upon the SCS 1 programming Alarm Description The fifth column is used as the alarm description field for the alarm record that is created for the associated input group record This description is what appears on the Alarm Monitor when an alarm occurs and should be used as a custom device label that helps describe more information about the device or detector and the event that occurred It can be up to 60 characters in length and either upper or lower case It is acceptable to use the same alarm description for multiple input file data lines when installing the data ge
310. ly since this is a one way communication between the Stentofon Exchange and Picture Perfect Note Configuring output groups and outputs is optional If the stngen tool is used to uninstall database records any outputs and output groups that you defined will be lost Monitoring alarms You are now finished with the basic configuration of the Stentofon interface The Exchange messages that have been recognized through the input groups and linked to an alarm can be monitored through the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor For any alarm to be monitored or recorded the appropriate routing must be selected from the Alarms form for each alarm The Alarm Description and Location columns correspond to the Alarm and Input Group record description fields respectively From this information the operator should be able to tell the paging station and action from the reported alarm The operator will be able to respond and remove these alarm conditions from the monitor but no communication will be sent back to the Stentofon Exchange since this is a one way communication All messages recognized by the Stentofon interface will show a condition of Alarm and an input state of N A As with other Picture Perfect alarms that come into the Alarm Monitor the Count column will increment for those alarms that have come in multiple times To remove Stentofon alarms from the Alarm Monitor use the purge button to remove all alarms or click on the alarm to bring up an individ
311. ly through the Picture Perfect Input Group form will be removed which means it will be permanently lost if its data was not originally part of the input file 223 Using nfrgen uninstall Before you start You must have root permission to run the nf rgen tool The database must be running nfrgen will check this when the tool is invoked and attempt to start the database if it is not running You must know the input group prefix used by the Notifier interface that is being targeted for un installation If in a redundant Picture Perfect environment ensure you are on the current primary host or if the system is down the host that will be started as primary when Picture Perfect is re started Follow these steps to use the nfrgen tool to un install database records 1 2 Log in as root Type cas bin profile This will ensure you have the correct path environment variable that will give you access to the nfrgen tool and the database tools it uses Type nfrgen The following message appears on the screen Notifier Data Generator 2 0 Would you like to i nstall or u n install data records To use the install option type u The following messages will display You have chosen the UN INSTALL portion of this script You must enter the input group prefix to un install the Notifier database records This is the first 3 to 4 characters used in the description field of the input group records Entering this prefix w
312. m OH Network system OH Network Receiver s NX 8E panel Serial Line Cable to connect from the Picture Perfect system to the OH Receiver The figures that follow reflect the various cable configurations You can create the necessary cable configuration by adding a null modem adapter a gender changer and or a DB9 DB25 serial port adapter to a straight DB9F to DB9M cable Figure 75 Picture Perfect AIX System to OH Network Receiver Picture Perfect AIX OH Network System Receiver emm m DB25F Null Modem Cable DB9F Figure 76 Picture Perfect Linux System with a Digi Port Expander to OH Network Receiver Picture Perfect Linux OH Network System Receiver 1 1 GS 9 DB25F Null Modem Cable DB9F Figure 77 Picture Perfect Linux System to OH Network Receiver Picture Perfect Linux OH Network System Receiver RW DB9F Null Modem Cable DB9M e OH Dial up system e OH2000E Receiver e NX 8E Ademco or Radionix panel 245 Note Any panel that connects to the OH2000E Receiver must transmit using one of the following protocols in order to be recognized by Picture Perfect e SIA e CID e Radionics Modem 6112 e Radionics Modem 8112 e Radionics Modem 7112 e Radionics Modem 9112 e Radionics Modem 7212 e Serial Line Cable to connect from the Picture Perfect system to the OH Receiver The figures that follow reflect the various cable configurations You can create the necessary cable c
313. m record generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted for the Default SCS Priority a 138 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual number in the range 1 500 If a Priority value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Priority will be used Column descriptions for v Variable Length Message Message Type Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Msg Type Account Msg Type Msg Text Alarm Desc Facility Priority 1 char 5 digits 2 digits 1 to 16 chars 1 to 60 chars1 to 10 digits LEO 3 digits v 1 to 99 1 or 1 500 digits 1 2 147 483 647 Msg Type Column one is always v for variable length messages Account Column two is the five digit account number with a range of 00000 99999 Msg Type Column three is used to specify the type of custom text There are currently no types defined It is a two character field with a range of 01 99 Msg Text Column four is used to specify up to the first 16 characters of the custom text It is a one to sixteen character field with a range of 0 9 A Z etc Alarm Desc Column five is used as the alarm description field for the alarm record that is created for the associated input group record This description 1s what appears on the Alarm Monitor when an alarm occurs and should be used as a custom device label that helps describe more information about the device or detector and the event that occurred It can be up to 60 characters in length
314. m should re send any message that caused this error If these messages persist there may be a problem with the network RAN backend is already installed The installation has failed and installed two RANs If the problem remains after restarting Picture Perfect remove and then re install the RAN package recv error errno xx An error was encountered while receiving a response to an alarm from the remote system The remote system should re send any message that caused this error If these messages persist there may be a problem with the network select error errno xx 283 An error occurred while attempting to configure the network connection to the remote system Server send error errno xx An error occurred while sending an alarm to the remote system This usually happens when the network connection is lost between the two systems The alarm re sends until it is received by the remote system Server short send error xx of yy sent An error occurred while sending an alarm to the remote system xx bytes out of yy were sent This usually happens when the network connection is lost between the two systems The message re sends until it is received by the remote system SERVER Maximum number of BIND attempts exceeded RAN is having trouble establishing a connection with the remote system If this message displays repeatedly try increasing the MaxBindRetries variable SERVER accept error This message indicates that t
315. marized in Table 22 Stentofon 9600 Interface Data Files Backups should be done on a regular basis A good practice is to do it at the same time the Picture Perfect database is backed up The Stentofon 9600 software installation procedure automatically updates the Picture Perfect backup configuration list file cas db text backup cfg so that future backups will include the files required for the Stentofon 9600 interface Refer to the Picture Perfect documentation for information on how to backup and restore files Table 22 Stentofon 9600 Interface Data Files Data file name Description cas db text TTY port extended configuration definition files is the port name for stn9600 cfg example ttyl forAIX ttyDOO1 for Linux cas db text Stentofon 9600 redundant configuration file Indicates that this is a redundant stentofon9600 redundant c Configuration Contains the host names fg 358 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Appendix O Configuring a Universal Intrusion interface This appendix provides information on configuring the Universal Intrusion interface to Picture Perfect which acts as a secondary monitoring system for an external device In this appendix e EE EE 360 Software requirements 0 0 cee en eens 360 Hardware requirements ois cererii ce GR eed EE AE 361 an cU pos EPIIT 366 Extended configuration ecs AN NEEN sexe tee xe asd e e obs 373 Interface data file backup and restore 060s 37
316. master port to the intrusion system s receiver See figure below 364 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 130 Sample cable pinouts Splitter to intrusion system receiver DB25F to DB25F Splitter Master Intrusion System Port Receiver DB25F DB25F Shield 1 1 Shield Rxd 2 2 Rxd Txd 3 Txd 4 RTS 5 CTS 8 DCD SG 7 7 SG Figure 131 Overview of a cable configuration using a splitter To Intrusion System To Primary Host DB25F DB25F Receiver To Redundant Host DB25F DB25M DB25M DB25M Master Port 1 Port 2 Port DB25F DB25F DB25F Splitter 365 Figure 132 Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and intrusion interface Smoke Detector Console Port Monitor Port 2 Master Port Intrusion Interface SR HER nn RISC 6000 or PC RISC 6000 or PC Primary Host 366 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Configuration The Universal Intrusion interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for an external device It is a general interface for processing alarm and device failure messages that satisfy a defined format and are received over a serial line from an external device Alarms recognized by the Universal Intrusion interface The particular alarms events that are supported by the Universal Intrusion interface are ALARM SYSTEM RESET DEVICE FAIL DEVICE RESET The inc
317. matches the one established upon installation inthe cmd ttyN cfg configuration file Also check the alarm routing field of the corresponding Alarm Record to make sure that the routing includes Monitor If there is a printer hooked up to the Commend system then the resulting messages that are being monitored by the interface can be compared against the printed output in terms of the parts of a message that are used to make up an input group or alarm record description field If there are messages that are not being recognized by the interface that have been set up to do so and they are being printed then call Customer Support for further assistance in debugging the problem 117 Commend Intercom System Message Structure All messages that will be recognized by the Commend interface software follow a uniform structure This structure consists of a message containing 20 bytes The first character of a message is an STX 02 hex character synchronization marker and the last is an ETX 03 hex character The following is a representation of this structure STX RRPPTTXXXXYYYYSSSS ETX Where STX hex 02 hex start of text marker RR ascii the receiver of the message PP ascii the program number for intercom messages TT ascii the sender of the message XXXX ascii the Block number YYYY ascii the Station number ascii the Message Typ SS ascii the Checksum ETX hex 03 hex end of text marker Valid values for the block stati
318. message Picture Perfect needs to receive from the remote system typedef struct ecad receive pkt ECadSendPkt alarm info char remote sys info 256 ECadReceivePkt Error messages The following are the possible error messages that can be posted in the 10g mmdd files in the cas log directory followed by a brief explanation of the possible problem that caused this message The procedure for handling all these messages is the same If the solution listed in the description does not eliminate further reporting of the error you should note the exact text of the error and contact GE Security Customer Support for further assistance Under normal conditions you should not see these messages abnormal break in main loop An internal error has occurred If it persists restart the Picture Perfect system AcceptConnection failed There was an error encountered while trying to establish a connection with the remote system Check the connection to the remote system and the files etc services and etc hosts on Picture Perfect caught signal xx This message indicates that the RAN system has caught an unknown signal and 1s continuing on caught SIGTERM shutting down 281 282 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual This message indicates that the RAN system was asked to terminate client connection lost This is a normal message that confirms that the connection between the RAN and remote systems has been broken The lost
319. mmediate Reset Input No Yes Immediate Dial Required No ves Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs O Manual Reset Outputs al gt Duration Reset Outputs Results 0 records Follow these steps to modify an alarm description Color Sample Background Foreground 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Inthe Description field of the Alarms screen enter the appropriate search criteria 3 Click Find 4 Edit the desired information 5 When completed save the alarm by clicking Save 179 Adding or modifying output groups and outputs If you would like to trigger an output that is door strikes lights or sirens when EST panel messages are received you will need to configure an output group and a output The output group must be linked to the input group for the EST message to trigger an output for that output group The instructions for setting up outputs and output groups are described in the Picture Perfect manual All fields and options in the Outputs forms may not apply since this is a one way communication between the EST panel and Picture Perfect Note Configuring output groups and outputs is optional Monitoring alarms You are now finished with the basic configuration of the EST package The EST messages that have been recognized through the input groups and linked to an alarm
320. more Picture Perfect database Record ID numbers in the following format alarm event name gt lt record id 41 record id 2 gt lt record id n where the delimiter character between fields is the vertical bar pipe No spaces can be present within a data line If there are more Record ID numbers than can easily fit on the data line another data line can be started with the same alarm event name The data lines can be present in any order in the input file When the cstgen tool constructs the protected file cas db text cstation input it automatically sorts and packs the information into the minimum number of data lines required You can obtain the Record ID numbers for each event name by executing the corresponding SQL report as indicated in Table 6 on page 79 Note Thereis a different report for each alarm event type The Record ID numbers are always shown as the first left most column of the SQL report as described below Example input file The following is an example of an input file forthe cstgen tool Note that the comments in parentheses which are provided for explanation are NOT part of the input file Central Station Input File Last Updated 06 18 96 09 00 DoorHeld 1 3 door held open alarm for doors 1 and 3 DoorForced 9 door forced open alarm for door 9 InvBadge 1 2 invalid badge read alarm for readers 1 and 2 ReaderFail 1 2 3 BdgHistOvfl 1 DIPoint 1 2 3 reader failure alarm for readers 1 2 and
321. mpleted save the description by clicking Save 275 Follow these steps to modify the alarm description 1 2 3 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab In the Description field of the Alarms form enter REMOTE as the search criteria Click Find Result At least two alarm entries will be found Locate the REMOTE ALARM SYSTEM CONN LOST alarm in the grid Edit the Alarm Description field Note This alarm description displays in the Alarm Description column on the Alarm Monitor form Therefore you may want to enter a specific alarm description Modify the Alarm Priority to an appropriate level Refer to Figure 101 Alarms forms on page 276 as an example Note Ifthe priority is equal to or higher than the RAN alarm priority this would be a numerical value equal to or lower and was not responded to within the time specified in the Alarm Delay field on the Control Parameters form this alarm is sent to the remote system when communications are restored Modify the Alarm Routing to meet your requirements Refer to Figure 101 as an example Note The alarm must at least be routed to MONITOR Attach any instructions you want to the alarm When completed save the alarm by clicking Save 276 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Figure 101 Alarms forms A Alarms Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Alarms Alarm Colors Alarm Event
322. n OR Any O AND All 9 Individual Ignored Detected Broadcast State Changes No Yes Alarm USER 666 CHANGED TO 555 w Ke P Results 1 records Modifying an input group Follow these steps to modify an input group l 2 3 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups Enter the input group description you are looking for as the search criteria Click Find The desired input group should appear Edit the desired information When completed save the input group by clicking Save 157 158 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Adding or modifying an alarm Each DMP SCS 1 input group will need to be linked to an alarm record which can be routed to show up on the Alarm Monitor and be recorded by Alarm History The linking is done through the Input Group form after the alarm record has been established Creating alarm records that the input group records are linked to is required for the DMP SCS 1 interface to operate It is the combination of the input group description and alarm description that make up the location and alarm columns displayed on the Alarm Monitor The alarm record description field should be used to further identify or describe the DMP SCS 1 input group to which it is going to be linked Several input group records can be linked to the same alarm but it would be prudent to set up one alarm
323. n Instructions Description SIMPLEX ALARM Facility GLOBAL E el el Priority 50 Route Definition alarm Routing sis MONITOR AND HISTORY v Y Online Color Picker No Color Picker Yes Color Sample Inhibit Schedule Changes O No Background Foreground Yes Immediate Reset Input O No Yes Immediate Dial Required No ves Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Manual Reset Outputs Duration Reset Outputs e DES Results 0 records 295 Follow these steps to modify the alarm 1 2 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab In the Description field of the Alarms form enter a search criteria using a key word and the wild card character for example SIMPLEX Click Find The desired alarm or multiple matches will appear Locate the correct alarm on the grid Edit the desired information When completed save the alarm by clicking Save Monitoring alarms The Alarm Monitor screen displays incoming alarms and their priority count and status Alarms display on the Alarm Monitor in order of their priority When an alarm occurs the system beeps and displays a pop up window to notify the operator A System Reset Complete message is generated when all the Simplex alarms have been reset This message will be
324. n choose that facility Do you wish to exit this program now y n n Type n and then press to select the facility The following message displays Acquiring facility list from database Please wait The following facilities are defined on your system and available to be chosen as the default facility 1 GLOBAL Enter the value of the default EST3 facility 1 1 1 Type the number corresponding to the correct facility and then press Enter The following message displays You have selected as the default facility GLOBAL Is this ok y n y Default Facility Chosen IS granada uri we ee ade eae awl ack PGLOBAL Defa ult Facrltty s GO de miri 2 7 d ee RR WU NC das PSL i pec K J tae ees kk SE End of Default EST3 Facility assignment portion EK E k k Enter the default alarm priority It is the priority that will be used 11 12 13 for any alarm that has no priority specified Value may be in the range 1 500 ee ee eee 50 Press to accept the default value The following message displays Selected default alarm priority is s 50 Is this correct y n y Press to accept the value The following message displays Checking input group file data Checking alarm file
325. n generated whether or not it requires a CCTV activation the CCTV switcher device name and CCTV number The last three items comprise the data format part of the input file With this information the cmdgen tool will generate and load the database with the appropriate input group and alarm database records Table 9 Supported CCTV switcher products contains a list of the current nine CCTV switcher products supported Table 9 Supported CCTV switcher products Switcher name Manufacturers product designation allegiant Burle Allegiant TC8x0y allplex Burle Allplex TC8928B amdyn American Dynamics grundig Grundig VAZ300 javelin Javelin JO326HI kalatel Kalatel KTD 312 maxpro MAXPRO RD AT100 MAX1000 panasonic Panasonic Proteus panasonic550 Panasonic 550 WJ SX550A pelco Pelco CM9750 pelcob viper Vicon Viper VPS13xx Picture Perfect version The first line of the input file must contain the Picture Perfect version that is running The version number is used by the cmdgen tool to determine the database input The current versions that are supported by the cmdgen tool are Picture Perfect 1 7 2 0 4 0 and 4 5 AIX and Linux Input file data format The lines of data that follow the version information should contain rows of delimited text data that define the block station identifier the message type the alarm description and optionally a CCTV device or switcher name and the CCTV number
326. n interface software requires several data files for its operation These files are created during the software installation process and are summarized in Table 20 Stentofon Interface Data Files Backups should be done on a regular basis A good practice is to do it at the same time the Picture Perfect database is backed up The Stentofon software installation procedure automatically updates the Picture Perfect backup configuration list flle cas db text backup cfg so that future backups will include the files required for the Stentofon interface Refer to the Picture Perfect documentation for information on how to backup and restore files Table 20 Stentofon Interface Data Files Data File Name Description cas db text stn cfg TTY port extended configuration definition files is the port name for example ttyl for AIX ttyD001 for Linux cas db text stentofon redundant cfg Stentofon redundant configuration file Indicates that this is a redundant configuration Contains the host names Appendix N Configuring a Stentofon 9600 interface This appendix provides information on configuring the Stentofon 9600 interface to Picture Perfect which acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Stentofon Intercom System and recognizes only the predefined message types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect In this appendix PR 157 5 MR 330 Software requirements ANN eie esee eve ela e A NNN ree 331 Har
327. n page 236 e LDD is the loop number and detector module number L equates to the loop number 1 9 0 10 DD equates to the detector module number 1 99 For example a PAGE device located at LDD 105 for the two available status types would create four input groups each with the following descriptions NFR1 ACTIVE PAGE 105 NFR1 CLR ACT PAGE 105 The example above assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation All Systems Normal Message Type To recognize All Systems Normal messages use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt ALL SYSTEMS NORMAL gt where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters ALL SYSTEMS NORMAL isa fixed field For example NFR1 ALL SYSTEMS NORMAL The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation Signal Silence Message Type To recognize Signal Silence messages use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt SIGNAL SILENCE REQUESTED where IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters SIGNAL SILENCE REQUESTED is a fixed field For example NFR1 SIGNAL SILENCE REQUESTED 230 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is establis
328. n the EST alarm condition and what will be seen on the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor Table 12 EST Alarm Mapping Alarm Monitor Fields EST Alarm Type Condition Input State Fire Alarm Alarm Open Supervisory Short Tamper Sht Gnd Supervisory Open Tamper Sht Gnd Restore Fire Alarm Supervisory Short or Open Reset Closed 181 EST3 configuration The EST3 interface to Picture Perfect acts as a filter by recognizing predefined messages that are received over the serial line These messages are configured by running the est3gen application To run the est3gen application l 2 Log in as root Change to the cas bin directory by typing the following command cd cas bin Run the est3gen application by typing est3gen The following message displays EST 3 Data Generator 2 0 Starting the Informix database Done Would you like to i nstall or u n install data records i u i i Press to install data records The following message displays You have chosen to install database records Please enter input file name ee eee eee cas db text est3 in To install the sample database records enter cas db text est3 in and then press Enter The following message displays You entered as the input file name 2 ee eee eee eee cas db text est3 in Is this correct y n y Press to install the sample database records The following message displays
329. n the Picture Perfect system for the CCTV system Refer to your Picture Perfect User Manual for details on monitoring alarms Ifthe optional video loss monitoring alarm reporting capability has been configured the input group and alarm definitions will be added dynamically to the Picture Perfect database as needed by the interface software Advanced configuration CCTV systems support an extended configuration that allows you to alter their behavior This configuration information is kept in the cas db text lt package gt comm lt ttyN gt cfg file where lt package gt is the prefix of the interface package as specified in Mapping CCTV monitored events on page 61 and ttyN is the name of the tty port specified for the interface The extended configuration information for the video loss interface is kept in the cas db text lt package gt video loss ttyM ctg file where package is the prefix of the interface package and tt yM is the name of the tty port specified for the video loss interface These files consist of a series of text lines each containing a variable name followed by a value or setting Note DO NOT change these files unless absolutely necessary If you need to change these files you must be knowledgeable about text editors such as vi Before you begin please call GE Security Customer Support for assistance 69 70 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual The following is a sample extended configuration
330. n your installation responses PortName dev tty5 PortBaud 1200 cas db text simplex redundant cfg The presence of this file indicates that it is a redundant installation The file contains the names of the two redundant hosts and an indication of whether or not the interface is to run redundantly The following is an example of the contents of the Simplex redundant configuration file cas db text simplex redundant cfg simplex redundant cfg 1 4 Copyright C 1995 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved simplex inst 1 5 06 10 03 This file contains the configuration information for the SIMPLEX SYSTEM interface for redundant operations These values are set up at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines RedundantOper Y RedundantHosts primaryl backupl Interface data file backup and restore The Simplex interface software requires several data files for its operation These files are created during the software installation process and are summarized in Table 18 Simplex interface data file Backups should be done on a regular basis A good practice is to do it at the same time the Picture Perfect database is backed up The Simplex software installation procedure automatically updates the Picture Perfect backup configuration list file cas db text backup cfg so that future backups will include the files required for the Simplex interface Refer to the Picture Perfect documentation for inform
331. nce number field seq has the special value 0000 Interface specific message packet format The message packets sent from Picture Perfect to the Central Station system contains an account number event code and device identification in the lt data gt field portion of an SIA formatted packet The format of this field is as follows aaaa PPdata aaaa is the 4 byte ASCII communicator s account number 0000 through 9999 PPdata contains event code and device identification Each Picture Perfect input type corresponds to an SIA event code see Table 8 on page 91 When an alarm event is detected Picture Perfect determines which micro caused the event and uses that information to determine the account number from a site configurable table The message packets sent from the Central Station system to Picture Perfect contains an empty data field The Sequence Number seq field is 0000 for a negative acknowledgment and 0001 through 9999 for a positive acknowledgment Example Messageto Central Station lt LF gt lt CRC gt lt HT gt 00010203 1234 Npil23CJ lt cC gt lt LF gt lt CR gt lt HT gt 000 fe CR 7C B Response from Ts number 03 Central Station K number 02 sequence number 0001 This response indicates positive acknowledgment of message receipt 91 Communications failures Communication with the Central Station system is a two way process The Picture Perfect system sends messages to the Ce
332. ndix K Configuring a Remote Alarm Notification interface This appendix provides information on configuring the RAN package which allows alarms from the Picture Perfect system to be routed to a remote non Picture Perfect system The alarms can then be processed by and responded to from the remote system In this appendix Hoo 0 an She des Goes ben Goa Dae bw be Godel eed A 270 Software requirements 0 0 0 0 ccc cee ehh hh 271 Hardware Overview ck eee ea A RR E RENE 272 mee CT 273 Advanced configuration 0c ccc cect ee 2T Eror mesago oo 2120 1 9 1 ea TREE ER EIS E SERT 281 270 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Introduction When the RAN package is installed alarms from the Picture Perfect system can be routed to a remote non Picture Perfect system The alarms can then be processed by and responded to from the remote system The Picture Perfect and remote systems are connected using an Ethernet network Both systems use the TCP IP protocol to communicate with each other This method of communication guarantees accurate transmission of all data and instant notification of a system that is no longer connected to the network Note RAN only provides the alarm data which can be forwarded to the remote system You are responsible for the software on the remote system which processes the incoming alarms Refer to Advanced configuration on page 277 for the format of the message provided by Picture Perfect and the fo
333. ned in Table 5 Database table objects are identified and related to one another through the use of Record ID numbers Each database table record has a Record ID number unique to that specific table type but not unique to all table types for instance each table type has Record ID numbers starting at 1 See the Picture Perfect User Manual for information on the relationship between the tables and how to enter information using the graphical user interface When populating the Picture Perfect database tables it is important to define the objects in a manner that uniquely identifies the alarm events that may occur This is especially important in cases where objects typically input groups can be shared since Record ID numbers are not unique across table types The cstgen tool analyzes the object definitions and relationships in the Picture Perfect database tables to extract information defining the alarm events that are to be forwarded to the Central Station Unique identifying information is required for each alarm event to be forwarded and excessive sharing can impact on this uniqueness There are some general guidelines that should be followed when defining objects in the database as described below In general sharing of object definitions should be done on a limited basis with directly related objects The following rules should be followed when defining objects in the Picture Perfect database to ensure uniqueness in identifying alarm events
334. need to add additional message types or change the defined data for an existing Device Type LDD ZXXX and Alarm Description you should do the following 1 Usenfrgen to uninstall all the data records based upon the input group prefix An uninstall removes all input group records and associated alarm records that have the given input group prefix Note Any input group using the targeted input group prefix to be un installed that was created manually through the Picture Perfect Input Group Form will be removed which means it will be permanently lost if its data was not originally part of the input file 2 Change or add the message types 3 Invoke nfrgen and use the modified input file to re create the data records 222 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Example If you have an input file that has information for a smoke detector that is going to be monitored for alarm message types and you now want to monitor for trouble and walk test message types 4 5 A SMOKE ION 204 Second Floor Room 10 25 5 You would first use nf rgen and uninstall based upon the input group prefix You would then edit the input file and add two more lines of data to define the trouble and walk test message types The resulting input file would look like the following 4 5 A SMOKE ION 204 Second Floor Room 10 25 5 T SMOKE ION 204 Second Floor Room 10 W SMOKE ION 204 Second Floor Room 10 Now invoke the nfrgen tool to re creat
335. nel The operator will be able to respond and remove these alarm conditions from the monitor but no communication will be sent back to the OH Receiver panel since this is a one way communication All messages recognized by the OH Receiver interface will show a condition of Alarm and an Input State of N A As with other Picture Perfect alarms that come into the Alarm Monitor the Count column will increment for those alarms that have come in multiple times The only way to remove OH Receiver alarms from the Alarm Monitor is to use the remove button to remove all alarms or to respond and remove them individually The time displayed in the Alarm Monitor is the time that Picture Perfect maintains and not the time from the OH Receiver Figure 91 Sample alarm monitor screen dE P Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor User Monitor Performance Monitor i Alarm Monitor New Alarms 8 Total Alarms 8 Highest Priority 50 Host Date 1 06 2005 T Furrer Display is now active Alarm Description Location Condition Device Date Device Time R OH RO2 L01 P01 001000 PA000 1 06 2005 15 22 35 OH Y BA BURGLARY ALARM OH Y BA BURGLARY ALARM OH Y BA BURGLARY ALARM OH Y BA BURGLARY ALARM OH Y PA PANIC ALARM OH Y BA BURGLARY ALARM OH Y BA BURGLARY ALARM OH RO2 L01 P01 001000 BA002 OH RO02 L01 P01 001000 BA003 OH RO2 L01 P01 001000 BA004 OH RO02 L01 P01 001000 BA006 OH RO1 L01 P01 001000 P
336. nerates the associated database records The install portion of this tool is explained in the next section See scsgen removal on page 147 for an explanation of the uninstall portion scsgen Installation The install portion of the tool generates input group and alarm database records Before running the install program you will need to e Create an input file e Know the input group prefix e Create a list of the points that are going to be monitored which includes the account number loop number loop type loop status user number and area number This kind of report can be obtained from the SCS 1 receiver Creating an Input File The input file describes the types of messages and devices to be monitored by the DMP SCS 1 interface It is a text editable file that must be created prior to running the scsgen tool 127 To create an input file you will need to know e The version of Picture Perfect you are running This is very important since the layout of the database records may differ depending on the version of Picture Perfect that 1s running The message type you wish to monitor for a device type The message types that can be monitored are discussed in later sections Foreach device to be monitored the device type and one of the following depending on the message type account number loop number loop type loop status user number and area number A report containing the installed devices can be obtained from th
337. nerator records Only one alarm record will be generated in this case and the appropriate input group records will point to the same alarm record Note Do not use an alarm description that matches the description field of an already existing alarm record in the Picture Perfect database This is an illegal condition that scsgen checks for before any data is generated Facility The sixth column is used to specify the facility id that will be used for the input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted to select a Default SCS Facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a Facility value is not specified 131 in the input file then the Default SCS Facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid facility id values create a report using as the SQL statement Select id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file Priority The seventh column is used to specify the priority that will be used for the alarm record generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted for the Default SCS Priority a number in the range 1 500 If a Priority value 1s not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Priority will be used Column descriptions for z Loop Message Types Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Col 8 Msg Type Account Loop Loop Type Loop Status Alarm Desc Facility
338. nformation on configuring the interface between a CCTV controller and Picture Perfect which provides the capability to automatically control CCTV cameras In this appendix I niu non PR CC 48 Software requirements 0 ccce hh 49 Hardware VeauiFe meniy AEN dhe Ba OA e e o A CN 50 Con onran On A Cd eres Racked GRRE OL eden EEN aden 58 Advanced CON gallon ANEN NEE shaw ad rare ee Sa dk 69 Interface data file backup and restore 0 06 ees 72 48 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Introduction The CCTV control systems operate separately from Picture Perfect and require their own hardware and software which is provided by the CCTV manufacturer The interface between a CCTV controller and Picture Perfect provides the capability to automatically control CCTV cameras For controllers providing video loss monitoring and reporting using the controller printer port an optional video loss interface component of Picture Perfect can be configured to issue alarms using the Alarm Monitor feature whenever a camera video signal has been lost The first step is to configure the Picture Perfect system and the CCTV system or to verify the set up if this is an existing system Next use Picture Perfect to link or map the desired Picture Perfect alarms to the appropriate CCTV cameras When the mapped alarm is received by Picture Perfect a message is sent to the CCTV system to turn on the linked CCTV cameras and monitors The CCTV system wi
339. nications link between Picture Perfect and the Firesine panel is uni directional the Picture Perfect system cannot determine if there is a communications break in the line Therefore no alarm is reported in this situation Prior to defining alarms and input groups on the Picture Perfect system the Firesine system must be already configured Alarm points must have a three digit identifier as part of their description on the Firesine system Firesine message structure The Firesine messages are delimited by STX hex 02 and ETX hex 03 and have the following format lt STX gt A123textStringMessage lt ETX gt or lt STX gt A123456textStringMessage lt ETX gt where Ais one of the following type of commands A Alert pre alarm D Fault F Fire G General Fault R System Reset T Time and Date Z Zonal output control e 123 3 digit ID null for R System Reset or 12345 6 digit ID null for R System Reset e textStringMessage maximum 24 character text string ignored Any other type of command is ignored by the interface An example of an incoming Firesine message stream separated by lines for clarity ype of Alarm message 1 character F 6 digit ID 001101 STX F001101Fire Message string ETX STX TTue Feb 11 15 37 59 EST 2003 ETX TX A001101Alert Message ETX n 194 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Picture perfect input group description The Picture Perfect input
340. nnection between Picture Perfect and the Central Station system conforms to the EIA standards for RS 232 serial communications The communication port must be set up to operate at 1200 baud 7 data bits odd parity Xon Xoff control enabled and 2 stop bits in the SIA mode emulating a Radionics D6500 Security Receiver Radionics D6500 Security Receiver 6500 MPU 07 00 Program Entry Guide 1993 This interface will require one serial port from the Picture Perfect system The serial port can be any serial port on a multi port Asynchronous Adapter EIA 232 The interface requires one receiver port be configured on the Central 88 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Station system The line and received ID information for the receiver port and the communication parameter information above are required for installation of the Central Station interface software Interface design and operation Picture Perfect will communicate with the Central Station system whenever an alarm condition has been detected or reset When the Picture Perfect host receives an incoming alarm condition that matches with predefined alarms in the Picture Perfect database the interface will generate an outgoing message for the Central Station system that consists of an account number event code and Device ID This outgoing message will be generated in SIA format Similarly when Picture Perfect detects an alarm reset condition it will generate another outgoing message in
341. nt to the alarm record generated for this input group Facility Facility the input group resides in 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another input group Figure 72 Sample input groups screen 68 Inputs Outputs Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Lf input Groups Inputs Output Groups Outputs Input Group Events Output Group Events D ipti ER lescription a ol res E x B L ap ete Define Input Group Parent Input Groups Output Groups Description Input Group State Open Condition Disabled 9 Ignored Enabled Detected iF Boolean Type Short Condition O OR Any AND All Ki Individual Ok p ignored Detected Broadcast State Changes Q No Yes Alarm E Delay Time 0 AS Results j 1records Modifying an input group Follow these steps to modify an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 Enter the input group description you are looking for as the search criteria 3 Click Find The desired input group should appear 4 Editthe desired information 5 When completed save the input group by clicking Save Adding or modifying an alarm Each notifier input group will need to be linked to an alarm record which can be routed to show up on the Alarm Monitor and be recor
342. ntral Station and the Central Station receives processes and sends a response back to Picture Perfect Picture Perfect will re transmit a message if it receives a NAK response with a 0000 sequence number The maximum number of retries and the delay time in seconds between re transmissions is configurable at the customer site during software installation Message processing The Picture Perfect host computer will communicate with the Central Station system whenever an alarm is activated or deactivated that is using micros Upon detecting that an alarm has been activated or deactivated Picture Perfect will format a message and send it to the Central Station system Picture Perfect will only send N type new real time messages Based on the SIA standard for event block data code definitions SIA Digital Communication Standard 1993 and discussions concerning the types of events or incidents likely to trigger an alarm in Picture Perfect the following table was derived which lists the SIA supported event codes and their format Table 8 SIA messages event codes corresponding message formats and Picture Perfect alarms Message Event code Data field portion of SIA message PP alarm device type Open and Close Messages Late to Close CJ aaaa NpidddCJ Door held open door Access Messages Access Denied DD aaaa NpidddDD Unknown badge reader OR nvalid badge reader Door Forced DF aaaa NpidddD
343. nts cese c ve rk eee ce erre Y aae ENEE dE SEELEN ERRAT 360 Stand alone Syste EE 360 REAUMGANTSYSTOM x4 sous a a a a ih dma AE idee E E SP ub 361 Hardware requirements vg S hn rec E A Re Er E ER ERR EE ON FE EET EEN 361 eelere EE 361 R dundant syste EEN 363 enini iss erraina AE E E EE EE E EAA EEE A EA 366 Alarms recognized by the Universal Intrusion Interface 366 Using Picture Perfect to configure the Universal Intrusion interface 0 00 c cece e eee eee 367 Extended configuration elle ERI iv bias Rem PII ev P EPHDEURE SERERE TE OR ERRORES One de 373 Jcas db text nlv iotr tN ClO isc Nd NENNEN EN d sa du credis 373 cas db text univ_intr redundant cfg 00 2 esisi snrr urru runur rr r r r EErEE e ene 376 Interface data file backup and restore cece cece eee nee ee nnnm 376 xi xii Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual xiii Preface References to Picture Perfect 4 5 for AIX are subject to availability currently planned for late 2010 This manual provides instructions to install Picture Perfect interfaces the initial setup and configuration for both the interfaces and the Picture Perfect systems and to configure changes to an existing system It also contains information for operating the system once it is installed The material in this manual has been prepared for persons responsible for and familiar with the security needs of the customer facility Read these instructions and
344. o Radionix or any panel that can report alarms in SIA or CID formats It recognizes only the predefined messages types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect It does this by acting as a filter that recognizes predefined alarm conditions coming in over the serial line When an alarm condition has been detected the OH Receiver interface picks up a unique line Partition Account contained within one of the message lines from the serial port This unique line Partition Account combined with the Receiver number must have been previously set up through the input group form from Picture Perfect along with an associated alarm from the alarm form If there is a match meaning that the 1ine Partition Account was found along with the alarm an Alarm message is sent to be processed by Picture Perfect Further message information should be obtained from the primary monitoring device which is the NX 8E Ademco or Radionix panel Communication can be using dial up or ethernet connection Dial up communication is between the OH2000E Receiver and any of the following panels NX 8E Ademco Radionix or any panel the can report alarms in SIA or CID formats Network communication is between the OH Network Receiver and an NX 8E with an NX 590E network module Communication from the OH Receiver to the Picture Perfect host is using a serial line connection The communication is unidirectional meaning the interface only receives data
345. o a single intercom controller Connectivity is achieved using a splitter between the Picture Perfect system and the intercom controller This allows the physical connection of the intercom system to an RS 232 serial port on each Picture Perfect host computer In a redundant configuration the Commend interface software executes on both Picture Perfect hosts and both receive alarm notifications from the intercom controller However only the interface software executing on the primary host processes the alarms Whenever an alarm notification is received by the interface software it determines if it is executing on the primary host Alarm notifications received by the interface software executing on the redundant host are not processed In the case of a failover the mode on the redundant host will change to indicate that it is now the primary and the interface software will then conduct communications with the intercom controller 95 Software requirements The software requirements for the Commend Intercom system interface and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system If you are using a stand alone Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect Base base package e Picture Perfect Commend interface commend package Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required e Picture Perfect Base base package e Picture Perfect Redundant S
346. o enter an alarm description The alarm description is useful when identifying a mapping entry on a report Enter y to add an alarm description or n to omit the description If you select y you are prompted for the alarm description The Picture Perfect alarm description may be used although any description that enables the user to identify which alarm it is may be used The description must fit on one line The entry should be as concise as possible because when the report is printed the entries that are larger than the width of the paper will be wrapped to the next line and the report may not be readable If you select n the information you have entered displays and you will be asked to confirm the entries Skip to step 9 Enter the alarm description The information you have entered including the alarm description displays and you will be asked to confirm the entries If the entries are correct select y and the mapping options display Select another option Refer to the section Exiting the program on page 68 for more information about making changes and exiting the program If you select n the mapping options display If the information entered is not correct add the alarm again If the information entered is invalid delete the alarm Refer to the section Exiting the program on page 68 for more information about making changes and exiting the program Refer to Figure 29 Example of adding a Kalatel CCTV alarm on page 63 Figure
347. o the CCTV switcher console port Refer to Figure 15 on page 51 through Figure 24 on page 54 as appropriate for your CCTV interface The Splitter Master Port pinout will correspond to the Picture Perfect System pinouts in the diagrams Video loss monitoring and reporting If you are using a controller that provides video loss monitoring and alarm reporting you will also need the items listed below e A second RS 232 C serial port for each host A second splitter box Another pair of pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to splitter box wired as described in Figure 27 A second cable to connect the splitter master port to the CCTV switcher printer port as shown in Figure 27 Figure 27 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitter DB9M To CCTV DB25M To Primary Host DB25F To Redundant Host DB25F DB25M DB25M Master Port 1 Port 2 Port DB25F DB25F DB25F Splitter Figure 28 Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and CCTV interface 57 58 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Configuration The Picture Perfect interface to a CCTV control system allows alarms that are detected by the Picture Perfect system to trigger CCTV cameras to turn on or off Before this can happen Picture Perfect must be informed of which alarms should be sent to the CCTV system and ho
348. o the mapping table file for the specified CCTV switcher interface program For example let s examine the second line of data in the example input file described earlier and assume an input group prefix of STNO1 F110 Request Station F110 Request 1 kalatel 1 tty3 This line would generate one input group record with the following description field STN01 F110 Request One alarm record would be generated with the following description field Station F110 Request The input group record would be linked to this alarm Since CCTV information has been provided a new entry will be added to the Kalatel interface program mapping table file to enable control of Kalatel camera 1 for this input group specification After CCTV switcher mapping table files are updated signals may be sent to the CCTV switcher interface tasks to force a reload of the mapping files to make CCTV control for the Stentofon active There are obviously other important fields to an input group and alarm record that automatically get filled in by the generator For the input group records the following fields are set accordingly 310 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Using stngen install Before you start e You must have root permission to run the stngen tool The database must be running The tool will check this when stngen is invoked and if not attempt to start it A valid input file must exist that contains the Picture Perfect version and d
349. of the interface for every serial line that was configured The prefix for the Stentofon 9600 interface is stored in the configuration file for 339 that interface and is read every time it is started With this in mind it is a requirement to know the input group prefix of the interface for which the stngen9600 tool is going to generate database records To determine this you must look in the appropriate cas db text stn_ttyN cfg file where ttyN is the tty name of the port for which the interface is configured Examine the appropriate file and look for a line that starts with InpGrpPrefix The value following this string is the input group prefix being used by the Stentofon 9600 interface for that port Input group prefix usage when installing When using the install portion of the stngen9600 tool the input group prefix is used as the prefix for the description field for all input group records generated Again it should be stressed that the input group prefix used by the tool must match the Stentofon 9600 interface that is being targeted Input group prefix when uninstalling The input group prefix is used when using the uninstall portion of the stngen9600 tool All input group records that have descriptions that match the input group prefix the first five characters will be removed from the database The Alarm records that each input group points to will be removed with one exception If the Alarm record is linked to any other input gro
350. ogram does not allow you to edit an alarm To make changes to an alarm you must first delete the alarm and then add a new alarm If the CCTV interface has been configured for a redundant Picture Perfect environment then the changes made to the map file are reflected on the redundant host Refer to the following sections for more information e e e Adding an alarm on page 62 Deleting an alarm on page 64 Changing an alarm on page 65 Printing the map file on page 66 Exiting the program on page 68 To run the package prefix cctv map program you need to be at the command prompt of a terminal window or on the system console To open a terminal window and start the program 1 Left click on a blank portion of the screen The Clients menu displays Select New Window A dtterm window will appear with the title dtterm If you are not logged in as the root user you will need to type su root to become the root user You can now start the package prefix cctv map program To run the package prefix cctv map program type package prefix cctv map 61 62 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Adding an alarm This section describes how to add a new CCTV controlled alarm The Kalatel ktd_cctv_map is used as an example Refer to Figure 29 Example of adding a Kalatel CCTV alarm on page 63 to see the messages and prompts that display when adding an alarm Follow these steps to add a CCTV alarm 1
351. ok y n y Entera y toconfirm oran n to re enter the default facility If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the value If you entered a y the facility you selected and its id will be displayed and the script will proceed to check the input data If there are errors with the input data they will be displayed and you will need to correct those errors then re run the cmdgen script again to process the corrected input file 107 If no errors are found the input group and alarm records will be entered into the Picture Perfect database You will see messages similar to the following Default Facility chosen is Commend Facility id 35 uL DM c r MEL E WT CP egw le End of Default Commend Facility assignment portion kk kk Checking input group file data Checking alarm file data Installing Records DBLOAD Load Utility INFORMIX SQL Version 9 30 UC4 Copyright C Informix Software Inc m 1984 1997 Software Serial Number AAD J328673 Table input group had 11 row s loaded into it Table alarm had 11 row s loaded into it statement UPDATE STATISTICS FOR TABLE input group Statement processed OK Statement UPDATE STATISTICS FOR TABLE alarm statement processedigd CMD07 FF10 FF11 12 31 cctvName grundig cctv 00101 grundig 1240 261 1240 00101 grundig tty3 Creating CCTV device grundig map addition file tmp cmd grundig deltaigd CMD07 FF23 FF13 12 31 cctvName grundig cctv 00202 g
352. oming message which is a maximum length of 256 characters is composed of fields that start in specific configurable columns and MUST be of the form Event Type Event DateEvent Time PrefixEvent Code DescriptionEOM Where Table 23 Incoming message columns Field name Start postition default pos Length Type or description Event_Type 1 21 char ALARI SYSTEM RESET DEVICE FAIL DEVICE RESET Event_Date 23 this position is 8 YYYYMMDD Date Event Occurred configurable Event_Time 31 this position is 6 HHMMSS Time Event Occurred configurable 24 hr lt 37 1 lt char The less than character Prefix 38 3 4 A Z 0 9 Prefix e g UIO1 UIO2 Must start with a letter and end with a number This is used to differentiate messages to different instances of the interface Event Code After Prefix Configurable 0 9 The alarm number sent in by the external Default 7 device and used to identify this alarm in the input_group description gt 37 1 gt char The greater than character Description After Event_Code 0 50 String Alarm Description Not used by the interface but may be used for debugging EOM EndOfMsg 1 Ox0A Hex newline char The Event Code is the part of the message that is used to uniquely identify the alarm that comes in Essentially itis the alarm id as defined by the external Universal Intrusion panel and
353. on For the latest product information contact your local supplier or visit us online atwww gesecurity com Contents Chapter 1 Prefdce i olus Do eege enee ci imos tee bb lee xiii Conventions Used in this document ia deor seo Roo a ERE etc E REP p d nda du pb adis xiii Safety ne Enter EE xiii Interface ET 1 ripis H 2 CCTV control systems supported by Picture Perfect een 3 American Riet e 3 SI Te Uer EE 3 RUNS AM LS a iia 3 SEI Ee 3 Be UI NEE 3 Kalatel also known as GE analog video 3 Ei eer deiade debite ee e dee A 3 Panasonic ProteUS nissiciin ERERR TMT 4 Panasonic EE 4 PICO a a ee AE EE EE ee ege A leet A Firepanel systems supported by Picture Perfect ccc cece cece e cece e eee ee nnn 5 EES BEE 5 duce EET 5 Noii EP L m PL 5 Sanolicc Em 5 Intrusion detection systems supported by Picture Perfect 0 ccc cece cece cece e eee eect eeaes 6 EREM e oon EE Ad 6 Universal lAtruSiO asuntos niece leet REENEN NEE Ee 6 Intercom systems supported by Picture Perfect cece cece cece cece e eee enhn 7 AIPNGG ON EE 7 E Olne REENEN 7 Stentofon Stentofon MCH 2 0 0 0 ccc ccc eee cee EEEE EEEE EEEE e eh he lees 7 Stentotori TT EE 7 Miscellaneous systems supported by Picture Perfect 0 cece cece ccc e ence e nee e eect nee 8 Central SUGOM Merc 8 ele EE 8 Remote Alarm Noti
354. on number are FFF1 to 9999 The types of message lines as defined by the field that are accepted and processed by the Commend interface software are described below Table 10 Description of Message Lines Message type Description 21 Request 22 Request 10 Clear 30 Clear 12 Acknowledge 31 Acknowledge OA Release 1D Duress The checksum lt SS gt is computed by subtracting all data bytes plus the ETX from hex FF The checksum algorithm that is used by the Commend interface software is described below checksum SS hex FF RR PP TT XX XX YY YY Where FF hex FF RR hex the receiver of the message PP hex the program number for intercom messages TT hex the sender of the message XXXX hex the Block number YYYY hex the Station number hex the Message Type Note All ASCII bytes are converted to hex nibbles before the subtraction 118 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Appendix F Configuring an EST interface This appendix provides information on configuring the EST interface to Picture Perfect which acts as a secondary monitoring system for the EST panel and recognizes only the predefined message types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect In this appendix 077 5 no Se esas ca es eae hha ee a 168 Software requirements eskaria ee ee a e a 169 Hardware requirements 169 EST COBNOUTGTON 5 600666 04 1d oe e
355. onfiguration by adding a null modem adapter a gender changer and or a DB9 DB25 serial port adapter to a straight DB9F to DB9M cable Note The only connection verified by UL is the DB8F to DB8M using a null modem cable Figure 78 Picture Perfect AIX system to OH 2000E Picture Perfect AIX OH 2000E System C DB25F Straight Serial Cable Figure 79 Picture Perfect Linux system with a Digi Port expander to OH 2000E Picture Perfect Linux System OH 2000E Aeee Ip DB25F Straight Serial Cable DB9M Figure 80 Picture Perfect Linux system to OH 2000E Picture Perfect Linux OH 2000E System gt DB9F Straight Serial Cable For the Picture Perfect system Serial ports AIX One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem 246 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Linux One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COM1 or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the OH Receiver communication program is started Figure 81 Overview of the stand alone Picture Perfect and OH Receiver interface OH Network Rece
356. onitor contains Input Group Descriptions Known alarms will contain for this particular Alarm Monitor screen SCS1 description in the Location column that is the Input Prefix followed by specific information extracted from message received 161 from the SCS 1 receiver Line 2 from the Alarm Monitor above is an example of an S alarm for a known account number For Unknown alarms of a known message type for which an account number user number etc entry was not generated by scsgen or manually the Location column will contain the Input Group Prefix followed by three asterisks and whatever information we normally extract from that type of message for the Input Group Description The Alarm Description column will contain as much of the message that was received from the SCS 1 receiver up to 60 characters Line 10 from the Alarm Monitor in Figure 49 is an example of this an S message type for an unknown account number For Unknown alarms of an unknown message type the Location column will contain the Input Group Prefix followed by three asterisks and the message received from the SCS 1 receiver up to 60 characters The Alarm Description will contain the message received from the SCS 1 receiver up to 60 characters Line 9 from the Alarm Monitor above is an example of this the N type message is unknown Testing the interface Once the input groups and alarm database records have been set up and the interface is running it
357. onitor screen a B x amp g New Alarms ug Total Alarms 10 Highest Priority 5 d Alarm Description Location Condition D Device Date Device Time Host Date NERT NOTFIER BANE F NFRA SIGNAL SILENCE REQUESTED dn IN SP 61 08 2008 NFR1 NOTIFIER PANEL NFR1 SYSTEM RESET ACTIVATED Alarm 01 06 2005 16 45 01 06 2005 IONIZATION DETECTOR NFR1 ALARM SMOKE PHOTO 103 Alarm 01 06 2005 17 00 50 01 06 2005 FIRE ALARM PULLED NFR1 ACK TB PULL STATION 106 Alarm 01 06 2005 17 02 48 01 06 2005 NFR1 NOTIFIER PANEL NFR1 ALL SYSTEMS NORMAL Alarm 01 06 2005 17 14 21 01 06 2005 ANNUN TEST PANEL NFR1 ACK TB ANNUNCIATOR 01 Alarm 01 06 2005 17 19 13 01 06 2005 PHOTOELECTRIC DETECTOR NFR1 CLR AL SMOKE PHOTO 102 Alarm 01 06 2005 17 30 40 01 06 2005 NFR1 NOTIFIER PANEL NFR1 DETECTOR TEST IN PROGRESSAlarm 01 06 2005 17 56 02 01 06 2005 NFR1 NOTIFIER PANEL NFR1 DETECTOR TEST ALL OK Alarm 01 06 2005 17 58 27 01 06 2005 01 06 2005 18 08 44 01 06 2005 Display is now active The above figure of the Alarm Monitor shows a possible alarm sequence In this scenario a system uses the input group prefix of NFR1 and has appropriate input group alarm records to recognize the conditions coming from the panel The Alarm Description column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate alarm record that was created manually or by the nfrgen tool The Location column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate input group record which was cre
358. ontains the information on the specific serial line port the interface is going to read from The InpGrpPrefix parameter is a required parameter in the configuration file This parameter is the prefix that must be used in the description field for all input groups that are to be recognized by the interface If this parameter is changed here it must be changed for all the input groups that are using it as a prefix This prefix is case sensitive so the declaration in here must match the one used in the input group description This description must not exceed max prefix lgth characters and the last character or characters should be numeric The input group prefix declared in here will be read when the interface is started If more than one interface is installed then the input group prefix must be unique in each configuration file An example prefix would be ESTO1 and the next interface that is installed could be EST02 All information is divided into two sections configuration item label and the desired setting NOTE THE StdAlarmLF and FireAlarmLF VALUES MAY HAVE TO BE CHANGED Upon installation the StdAlarmLF and FireAlarmLF are configured as 4 and 6 respectively On some EST devices it has been noted that an extra LF is generated for each line so the values actually would need to be changed to StdAlarmLF 8 FireAlarmLF 12 To determine what the actual value is if inputs from the EST device whic
359. or a successful configuration follow these steps 1 Adding or modifying input groups for the 3 possible message types for each paging station to be monitored Adding or modifying alarms Adding or modifying output groups and outputs if desired Monitoring alarms 317 Adding or modifying input groups The input group record description is the key to identifying specific Stentofon Touchline Exchange protocol messages The format of the description is defined such that it can be set up to identify the specific message types coming from the Exchange for each paging station as identified in the Exchange protocol as described in Message types on page 323 The following is the structure of an input group record description lt IGP gt lt PagingStation gt lt MessageType gt lt IGP gt The 4 to 5 character input group prefix described on page 308 lt PagingStation gt This is the 4 character Paging Station identifier valid values are FFFO through 9999 as described in Message types on page 323 lt MessageType gt Identifies the type of message and is one of Request Connect or Disconnect corresponding to the five Exchange protocol messages as defined in Message types on page 323 There must be a single period between the parts of the input group record description and spaces are not allowed anywhere within the description This structure must be followed in defining input group records so that the Stentofon interface software can
360. ork with a serial printer connected to the EST panel e Serial Ports AIX One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem Linux One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COM1 or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the EST communication program is started 170 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Figure 52 Overview of a stand alone Picture Perfect and a Firepanel interface 530113001B Redundant system If you have a Picture Perfect redundant system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual e e AIX Linux EST panel with available printer port connection provided by the manufacturer Serial line cable to connect to the splitter master port to the EST system This cable should be a standard RS 232 serial cable that would normally work with a serial printer connected to the EST panel Serial ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or ser
361. orrect this situation by re assigning the alarm that it is linked to so that it is does not conflict with alarms that are going to be removed This is to prevent the accidental removal of alarm records that other input group records are linked Note Any input group and its associated alarm using the input group prefix targeted for un installation that was created manually through the Picture Perfect Input Group form will be removed This means it will be permanently lost if it s data was not originally part of the input file To avoid this situation for any input groups and associated alarms created manually a corresponding entry should be added to the input file so that ALL of the SCS data may be automatically recreated at a later date 148 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Removing scsgen Before you start e You must have root permission torunthe scsgen tool The database must be running When the tool is invoked scsgen will check this You must know the input group prefix used by the DMP SCS 1 interface that is being targeted for un installation Follow these steps to use the scsgen tool to uninstall database records 1 Log in as root or su root if already logged in but not as the root user You should see a prompt Change to the directory where the input file name is located Type cas bin profile This will ensure you have the correct path environment variable that will give you access to t
362. ort modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COM1 or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Firesine communication program is started e A standard splitter box Two pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to the standard splitter ports Refer to Figure 60 Figure 60 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M Picture Perfect System DB25F D d D E DM k Splitter Port DB25M DD d D E DM k 20 Figure 61 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitter DB9M To Redundant Host DB25F To Primary Host DB25F To Firepanel DB25M DB25M Tm Master Porti Port 2 Port DB25F DB25F DB25F Splitter 191 192 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Figure 62 Overview of a redundant Picture Perfect and a Firepanel Interface in PR Ms 193 Configuration Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Firesine fire and other life safety alarms The Firesine Interface for Picture Perfect processes Alert Fault Fire and System Reset messages from the Firesine panel All other Firesine messages such as General Fault Time and Date Zonal Output Control will be ignored In addition it should be noted that because the commu
363. os report The following report is displayed 08 27 96 15 30 CSTATION Micros MICRO REC MICRO DESCRIPTION MICRO ID DNSTRM COMM INGRP UPSTRM COMM INGRP BDGHIS INGRP ALMHIS INGRP READER COMM INGRP 1 MICROOila 1 0 9 7 8 12 10 2 MICROlila 2 1 9 7 8 12 13 3 MICRO2ila 3 2 2 9 1 ET L1 From the output you see that in the definition of the third micro the badge history overflow input group was improperly defined as it had a value of 1 Record ID numbers must be greater than zero This problem should be corrected by following the procedures to define or update micro records in the database as described in the Picture Perfect User Manual Note The alarm history overflow input group was also not properly defined and must be corrected The CSTATION Micros report can be used to provide information to populate the accounts table The third column of the report MICRO ID identifies the Micro ID values for which corresponding Central Station account numbers should be defined There should be an entry in the accounts table for every Micro ID value listed in the report Suppose that when looking at the micros report all of the Input Group ID numbers as indicated by the fields whose label ends with _INGRP were properly defined This indicates that one or more of the input groups does not have an alarm defined To determine which input group has the problem do the following 3 Run the CSTATION Alarms report The following report is displayed CSTATION Al
364. ost s Alarm Monitor Whenever an alarm notification is received by the interface software it determines if it is executing on the primary host Alarm notifications received by the interface software executing on the redundant host are not processed In the case of a failover the mode on the redundant host will change to indicate that it is now the primary and the interface software will then process the alarms received from the Firesine system 189 Software requirements The software requirements for the Firesine system and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system If you are using a stand alone Picture Perfect system the following items are required e Picture Perfect base base package e Picture Perfect Firesine interface firesine package Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required e Picture Perfect base base package e Picture Perfect redundant system pprs package e Picture Perfect Firesine interface firesine package Hardware requirements The hardware requirements for the Picture Perfect stand alone and the Picture Perfect redundant system are listed below Stand alone system If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual Firesine 4100 panel e A three wire full duplex serial data link that operates at 1200 baud 8 dat
365. ou are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required e Picture Perfect base base package e Picture Perfect redundant system pprs package e Picture Perfect Stentofon 9600 interface stentofon9600 package Hardware requirements The hardware requirements for the Picture Perfect stand alone and the Picture Perfect redundant system are listed below Stand alone System If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual SStentofon Intercom system provided by the manufacturer including e Black Box Converter RS 422 to RS 232 Note Refer to the Stentofon Technical Documentation included with the Security Software Package 64401 for instructions on how to program the Stentofon to forward data to an external system This configuration must be done prior to installation of the Picture Perfect Stentofon 9600 Interface Software package e Serial ports AIX One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem Linux One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COM1 or COM2 are
366. ou have selected as the default facility Notifier Facility Is this ok y n y Entera y to confirm or an n to re enter the default facility If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the value If you entered a y the facility you selected and its id will be displayed and you will be prompted for the default alarm priority to use for the alarms created Default Facility chosen is Notifier Facility kk k k ox End of Default Notifier Facility assignment portion Wee kk kxk Do you want to install the fixed message types y n y Enter y to install the fixed message types or n Using the prefix specified the Notifier type will be retrieved from the configuration file The input file will then be checked for formatting errors and you will be prompted to enter the default alarm priority as follows 219 220 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual 15 16 Getting notifier type Checking input file for formatting errors Enter the default alarm priority It is the priority that will be used for fixed messages and any alarm that has no priority specified Value may be in the range 1 500 default 50 Enter the value for the default alarm priority or to accept the existing default The alarm priority you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it Selected default alarm priority is 65 Is this correct y n y Entera y toconfirm or an n to
367. oup description 227 lt IGP gt STATUS DEV TYPE lt ZXXX gt where IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters STATUS can be one of the following TROUBL ACK TB CLR TB or ACL TB DEV TYPE is one of the zone device types in Zable 13 Device Types on page 236 e ZXXX is the zone identifier Z and zone number XXX 1 240 For example to configure for a FORWARD ZONE with a zone number of 150 for the four available status types you would create four input groups each with the following descriptions NFR1 TROUBL FORWARD ZONE Z150 NFR1 ACK TB FORWARD ZONE Z150 NFR1 CLR TB FORWARD ZONE Z150 NFR1 ACL TB FORWARD ZONE Z150 The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation System Trouble Message Type To recognize System Trouble message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt STATUS SYSTEM TROUBLE where IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters STATUS can be one of the following TROUBL ACK TB CLR TB or ACL TB SYSTEM TROUBLE isa fixed field Note When monitoring this message type you must consult the Notifier panel or printer for the system trouble index and description of the system trouble For example to configure for System Trouble messages for the four available status types you would create four input groups each wi
368. package Running cas bin fixperm on tmp kalatel perm file No errors detected cas bin fixperm finished inst pkgs Running cas bin interfaces perm sh on package kalatel Installing desired Interface product s was successful m The Installation has completed a The system needs to be rebooted for the changes to take effect Reboot the system y n y Press to reboot the system A CAUTION If the interface package was running in a redundant Picture Perfect environment then you MUST synchronize the database on the backup host with the primary host by performing Database Recovery on the backup host prior to starting redundant Picture Perfect on the backup host Refer to the Picture Perfect 4 5 Redundant Edition User Manual for details Chapter 2 21 Installing and removing Verifying the installation This section describes how to verify the installation process The instructions are listed below 1 When the system is back up log in as root and verify that the interface is running by typing at the prompt ps ef grep msan You should get output similar to the following root 12579 17148 0 10 19 36 pts 0 0 00 msan 2 For further verification type at the 4 prompt ps ef grep ktd The output should be similar to the following root 16164 17148 0 10 19 36 pts 0 0 00 ktd tty2 root 16169 17148 0 10 19 37 pts 00 00 ktd tty3 The second output line will only appear if more than one
369. pair The types of message lines as defined by the lt MessageType gt field that are accepted and processed by the Stentofon interface software are described in the following paragraphs 324 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Message Type 0307 Local Call Request The following is the structure of a Type 0307 message line lt Sync gt lt 0307 gt _ lt Station gt _ lt Datal gt _ lt CR gt lt LF gt lt Station gt This is a 4 character pager station number originating the call request with valid values from FFFO through 9999 leading Fs used instead of 0s lt Datal gt Information that is not important to the Stentofon interface This message type defines a pager request to connect to the Stentofon Intercom System master exchange from a local location Message Type 0507 Remote Call Request The structure of a Type 0507 message line is as follows lt Sync gt lt 0507 gt _ lt Station gt _ lt Datal gt _ lt Data2 gt _ lt Data3 gt _ lt CR gt lt LF gt lt Station gt This is a 4 character pager station number originating the call request with valid values from FFFO through 9999 leading Fs used instead of 0s lt DataN gt Information that is not important to the Stentofon interface This message type defines a pager request to connect to the Stentofon Intercom System master exchange from a remote location Message Type 0304 Local Call Connect The following is the structure of a Type 0304 message line
370. pports operations in a redundant Picture Perfect environment where two hosts have connectivity to a single Stentofon Intercom Black Box Converter Connectivity is achieved using a splitter between the Picture Perfect system and the Stentofon intercom This allows the physical connection of the Stentofon 9600 Intercom System to an RS 232 serial port on each Picture Perfect host computer In a redundant configuration the Stentofon 9600 Intercom System interface software executes on both Picture Perfect hosts and both receive alarm notifications from the Stentofon Intercom However only the interface software executing on the primary host processes the alarms Whenever an alarm notification is received by the interface software it determines if it is executing on the primary host Alarm notifications received by the interface software executing on the redundant host are not processed In the case of a failover the mode on the redundant host will change to indicate that it is now the primary and the interface software will then conduct communications with the Stentofon Intercom 331 Software requirements The software requirements for the Stentofon interface and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system If you are using a stand alone Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect base base package e Picture Perfect Stentofon 9600 interface stentofon9600 package Redundant system If y
371. provided when the interface is installed as a signal configuration file is required for the interface to run successfully If only the default signal configuration file is present all of the SCS interfaces configured on the host will use the same file and all will ignore the signals specified in the file If one of the interfaces requires a specific set of signals to be ignored then the cas db text scs_signals cfg file should be copied to cas db text scs signals _ttyN cfg where ttyN is the port to which that copy of the interface is attached The signals to be ignored by that copy of the interface should then be added to the file The cas db text scs signals ttyN cfg file takes precedence over the cas db text scs signals cfg default file The following are the contents of the default signal configuration file cas db text scs signals cfg provided at installation sccs signals cfg 1 1 05 14 01 Description This file contains a list of signals which the application will ignore and just send back an acknowledgement that it was received File Layout One signal per line Signal name will start in column 1 A maximum of 32 signals can be entered into this file to be ignored Comments must be on a separate line and start with a pound sign 4 in column 1 Comments must be less than 255 characters in length The following ar xamples where the S07 S88 and S99 signals would be ignore
372. ption for Firesine alarms If this is changed here it must be changed in the input description as well and they are case sensitive This configuration parameter must not contain spaces In the input group description there should be one space between this prefix and the alarm id FIRESINE F101 or FIRESINE F001101 for example n InpGrpPrefix FIRESINE The Alarm IdLen parameter is used to determine the length of the Firesine alarm id The original requirement was 6 but it is now 3 200 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual The Id is used as part of the input group description AlarmIdLen 3 Icanon 2 The following values are setup based on your installation responses PortName dev tty2 PortBaud 9600 CharacterSize 8 Parity n StopBits iL Xon y Xoff y Appendix H Configuring a Notifier interface This appendix provides information on configuring the Notifier interface to Picture Perfect which acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Notifier Interface Panel AM2020 AFP1010 or AFP 400 and recognizes only the predefined messages types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect In this appendix TOG DP 202 Software requirements cesses eee 203 Hardware requirements os ba esee cse eR OA NEE E SN e s 204 accu 3 A dE NEEN Goan nee A E ENEE 209 Device DER ooi NNN Sh Oe GOA EAS Hee boa He Leds 236 esting he merde one cocci retine Caw
373. put group prefix targeted for un installation that was created manually through the Picture Perfect Input Group form will be removed This means it will be permanently lost if it S data was not originally part of the input file To avoid this situation for any input groups and associated alarms created manually a corresponding entry should be added to the input file so that ALL of the SCS data may be automatically recreated at a later date 2 Add the new device data to the input file 3 Invoke scsgen and use the modified input file to re create the data records 147 Using scsgen to change or add message types for an existing device after an initial installation If you need to add additional message types or change the defined data for an existing SCS 1 interface you should do the following 1 Use scsgen to uninstall all the data records based upon the input group prefix An uninstall removes all input group records and associated alarm records that have the given input group prefix except for the entries reserved for dynamically generated alarms Note Any input group and its associated alarm using the input group prefix targeted for un installation that was created manually through the Picture Perfect Input Group form will be removed This means it will be permanently lost if it s data was not originally part of the input file To avoid this situation for any input groups and associated alarms created manually a correspond
374. r is attached If you entered n the following message displays NOTE The installation of this interface REQUIRES the usage of a port to continue Do you wish to use the comm ports y n y Linux AIX Chapter 2 17 Installing and removing Press or y to use the comm ports or press n to indicate that you will not use the comm ports The installation program will verify if there are ports available on the system If there are no ports available a message will display and you will exit the installation program If the check finds a port the installation will proceed Messages similar to the following displays Verifying if serial ports are available for the KALATEL Interface OK Loading KALATEL CCTV Server Package Extracting files from media The files have been read from the media Please select a tty port Select the port to be used for the interface server package from the list provided A message similar to the following displays You must select a tty port for the KALATEL interface The following tty ports are available A list similar to the following displays dev ttyS1 dev ttyS2 dev ttyS3 For RS 6000 The port name created previously using the SMIT utility appears in a list similar to the following dev ttylO dev ttyll dev tty12 The following prompt displays Please select a tty port 18 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Linux AIX En
375. r must be consulted for a list of detectors that fail in the case of the DETECTOR TEST FAIL message Lamp Test Message To recognize Lamp Test message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt LAMP TEST TYPE where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters LAMP TEST TYPE is one of two fixed fields LAMP TEST ACTIVATED or LAMP TEST COMPLETE For example to configure for the two Lamp Test messages you would configure the following input group descriptions NFR1 LAMP TEST ACTIVATED NFR1 LAMP TEST COMPLETE The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation 231 Block Acknowledge To recognize Block Acknowledge messages use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE gt where IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters e BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE is a fixed field For example NFR1 BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation Alarm Silenced To recognize the Alarm Silenced messages use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt ALARM SILENCED where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters ALARM SILENCED isa fixed
376. rch criteria 3 Click Find The desired input group should appear 4 Editthe desired information 5 When completed save the input group by clicking Save Adding or modifying alarms Each Stentofon input group will need to be linked to an alarm record which can be routed to show up on the Alarm Monitor and be recorded by Alarm History The linking is done through the Input Group form after the Alarm record has been established Creating alarm records that the input group records are linked to 1s required for the Stentofon interface to operate It is the combination of the input group description and alarm description that make up the location and alarm columns displayed on the Alarm Monitor The alarm record description field should be used to further identify or describe the Stentofon input group to which it will be linked Several input group records can be linked to the same alarm for example one alarm per paging station but it would be prudent to set up one alarm record for each input group record The alarm description field has no restrictions other than a maximum length of 60 characters or required format since all of the unique information for an Exchange protocol message is located in the input group description However each alarm description in the database must be unique The recommended format for alarm descriptions is to identify the paging station and the type of action that occurred For the example input group descriptions
377. rds the following fields are set accordingly Delay Time 0 Boolean Type Trigger on Input Individual Input Group State Enabled Open Condition Ignored Short Condition Ignored Broadcast State Changes No Alarm Should point to the alarm record generated for this input group Parent Input Group should all be lt BLANK gt Output Group should all be BLANK 104 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual The default values for the alarm records are Controls Alarm Online Controls Auto Reset Output Alarm Routing Monitor and History Priority 50 Using cmdgen install Before you start e You must have root permission to run the cmdgen tool The database must be running The tool will check this when cmdgen is invoked A valid input file must exist that contains the Picture Perfect version and data lines for the message types to be monitored for the described devices You must know the input group prefix used by the Commend interface that is being targeted for data generation See the section nput group prefix on page 102 for more information Follow these steps to use the cmdgen tool to install database records 1 2 Loginas root Change to the directory where the input file is located Type cas bin profile This will ensure you have the correct PATH environment variable that will give you access to the cmdgen tool and the database tools it uses Type cmdgen Messages similar to the following appear
378. re 108 The input group screen 68 Inputs Outputs Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones L Input Groups Inputs Output Groups Outputs Input Group Events Output Group Events lei Beem i Oli we ue STT Define input Group Parent input Groups Output Groups Description MAIN ENTRANCE STAIR 01010201 Facility GLOBAL g Input Group State Open Condition Disabled Ignored Enabled Detected Boolean Type Short Condition O OR Any AND All Ignored Individual Detected Broadcast State Changes No Yes Alarm SIMPLEX ALARM lt GLOBAL gt e SS df Y e Delay Time g HES Results 1 records Follow these steps to modify an input group 1 2 3 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups In the Description field of the Input Groups form enter lt eight digit ID gt as the search criteria Click Find The desired input group should appear Edit the desired information When completed save the input group by clicking Save Adding or modifying an alarm If you want to see a unique Picture Perfect alarm displayed for each Simplex alarm define a separate alarm for each Simplex alarm and assign it to a corresponding input group If you choose not to define a unique alarm description for
379. re below Figure 7 Cable pinouts splitter to AlphaCom Exchange DB25F to DB25F Splitter Master AlphaCom Port Receiver DB25F DB25F Shield Shield Rxd 2 Rxd Txd 3 Txd RTS CTS DCD SG 7 SG rary N o Uc E a DM n 30 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Figure 8 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitte DB25F To AlphaCom Exchange DB25M To Primary Host DB25F To Redundant Host DB25F Splitter DB25M DB25M Master Port 1 Port 2 Port DB25F DB25F DB25F Figure 9 Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and Intercom interface 31 Configuration The Picture Perfect interface to the AlphaCom system allows alarms that are detected by the Picture Perfect system to trigger predefined events on the AlphaCom system Before this can happen Picture Perfect must be informed of which alarms should be sent to the Alphacom system and how that Picture Perfect alarm is mapped to an AlphaCom system alarm number Picture Perfect treats alarms as a collection of information which includes Input group Location Host number The AlphaCom system distinguishes alarms by a unique four digit identifier per alarm location and condition Once you have set up the alarms on Picture Perfect you need to set up the mapping of alarms to the AlphaCom system This procedure is accomplished by executing a script
380. re generated If an error occurs within the input file the scsgen tool will display the error on the screen The type of error the column it occurred in and the line it occurred on in the input file will be given The input file must be error free before any data records are generated Identifying the Input Group Prefix The DMP SCS 1 interface uses the input group prefix to search specific input group records for messages that are to be monitored This input group prefix was established during installation of the interface for every serial line that was configured The prefix for the DMP SCS 1 interface is stored in the configuration file for that interface and is read every time it is started With this in mind it is a requirement to know the input group prefix of the interface for which the scsgen tool is going to generate database records To determine this you must look in the appropriate cas db text scs XXX cfg file where XXX is the tty name of the port for which the interface is configured Examine the appropriate file and look for a line that starts with InpGrpPrefix The value following this string is the input group prefix being used by the SCS 1 interface for that port Input Group Prefix Usage When Installing When using the install portion of the scsgen tool the input group prefix is used as the prefix for the description field for all input group records generated Again it should be stressed that the input group prefix used by
381. re permanent Se meo che ou RemoteConnAlarm RemoteConnInGrp ReplyToAlarm ReplyToIngrp DO NOT touch these lines 33778 33778 33779 33779 Variables that require a yes or no setting take either yes no true or false Any line that begins with the pound symbol or a space is a comment line and is not construed as a variable setting To modify the settings of any 279 of these variables you need to edit the cas db text rantcpip cfg file with an editor such as vi The permissions on this file are read write for the super user and read only for all other users This means that only the super user has authorization to modify this file Note Any time a variable in rantcpip cfg is changed the RAN interface must be restarted by shutting down and restarting Picture Perfect How long to wait for a connection Because the connection between Picture Perfect and the remote system is over a network that utilizes TCP IP each system immediately knows if the connection between them has been broken for any number of reasons RAN provides for two separate timers that are used in detecting a lost connection alarm The first timer variable called the RemoteConnColdTO is used when the RAN system is started with Picture Perfect During startup there is no connection with the remote system Expect the connection to take some time to be established If the timer expires and a connection with the remote system has still not been made a los
382. re required e Picture Perfect Base base package e Picture Perfect Redundant System pprs package e Picture Perfect Alphacom interface alphacom package Hardware requirements The hardware requirements for the Picture Perfect stand alone and the Picture Perfect redundant system are listed below Stand alone system If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual e AlphaCom Exchange System e Serial Ports AIX One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem Linux One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COM1 or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the AlphaCom communication program is started Cable to connect the Picture Perfect system and the AlphaCom Refer to Figure 4 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to AlphaCom exchange DB25F to DB25F on page 28 28 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Figure 4 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to AlphaCom exchange DB25F to DB25F Picture Perfect Host AlphaCom Comp
383. reads the file upon startup to configure the port and the interface Note DO NOT change this file unless absolutely necessary If you find it absolutely necessary to change the file you must be knowledgeable about text editors such as vi Before you begin please call GE Security Customer Support for assistance The following is an example of the contents of the port configuration file for a Simplex device attached to port dev tty5 cas db text simplex cfg simplex cfg Copyright C 1995 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved This file generated from the following installation script simplex inst 1 5 06 10 03 This file contains the configuration information for the SIMPLEX alarm interface Each interface that is running on a Picture Perfect system must have its own configuration file which contains the information on the specific serial line port the interface is going to read from All information is divided into two sections configuration item label and the desired setting The following values are unique to the SIMPLEX interface do not change unless instructed by GE Interlogix CASI These values are setup at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines ResetConnAlarm 92 ResetConnInGrp 120 PositionTimeAlarm 3 PositionAmPmAlarm 12 PositionMonthAlarm 23 PositionYearAlarm 21 PositionDateAlarm 20 297 The following values are setup based o
384. requested communication with the Stentofon 9600 but has not yet been connected Testing the Interface Once the input groups and alarm database records have been set up and the interface is running it should be tested to make sure messages are being correctly recognized by the interface The Alarm Monitor should receive the appropriate messages if they have been set up correctly If the Alarms are not being shown on the Alarm Monitor then the appropriate input group description should be checked to make sure that it follows the format specified for that message type listed under the Adding or modifying input groupssection of this document Make sure the appropriate Input Group prefix is being used in the description field and that it matches the one established upon installation in the stn9600 ttyN cfg configuration file Also check the alarm routing field of the corresponding alarm record to make sure that the routing includes Monitor If there is a printer hooked up to the Stentofon 9600 then the resulting messages that are being monitored by the interface can be compared against the printed output in terms of the parts of a message that are used to make up an input group or alarm record description field If there are messages that are not being recognized by the interface that have been set up to do so and they are being printed then call GE Security Customer Support for further assistance in debugging the problem 354 Picture Perfect 4 5 Int
385. requires several data files for its operation These files are created during the software installation process and are summarized in Table 2 below Normal use of the interface software may cause changes to one or more of these files Backups should be done on a regular basis A good practice is to do It at the same time the Picture Perfect database is backed up The AlphaCom software installation procedure automatically updates the Picture Perfect backup configuration list file cas db text backup cfg so that future backups will include the files required for the AlphaCom interface Refer to the Picture Perfect documentation for information on how to backup and restore files Table 2 _ AlphaCom interface data files Data file name Description cas db text alphacomm cfg TTY port extended configuration definition files is the port name for example ttyl for AIX ttyD001 for Linux cas db text alphacomm redundant cfg AlphaCom redundant configuration file Indicates that this is a redundant configuration Contains the host names cas db text alphacomm map Alarm map file that maps Picture Perfect alarm events to AlphaCom alarm numbers as described in Configuration on page 31 cas db text alphacomm ata map Alarm map file that maps the AlphaCom alarm to the AlphaCom nodes to which it is to be sent as described in Configuration on page 31 Appendix B Configuring a CCTV interface This appendix provides i
386. rface that is being targeted Input group prefix when uninstalling The input group prefix is used when using the uninstall portion of the stngen tool All input group records that have descriptions that match the input group prefix the first five characters will be removed from the database The Alarm records that each input group points to will be removed with one exception If the Alarm record is linked to any other input group records outside of the ones to be removed the tool will not remove any records and will notify the user of this condition This situation must be corrected by the user before any records can be removed using the tool The input group user interface can be used to correct this situation by re assigning the alarm that it is linked to so that it does not conflict with alarms that are going to be removed This is to prevent the accidental removal of alarm records to which other input group records are linked Input group and alarm records generated by stngen The input file processed by stngen produces input group and alarm database records that are inserted into the database when the tool is run The input group records created are unique for each valid line in the input file This is done by combining the input group prefix pager identification number and communication activity information into the description field of an input group record If optional CCTV information is specified a new entry will be created and appended t
387. rial line These messages types and formats used by the SCS 1 interface were derived from the SCS 1 Host Output Specification document version 801 These messages must be configured on the Picture Perfect system There are two methods available to configure these messages 1 Automatically using the scsgen data generator tool 2 Manually using Picture Perfect If you plan to enter many messages at once we strongly recommend you use the scsgen command line tool Using scsgen exclusively to create or modify data records will enable you to keep track of the specific messages that are being monitored for a particular receiver on a specific port This tool is explained in detail in the following section However if you choose to use Picture Perfect to insert the database records this procedure is explained starting on page 150 with the section entitled Using Picture Perfect to configure the DMP SCS 1 interface Note Database records added manually using Picture Perfect should be added to an scsgen input file so they may later be recreated in the event scsgen uninstall is used Using the scsgen Data Generator Tool Use scsgen to install or uninstall database records that are associated with the SCS 1 alarm interface This tool 1s part of the SCS 1 alarm interface package for Picture Perfect and is installed with the package The scsgen tool will create the temporary files that it needs in the tmp directory as it processes an input file and later ge
388. rical value equal to or less than this number a countdown then begins from the number you set as the alarm delay time If the alarm has not been responded to and the delay time has elapsed the alarm is sent to the remote system Follow these steps to configure alarm priority and delay time 1 Select Setup then Parameters The Parameters form displays 2 Enterthe Alarm Delay time This is the number of seconds which must elapse before an unresponded to alarm is sent to the remote system 3 Enter the Alarm Priority This is the priority that an alarm must be equal to or lower than before the alarm can be sent to the remote system 4 Click Save 5 Restart Picture Perfect 274 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Remote Connection Lost Alarm During installation RAN automatically creates a default alarm and input group to be used when communications are lost with the remote system The alarm description is REMOTE ALARM SYSTEM CONN LOST The alarm is set up with a priority of 15 and a routing to both the Alarm Monitor and history The input group used for this alarm has a description of REMOTE ALARM NOTIFICATION HOST However you may want to modify the alarm and input group to provide a more site specific description of the alarm condition Follow these steps to modify the input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 Inthe Description field of the Input Groups form enter REMOTE as the
389. ring that corresponds to an SCS 1 numeric type range 0 7 interpreted as follows 0 BL BLANK 1 FA FIRE 2 BA BURGLARY 3 SU SUPERVISORY 4 HU PANIC 5 EM EMERGENCY 6 A1 AUXILIARY 1 7 A2 AUXILIARY 2 Alarm Description The fifth column is used as the alarm description field for the alarm record that is created for the associated input group record This description is what appears on the Alarm Monitor when an alarm occurs and should be used as a custom device label that helps describe more information about the device or detector and the event that occurred It can be up to 60 characters in length and either upper or lower case It is acceptable to use the same alarm description for multiple input file data lines when installing the data generator records Only one alarm record will be generated in this case and the appropriate input group records will point to the same alarm record Note Do not use an alarm description that matches the description field of an existing alarm record in the Picture Perfect database This is an illegal condition that scsgen checks before any data is generated Facility The sixth column is used to specify the facility id that will be used for the input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted to select a Default SCS Facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a Facility value is not specified in
390. riority The seventh column is used to specify the priority that will be used for the alarm record generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted for the Default SCS Priority a number in the range 1 500 If a Priority value 1s not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Priority will be used 137 Column descriptions for i Secondary Schedule Changed I Temporary Schedule Changed n Primary Schedule Changed and N Permanent Schedule Changed Message Types Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Msg Type Account User Alarm Desc Facility Priority 1 char 5 digits 2 to 4 digits 1 to 60 chars 1 to 10 digits 1 to 3 digits i I n or N 00 9999 1 or 1 500 1 2 147 483 647 Msg Type Column one is a one character abbreviation of the message type to be monitored The following list defines the message type abbreviations and the possible status information that the message type can produce i Secondary Schedule Changed Temporary Schedule Changed n Primary Schedule Changed N Permanent Schedule Changed Account Column two is the five digit account number with a range of 00000 99999 User Column three is used to specify the number of the user who changed the schedule It is a two to four digit string with a range of 00 9999 based upon the SCS 1 programming Alarm Desc Column four is used as the alarm description field for the alarm record that is created for the associat
391. rk Receiver Local or Wide Area Network Ethernet TCP IP NX 8E with an Ze 25 NX 590E 2 network module Splitter CL Ps E Ki na 90000000000000 00000000000000 OH2000E NX 8E Ademco Radionix RS 232 RS 232 Picture Perfect Primary Host Picture Perfect Secondary Host 249 250 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Configuration The OH Receiver interface to Picture Perfect acts as a filter by recognizing predefined messages that are received over the serial line The message types and formats used by the OH Receiver interface are discussed in the following section These messages must be configured on the Picture Perfect system For a successful configuration follow these steps which will be detailed in the sections that follow 1 Add or modify input group records 2 Add or modify alarm records 3 Add or modify output group records and output records 1f desired 4 Monitor alarms Note Ifthe OH Receiver package is installed in a Redundant Picture Perfect environment all operations should be performed on the current primary machine The normal operation of the redundant Picture Perfect system will sweep any database changes made over to the backup machine Input group records The input group record description field is the key to identifying specific OH Receiver messages There are two methods of adding input group records automatic or manual Durin
392. rmat of the message from the remote system for which Picture Perfect is looking RAN works with the Picture Perfect stand alone networked or redundant versions The basic workings of the systems are similar Refer to Figure 98 Overview of a standalone Picture Perfect and a RAN interface on page 272 and Figure 99 Overview of a redundant Picture Perfect and a RAN interface on page 272 for a pictorial overview of the systems that are explained in the following paragraphs Standalone In the Picture Perfect stand alone version an alarm occurs and is sent to the Picture Perfect system If the alarm received has a priority that is equal to or higher than the Alarm Priority specified on the Setup Parameters window this would be a numerical value equal to or lower the alarm has to be responded to before the Alarm Delay time on Setup Parameters expires If the alarm delay time has expired and no one has responded the alarm is sent to the remote system For example the alarm priority specified on the Setup Parameters window is twenty five 25 An alarm occurs and is sent to Picture Perfect This alarm has a priority of ten 10 Since this priority is less than twenty five 25 which is the alarm priority specified on the Setup Parameters window a countdown begins If the time expires and no one has responded the alarm is sent to the remote system When an alarm has been routed to the remote system the Alarm Monitor changes the process state of the
393. rmer 90 Communications failures 0 eee cece cee teen eee m mesh ee 91 MESSAGE processing A3 Seed etse Reb AE EE es dey eebe EE EN vi Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Appendix D Appendix E Configuring a Commend interface ccc llle 93 Introd ctiohi icit Rr RRRRRR RR ERESEERARERERAGGR EE EE wre ta RE TOs RR ERR RES 94 Redundant Systems EE 94 Software requiremernts 2 og EEN EE SN SEELEN REG vw ng aaa seca haus REES dE E EE E 95 ele 95 REGWAGOMUSY STOMA ax eege ee Eed 95 Hardware requirements e Mer ee Pr ENUCMP E ne eR EAR seme 96 Standsalone system seecicexe T er eh eek Rb ca Y Yd uad did e DESEE REERR RAE TRE RENI 96 Redundant system EE 97 Configuration seu eI rh SEENEN PEE E Viewers EF epe PH ALEN PERPE EHeTEPS 99 delen petet c 99 Cmdgen UIST UE 108 Using Picture Perfect to configure the Commend interface 2 0 cee c eee eee eee ete e eee eens 110 Commend Intercom System Message Structure 20 occ cece cence e 117 Configuring a DMP SCS interface AARTEN ee ddensescatiosdeneeaueands 119 ue D A EE 120 Redundant SYSTEMS EE 120 Software requirements sede es re ce ENER e Ya e EG EN ENN E ve A rer NEEN SNE AEN 121 elle Gelee EE 121 eelere EE 121 Hardware requirements 0 cece ccc cece eee ene ene hh hm enhn 122 Stand alone EE 122 REduUNGONESYSIEM 02 5 i02ciderareaaadineltedel dani id NR EIIAn POnOUS eevee coud MD PTT SG 12
394. roller and Picture Perfect provides the capability to automatically control CCTV cameras Pelco The interface between the Pelco CM9750 CCTV switcher and Picture Perfect provides the capability to automatically control CCTV cameras Vicon Viper The interface between a Viper VPS13xx VPS1300 or VPS1344 controller and Picture Perfect provides the capability to automatically control CCTV cameras Chapter 1 Interface overview Firepanel systems supported by Picture Perfect All firepanel systems can exist in a Picture Perfect stand alone redundant two Picture Perfect hosts have connectivity to a single system receiver port by means of a splitter or enterprise environment which generate Picture Perfect alarms when an alarm is tripped or reset Communication is uni directional using a serial line connection meaning the Picture Perfect interface only receives data from the interface and does not send data back EST The EST interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the EST panel and recognizes only the predefined message types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect It acts as a filter that recognizes predefined alarm conditions coming in over the serial line Once an alarm is detected the EST interface picks up a unique panel device ID contained within one of the message lines from the serial port This unique panel device ID must have been previously been set up in Picture Perfect If the
395. rst five characters will be removed from the database The Alarm records that each input group points to will be removed as well but with one exception If the Alarm record is associated with any other input group records outside of the ones to be removed no records will be removed and the user will be notified of this condition This situation must be corrected by the user before any records can be removed using the cmdgen tool The input group user interface can be used to correct this situation by re assigning the alarm that it is linked to so that it is does not conflict with alarms that are going to be removed This is to prevent the accidental removal of alarm records that other input group records are linked Note Any input group using the targeted input group prefix to be un installed that was created manually through the Picture Perfect Input Group Form will be removed which means it will be permanently lost if its data was not originally part of the input file Using cmdgen uninstall Before you start e You must have root permissions to run the cmdgen tool The database must be running The tool will check this when the cmdgen is invoked You must know the input group prefix used by the Commend interface that is being targeted for un installation 109 Follow these steps to use the cmdgen tool to un install database records 1 2 Loginas root Type cas bin profile This will ensure you have the correct PATH env
396. rt configuration file for a CBAS device attached to port dev tty5 cas db text cbas tty5 cfg cbas tty5 cfg Copyright C 1996 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved This file generated from the following installation script cbhas inst 1 5 05 28 03 This file contains the configuration information for the CBAS Alarm Interface Each interface that is running on a Picture Perfect system must have its own configuration file which contains the information on the specific serial line port the interface is going to read from It also contains the unique input group prefix that the interface will use to recognize specific alarm database records These values are setup at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines InpGrpPrefix CBAS NumberOfDatabaseSlots 200 FirstInputGroupNumber 1950 FirstAlarmNumber 1920 The following values are setup based on your installation responses PortName dev tty5 PortBaud 9600 CharacterSize 8 Parity n StopBits 1 267 Xon n Xoff n cas db text cbas redundant cfg The presence of this file indicates that it is a redundant installation The file contains the names of the two redundant hosts and an indication of whether or not the interface is to run redundantly The following is an example of the contents of the CBAS redundant configuration file cas db text cbas redundant cfg cbas redundant cfg 1 11 Copyright C 1997 2003 GE Interlo
397. rt feature after installation Multiple device support To configure a Picture Perfect system to support the sending of commands to multiple output devices in response to a single Picture Perfect alarm event use the msan set_multiple utility A sample execution of this utility is provided below 45 Note You should configure the Picture Perfect software for multiple device support only if commands are to be routed to more than one output device for an alarm event There is a slight performance penalty for this configuration as the output device mapping tables must be fully SEARCHED to find all matches indicating the routing of a command for the specific alarm event To change the Picture Perfect output device support option to multiple perform the following steps 1 Log in to the system as root 2 Enter the command cas bin profile 3 Enterthe command cas bin msan set multiple The following is a sample output from this command Querying the tps daemons table Updating tps daemons entry 54 cas bin msan R A 20030421 175910 statement UPDATE D tps daemons SET pathname cas bin msan m modify date 20030423 modify time 195449 WHERE id 54 statement processed OK 1 rows affected Successfully update tps daemons table entry 54 cas bin msan R A 20030421 175910 46 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Interface data file backup and restore The AlphaCom interface software
398. ructed by CASI These values are setup at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines PositionDateAlarm 22 PositionTimeAlarm 30 The following values are setup based on your installation responses InpGrpPrefix UIOL AlarmTimeIsSystemTime 1 ExternalSysAlarmNumLgth H PortName dev ttyl PortBaud 9600 CharacterSize 7 Parity e StopBits 1 xon y Xoff y Icanon y EchoAlarm y EchoSystemReset y EchoDeviceFail n EchoDeviceReset n PortReInitializationTime 30 EchoAlarm Indicates whether or not ALARM type messages received from the remote system are to b choed back to it EchoSystemReset Indicates whether or not SYSTEM RESET messages received from the remote system are to b choed back to it EchoDeviceFail Indicates whether or not DEVICE FAIL messages received from the remote system are to b choed back to it EchoDeviceReset Indicates whether or not DEVICE RESET messages received from the remote system are to b choed back to it the port will be reset A value of 0 indicates that the block read of the port wil never time out and the port 375 376 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual cas db text univ_intr redundant cfg The presence of this file indicates that it is a redundant installation The file contains the names of the two redundant hosts and an indication of whether or not the interface is to run redundantly The following is an example of the contents of the Universal Intrusion re
399. rundig 1243 264 1243 00202 grundig tty3 igd CMD07 FF13 FF23 12 31 cctvName grundig cctv 00102 grundig 1246 267 1246 00102 grundig tty3 igd CMD07 FF23 FF13 0A cctvName grundig cctv 00301 grundig 1248 269 1248 00301 grundig tty3 igd CMD07 FF23 FF01 1D cctvName grundig cctv 00301 grundig 1249 270 1249 00301 grundig tty3 Generated 5 new entries for CCTV switcher device grundig map table Successfully appended new entries to switcher device grundig map table Installation complete You have made changes to one or more CCTV mapping files Do you want to inform the system of these changes y n y 13 Enter y toinformthe system or n to not inform the system If you entered n the changes just made will not be sent to the interface until the next time it is restarted and you will exit the script If you entered y amessage will be sent to the running interface and the new map changes will be re read and take effect immediately Messages similar to the following will appear then you will exit the script Sending signal USR2 to task grundig comm Sending signal USR2 to task msan Using cmdgen to generate new block station data after an initial installation If there are new block stations to be monitored by the Commend interface after an cmdgen installation then one of the following methods should be used when using the cmdgen tool If you are going to be changing block station data in the
400. s lt LF gt lt CRC gt lt HT gt lt seq gt lt rec gt lt line gt lt CR gt Messages always begin with the flag character lt LF gt Cyclic Redundancy Check lt CRC gt field andthe lt HT gt horizontal tab character The sequence number lt seq gt receiver lt rec gt and line lt line gt fields follow next The beginning data delimiter character follows The lt data gt field characters are all in the ASCII printable range decimal 32 to decimal 126 Multiple data blocks within the lt data gt field are separated by the data field separator for example block1 block2 The ending data delimiter is used after the last data block The message ends with a carriage return lt CR gt character The packet Cyclic Redundancy Check field is a 6 byte ASCII hex string It is calculated the same way for both receiver messages and computer responses It incorporates two different error detection schemes packet summing and column parity The packet CRC occupies digits 1 and 2 the column parity occupies digits 3 and 4 and the size is placed in digits 5 and 6 Refer to the Appendix of the SIA Computer Interface Standard 1990 document for implementation details on the CRC The Receiver rec andLine line fields are both two character ASCII text strings Valid characters in these strings are 0 through 9 and A through Z If not used they should be set to 00 The Sequence Number seq field is a four character ASCH text
401. s UIO2 01010101 Perimeter A 368 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual The UIO2 01010101 portion is the required part where Perimeter A is the descriptive portion The alarm that is linked to this input group could be used to further describe the alarm Adding an input group Follow these steps to add an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 Complete the Input Groups form for each input group These fields must be set as follows Delay Time 0 Boolean Type Individual Input Group State Enabled Open Condition Ignored Short Condition Ignored Broadcast State Changes No Alarm Should point to the alarm record generated for this input group Facility Facility id specified for this input group 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another input group Figure 133 Sample Input Groups screen 68 Inputs Outputs Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones L Input Groups Inputs Output Groups Outputs Input Group Events Output Group Events Description a i wo 4 X lm Define Input Group Parent input Groups Output Groups HES Results 1 records Description JI02 01010111 Perimeter A Facility GLOBAL EN el Input Group State Open Condition Disabled Ignored Enabled Detected Boolean Type Short Condition O OR Any AND All
402. s Alarm Messages Alarm Responses Description o Description Q A af ab AS G OG Alarm Description Instructions Description REMOTE ALARM SYSTEM CONN LOST Facility GLOBAL Set Alarm Route Definition D v 229 priority ey Alarm Routing MONITOR AND HISTORY v 229 S D Online Color Picker O No Color Picker e SG Color Sample Inhibit Schedule Changes No Background Foreground Yes Immediate Reset Input Yes Immediate Dial Required No Yes Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs lanual Reset Outputs Il gt Duration Reset Outputs Results Orecords You are now finished with the basic configuration of the RAN package It is important to note that in a network Picture Perfect environment when communications are lost with the remote system someone must be monitoring the alarms on the network host If no terminals are configured to receive alarms or no one is monitoring alarms when communications are interrupted the break in communications will go undetected This would impact the operator monitoring the remote system terminals who may not be aware that alarms are not being routed to that system The lost connection alarm should be routed to a constantly monitored system where the appropriate personnel
403. s tty5 tty7 Enter the name of the port to use from the list above e g ttyD001 or ttyl tty5 Outgoing Kalatel site number 0 511 OR Kalatel Command Strings Table index 2048 to 1 123 Are you sure y n y k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k KER k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k kk kk kk kk kkk kkk A Add a KALATEL CCTV controlled alarm D Delete a KALATEL CCTV controlled alarm P Print a hardcopy of all KALATEL CCTV controlled alarms X Exit FOO IOI IO IOI IO III IOI OOO IO ke k k kk kk k k N selection A Changing an alarm The package prefix cctv map program does not permit editing an entry If you need to change any of the information for an alarm follow these steps 1 Delete the existing alarm Refer to Deleting an alarm on page 64 2 Adda new alarm Refer to Adding an alarm on page 62 Typically only the CCTV alarm number might change which requires re entering the information 66 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Printing the map file This section describes how to print the package map file Follow these steps to print the file 1 Atthe Selection prompt type p to print the CCTV controlled alarms 2 Enter the printer name 3 Indicate if you want to sort the report If you selected n to not sort the file the file will be printed and the mapping options display If you select
404. s a printer hooked up to the Stentofon Exchange then the resulting messages that are being monitored by the interface can be compared against the printed output in terms of the parts of a message that are used to make up an input group or alarm record description field If there are messages that are not being recognized by the interface that have been set up to do so and they are being printed then call Customer Support for further assistance in debugging the problem Message types All message types that will be recognized by the Stentofon interface software follow a uniform structure This structure consists of a line containing a varying number of fixed sized 4 character fields with a blank space between the fields as a separator A message line is preceded by a NUL 00 character synchronization marker and is followed by a carriage return CR 0D hex character and line feed LF 0A hex character pair The following is a representation of this line structure Sync MessageType Datal Data2 lt DataN gt _ lt CR gt lt LF gt C The underscore character represents a blank space 20 hex character Sync This is the synchronization marker NUL 00 hex character MessageType This is a 4 character field that defines the message line contents DataX These are 4 character data fields with interpretation based on MessageType lt CR gt lt LF gt This is the carriage return and line feed message line terminator
405. s information the stngen9600 tool will generate and load the database with the appropriate input group and alarm database records Table 21 Supported CCTV switcher products Switcher name Manufacturers product designation allegiant Burle Allegiant TC8xOy allplex Burle Allplex TC8928B amdyn American Dynamics grundig Grundig VAZ300 javelin Javelin JO326HI kalatel Kalatel KTD 312 maxpro MAXPRO RD AT100 panasonic Panasonic PFW Model 500 panasonic550 Panasonic WJ SX550A pelco pelcob Pelco CM9750 viper Vicon Viper VPS1330 and VPS1344 337 Picture Perfect version The first line of the input file must contain the Picture Perfect version that is running The version number is used by the stngen9600 tool to determine the database input The current versions that are supported by the stngen9600 tool are e 1 7 2 0 4 0 and 4 5 AIX and Linux Input file data format The lines of data that follow the version information should contain rows of delimited text data that define the paging station identifier the communication activity and optionally a CCTV device or switcher name and the CCTV alarm number The delimiter character between fields must be the symbol There should be one line of data for each unique combination that is going to be monitored The format of a data record is as follows lt IntercomStation gt lt messagetype gt lt AlarmDesc gt lt Facility gt lt CCTVDeviceName
406. s of the port configuration file for a Stentofon 9600 device attached toport dev tty5 cas db text stn9600 tty5 cfg stn9600 tty5 cfg Copyright C 1995 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved This file generated from the following installation script stentofon9600 inst 1 7 05 14 03 This file contains the configuration information for the STENTOFON alarm interface Each interface that is running on a Picture Perfect system must have its own configuration file which contains the information on the specific serial line port the interface is going to read from It also contains the unique input group prefix that the interface will use to recognize specific input group database records using this prefix The InpGrpPrefix parameter is a required parameter in the configuration file This parameter is the prefix that must be used in the description field for all input groups that are to be recognized by the interface If this parameter is changed here it must be changed for all the input groups that are using it as a prefix This prefix is case sensitive so the declaration in here must match the one used in the input group description This description must be 5 characters with the last two being numeric The input group prefix declared in here will be read when the interfac is started If more than one interface is installed then the input group prefix must be unique in each configuration file An example prefi
407. s started If more than one interface is installed then the input group prefix must be unique in each configuration file An example prefix would be STNO1 and the next interface that is installed could be STNO2 327 The following values are unique to the STN interface do not change unless instructed by GE Interlogix CASI Icanon y The following values are setup based on your installation responses InpGrpPrefix STNO1 PortName dev tty5 PortBaud 9600 CharacterSize 7 Parity e StopBits 1 Xon y Xoff y cas db text stentofon redundant cfg The presence of this file indicates that it is a redundant installation The file contains the names of the two redundant hosts and an indication of whether or not the interface is to run redundantly The following is an example of the contents of the Stentofon redundant configuration file cas db text stentofon redundant cfg stentofon redundant cfg 1 5 Copyright C 1995 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved stentofon redundant cfg 1 5 7 6 01 e This file contains the configuration information for the STENTOFON TOUCHLINE INTERCOM interface for redundant operations These values are set up at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines RedundantOper Y RedundantHosts primaryl backupl 328 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Interface data file backup and restore The Stentofo
408. sage TROUBL ACK TB CLR TB ACL TB W Walk Test Message UNPROG UNINST TESTXX UNTEST M Module Activation Message ACTIVE CLEAR S Supervisory Activation Message ACTIVE CLR ACT The status information that can be produced for each message type will be used as part of the input group record description For each message type to be monitored there willbe X number of input group records generated for that message type where X is the number of statuses available for that message type The message status is used in combination with the DEV TYPE and LDD or ZXXX or FFF described below to create unique input group records DEV TYPE The device type column is the actual device type to be monitored The valid device types that can be monitored are listed in Device types on page 236 The spelling and spacing of the device type must be exactly the same as is listed in this document since this is part of the actual message that the Notifier panel produces This column must be in uppercase and no more than 12 characters in length LDD or ZXXX or FFF The third column is used for the LDD or ZXXX or FFF number which describes the loop detector loop module or zone number of the device type in the case of Zone Disable messages The LDD FFF format should be used in this column unless it is a Zone Disable used for the Notifier AM2020 AFP1010 message type The LDD format is a three digit combination of the loop number and detector or module number where L equa
409. sddbiteutetertoton redundont cho 327 Interface data file backup and restore cece ccc eee eee eee enn 328 Appendix N Appendix O Configuring a Stentofon 9600 Interface 329 InitrodUctioh iecore rh SERERE EEN 330 Redundant Systems AANER E Eder RE E ug REC RE ENEE 330 Software requirements wis e cases die an dando sure EEEE ENEE RE EE RR SEA ERR dele ES Rely EELER 331 Stelle Bee 331 IReduridentsystel edere pto ee EE 331 Hardware requirements veg ee EAR AEN EELER CERE eds 331 Stand alone Systerm s Suc s t o e ER Ren bee dies sale aside ease Clase esate 331 Redundantsysterri eeu tete ee baee t bcd o teet ica UU ee ORE erac 333 Config rdtion 73 ose E NEEN rere Y e Re EH EE Ree REF NE Vee ese av Ere SC Iu rer AE 335 WSING SINGEN9600 EE 335 stngen9600 uniristalli 4 5 prt etre gon DtpUDbPU EF OD CoU dd dd E Sa QS tatu 345 Using Picture Perfect to configure the Stentofon interface 00 e eens 347 Testing theInterfdee cease eb rrr rd aee bipes er DCN dE 353 Message TYPOS coser d ERENNERT oda rete me deine 354 Extended configuration 1 socle e eph EIERE EES ERG GU ERG Rd EES EELER 355 Jcas db text st9600 WEE 355 cas db text stentofon9600 redundant cfg 0 2 0 esee 356 Interface data file backup and restore hh nnn 357 Configuring a Universal Intrusion interface cc cece ee eee eee 359 lun EE 360 Redundantsysterris ee pa e Ebene elt DEE ERR eid E E ERR EAR QUEERRTER 360 Software requireme
410. serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COM1 or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Stentofon 9600 communication program is started A standard splitter box Two pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to the standard splitter ports Refer to Figure 121 Figure 121 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M Picture Perfect Splitter System Port DB25F DB25M 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 7 7 8 8 20 20 Cable to connect the splitter master port to the Stentofon Intercom System Black Box Converter Refer to Figure 122 334 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Figure 122 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to intercom system DB25M to DB25F Splitter Master Port DB25M GND 7 Tx 2 Rx 3 Stentofon 9600 Intercom System Black Box Converter DB25F GND 3 Rx 2 TX Figure 123 Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and intercom interface 335 Configuration The Stentofon 9600 interface to Picture Perfect acts as a filter by recognizing predefined messages that are received over the serial line The messages used by the Stentofon 9600 interface were derived from the Stentofon 9600 protocol as described in Message types on page 354
411. should be tested to make sure messages are being correctly recognized by the interface The Alarm Monitor should receive the appropriate messages if they have been set up correctly If the Alarms are not being shown on the Alarm Monitor then the appropriate input group description should be checked to make sure that it follows the format specified for that message type listed under the Adding or modifying input groups section of this document Make sure the appropriate Input Group prefix is being used in the description field and that it matches the one established upon installation in the scs XX cfg configuration file Actual device testing should be performed for those devices that are going to be monitored If there is a printer hooked up to the DMP SCS 1 receiver then the resulting messages that are being monitored by the interface can be compared against the printed output in terms of the parts of a message that are used to make up an input group or alarm record description field If there are messages that are not being recognized by the interface that have been set up to do so and they are being printed then call GE Security Customer Support for further assistance in debugging the problem 162 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Advanced configuration The DMP SCS 1 interface software supports an extended configuration that allows you to alter its behavior This configuration information is kept in the following files cas db t
412. sociated alarms that are created an entry should be added to your input file so that it may be automatically recreated at a later date 112 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Adding an input group Follow these steps to add an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups tab 2 Complete the Input Groups form for each input group These fields must be set as follows Delay Time 0 Boolean Type Individual Input Group State Enabled Open Condition Ignored e Short Condition Ignored e Broadcast State Changes No e Alarm 3 Click Save Should point to the alarm record generated for this input group 4 Click New to add another input group Figure 40 Sample input groups screen 68 Inputs Outputs Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones D Input Groups Inputs Output Groups Outputs Input Group Events Output Group Events Description Qa i No 9X g Q Define input Group Parent input Groups Output Groups Description CMDO7 FF23 FF13 12 31 Facility GLOBAL ai inim Open Condition Ignored Detected Input Group State Disabled Enabled Boolean Type OR Any AND All Short Condition 9 Ignored e Individual Detected Broadcast State Changes No Yes Alarm BLK 23 STA 13 Acknowledge w goo i E
413. solutely necessary to change the file you must be knowledgeable about text editors such as vi Before you begin please call GE Security Customer Support for assistance 257 The following is an example of the contents of the port configuration file for an OH Receiver device attached to port dev tty5 cas db text oh receiver ttyb cfg oh receiver tty5 cfg Copyright C 1995 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved This file generated from the following installation script oh receiver inst 1 4 06 09 03 This file contains the configuration information for the OH Receiver Alarm Interface Each interface that is running on a Picture Perfect system must have its own configuration file which contains the information on the specific serial line port the interface is going to read from These values are setup at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines The following values are setup based on your installation responses PortName dev tty5 PortBaud 9600 CharacterSize 7 Parity StopBits Xon Xoff Icanon CreateAlarm ReceiverNumber Hig ke DD rap cas db text oh_receiver redundant cfg The presence of this file indicates that it is a redundant installation The file contains the names of the two redundant hosts and an indication of whether or not the interface is to run redundantly The following is an example of the contents of the OH Receiver redundant configuration file cas db
414. ssages for a station can occur before the connection is established However once the connection is established no further requests will be honored until the pager station has been disconnected Message Type 0206 Call Disconnect The following is the structure of a Type 0206 message line Sync 0206 Call Handler CR LF Call Handler This is the 4 character Stentofon call handler disconnecting a call with valid values from FFFO through 9999 leading Fs used instead of Os This message type defines disconnection of a pager from the Stentofon Intercom System 326 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Extended configuration The Stentofon interface supports an extended configuration that allows you to alter its behavior This configuration information is kept in the following files cas db text stn ttyN cfg cas db text stentofon redundant cfg where ttyN is the name of the port specified for the interface cas db text stn ttyN cfg This file contains configuration information specific to the copy of the interface that connects to the Stentofon device attached to the tt yN port It consists of a series of text lines each containing a variable name followed by a value or setting The Stentofon interface reads the file upon startup to configure the port and the interface Note DO NOT change this file unless absolutely necessary If you find it absolutely necessary to change the file you must be knowle
415. stem on both hosts produces the alarms but only the software running on the primary host routes the alarms to the remote system using the primary network If one of the networks goes down communication switches to the other network In the case of a failover the RAN software on the redundant host takes over the routing of alarms to the remote system Note During installation RAN may be configured to safeguard against alarm loss during failover This means if the redundant host did not receive a response to an alarm sent by the primary host the redundant host resends the alarm when it takes over as primary Software requirements The software requirements for the Remote Alarm Notification interface and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system If you are using a stand alone Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect base base package Picture Perfect Remote Alarm Notification interface ran package Note A typical site requires a minimum of 5MB free disk space to install the Picture Perfect RAN software on the IBM RISC System 6000 For specific configuration details contact your GE Security Sales Representative Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required e Picture Perfect base base package e Picture Perfect redundant system pprs package e Picture Perfect Remote Alarm Notification interface ran package
416. store The CCTV interface software requires several data files for its operation These files are created during the software installation process and are summarized in Table 4 Normal use of the interface software may result in changes to one or more of these files A backup should be done on a regular basis A good practice is to do it at the same time that the Picture Perfect database is backed up The CCTV software installation procedure automatically updates the Picture Perfect backup configuration list file cas db text backup cfg so that future backups will include the files required for the CCTV interface Refer to the Picture Perfect documentation for information on how to backup and restore files Table4 CCTV interface data files Data file name Description cas db text package comm cfg TTY port extended configuration definition file is the port name such as ttyl forAIX ttyD001 for Linux cas db text package video loss cfg Videoloss tty port extended configuration definition file is the port name suchas tty2 forAIX ttyD002 for Linux cas db text package redundant cfg CCTV redundant configuration file Indicates that this is a redundant configuration Contains the host names cas db text lt package gt map Alarm map file that maps Picture Perfect alarm events to CCTV alarm numbers as described in Mapping CCTV monitored events on page 61 Appendix C Configurin
417. string The four ASCII characters represent a 16 bit BCD value that increments with each unique message packet Allowable values are 0001 to 9999 The value 9999 is succeeded by the value 0001 Picture Perfect will increment the sequence number when one of the following conditions occurs 1 A valid acknowledgment from the Central Station system has been received 2 A communications fault has been detected and the message has been resolved by an operator 90 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual The main body of the message is the lt data gt field and this portion of the message has the largest amount of variability See Table 8 on page 91 for a full list of messages event codes and corresponding message formats supported by this interface The size of the entire message packet is limited to 128 characters The Central Station system is expected to respond to Picture Perfect with a positive acknowledgment response packet Since Picture Perfect can send up to eight messages without acknowledgments per the SIA standard the Central Station system must indicate using the sequence number field to which message the response applies Response packets from the Central Station system take the general form lt LF gt lt CRC gt lt HT gt lt seq gt lt rec gt lt line gt lt CR gt If the Central Station system cannot interpret a message received from Picture Perfect it sends a negative acknowledgment response packet where the seque
418. t lt ACCOUNT NUMBER gt lt LOOP NUMBER gt lt LOOP TYPE gt lt STATUS gt 151 152 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual where IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters ACCOUNT NUMBER is a five digit string 1 to 99999 LOOP NUMBER isa three digit string 0 to 999 LOOP TYPE isa two character alphabetic string where an incoming SCS 1 numeric type range 0 7 is interpreted internally by Picture Perfect as O BL 1 FA 2 BA 3 SU 4 HU 5 EM 6 A1 and 7 A2 STATUS is a three character string T TBL Restore R Message Type To recognize Restore message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt ACCOUNT NUMBER gt lt LOOP NUMBER gt lt LOOP TYPE gt lt STATUS gt where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters ACCOUNT NUMBER is a five digit string 0 to 99999 LOOP NUMBER isa three digit string 0 to 999 LOOP TYPE isa two character alphabetic string where an incoming SCS 1 numeric type range 0 7 is interpreted internally by Picture Perfect as O BL 1 FA 2 BA 3 SU 4 HU 5 EM 6 A1 and 7 A2 STATUS isa three character string R RST Force Arm B Message Type To recognize System Trouble message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt ACCOUNT NUMBER gt lt LOOP NUMBER gt lt LOOP TYPE gt lt STATUS gt
419. t connection alarm is generated The default value for the cold timer is 60 seconds The second timer variable is called RemoteConnWarmTO It is used when the system has already been connected to the remote system When the connection is lost to the remote system this timer is started If the timer expires and there is still no connection the lost connection alarm generates The default value for the warm timer is 10 seconds This allows for a momentary glitch in communications as long as the communications are restored within 10 seconds If any glitch in communications is not acceptable then this timer can be set to 0 seconds for immediate reporting of a lost connection alarm Options for CONN lost alarms No matter how the lost connection alarm was issued when one occurs it reports with the input state set to alarm The lost connection alarm can be equated to an input point alarm It has two states ALARM and RESET The RESET condition occurs when the connection to the remote system is established Based on the requirements at your site it is possible to enforce that the lost connection alarm must be in a RESET state communications with the remote system are OK before the alarm can be cleared from the activity monitors This behavior is controlled through the RemoteConnResetReqd variable If RemoteConnResetReqd is set to Yes then the alarm must be reset before it can be cleared Remember that the Remove button can be used to remove all alarms
420. t Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Complete the Alarms form These fields should be set as follows Online Yes Immediate Reset Input Immediate Reset Input e Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Set the priority alarm routing facility and instructions as needed Note The routing must be set to one of the possible selections that includes the MONITOR for an alarm to show up on the Alarm Monitor and to allow control of CCTV cameras 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another alarm 351 Figure 125 Sample Alarm screen 4 Alarms Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Alarms Alarm Colors AlarmEvents Alarm Messages Alarm Responses Description 19 dd su El X o axy O8 l Alarm Description Instructions i Description Station 01 Connect j Facility 1 GLOBAL v 2ce m m i Priority j 150 l Route Definition ndm m Alarm Routing MONITOR AND HISTORY v K P j Online i Color Picker Ono Color Picker Yes Color Sample Inhibit Schedule Changes No Background Foreground Yes Immediate Reset Input No Yes Immediate Dial Required No Yes Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Manual Reset Outputs Iz gt Duration Reset Outputs Results 0 r
421. t group prefix to be used when creating the records It must be 4 to 5 characters with the last character s numeric For example STNO1 NOTE This prefix must be the same one that is used by the interface that is being targeted Refer to the documentation for more information about input group prefixes Enter the input group prefix Enter the name of your input group prefix The input group prefix you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it The input group prefix you entered was STNO1 Is this correct y n y To confirm the input group prefix accept the default y by pressing Enter Enter n to re enter the prefix If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the value If you entered y messages similar to the following will be displayed regarding the selection of a default facility for the Stentofon interface Ke dE K ee Default Stentofon Facility assignment portion LE EE kk When the input group and alarm records are created they will require an associated facility You need to select the default facility that will be used when creating the input group and alarm records if an explicit one is not specified The currently available defined facilities will be displayed and you will need to make a selection from the provided list If you need to create a new facility specifically for the Stentofon input groups and alarms then you should exit this program create the fac
422. t host is accomplished using a serial line connection The communication is unidirectional meaning the interface only receives data from the firepanel and does not send anything back The serial line used by this interface will be through the EST panel printer ports Messages or alarms recognized by the EST interface are looked up in the Picture Perfect database using the input group table Picture Perfect must be set up with the appropriate input groups and alarms before they can be recognized Optionally an output group and associated outputs can be associated with an input group Redundant Systems The EST interface to Picture Perfect also supports operations in a Picture Perfect Redundant System PPRS environment where two hosts have connectivity to a single fire alarm system Connectivity is achieved using a splitter between the Picture Perfect system and the fire alarm system This allows the physical connection of the fire alarm system to an RS 232 serial port on each Picture Perfect host computer In a redundant configuration the EST system interface software executes on both Picture Perfect hosts and both receive alarm notifications However only the interface software executing on the primary host processes the alarm and forwards it to the Alarm Monitor Normal pprs processing will result in the alarm appearing on the backup host s Alarm Monitor Whenever an alarm notification is received by the interface software it determines if it
423. t since all of the unique information for a Commend protocol message is located in the input group description However each alarm description in the database must be unique The recommended format for alarm descriptions is to identify the block station and the type of action that occurred For the example input group descriptions given previously the corresponding alarm descriptions might be as follows BLK 23 STA 13 Request BLK 23 STA 13 Clear BLK 23 STA 13 Acknowledge BLK 23 STA 13 Release BLK 23 COD 01 Duress An example of a valid alarm record is shown in Figure 41 Sample alarm screen on page 114 Alternatively a single alarm could be defined for all three actions as follows BLK 23 STA 13 The Alarm Routing should be set to the desired routing If you do not want a particular alarm to be routed to the printer or history file then you should select None from the Set Alarm Routing picklist 114 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Follow these steps to add an alarm description 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Complete the Alarms form These fields should be set as follows Online Yes e Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Set the priority alarm routing and instructions as needed Note The routing must be set to one of the possible selections that includes the Monitor for an alarm to show up on the Alarm Monitor and to allow control of CCTV cameras Click Save 4 Click New to
424. t up through Picture Perfect In this appendix E077 7 PEE 94 Software requirements liii cote sia eee ed Ee a eR Re e PAR 95 Hardware requirements 96 de coo P 99 94 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Introduction The Commend interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the intercom system and recognizes only the predefined message types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect The Commend Intercom system communicates with the Picture Perfect host through a serial line connection Messages or alarms recognized by the intercom interface are looked up in the Picture Perfect database using the input group table Picture Perfect will have to be set up with the appropriate input groups and alarms before they can be recognized Optionally an output group and associated outputs can be tied to an input group This is the standard method for setting up other hardware on a Picture Perfect system The details of setting up the appropriate database records will be covered in more detail in the section Configuration on page 99 The communication from the intercom system to the host is unidirectional No handshaking is required for the interface The protocol of the interface is the serial transfer of information one line at a time Redundant systems The Commend interface to Picture Perfect supports operations in a redundant Picture Perfect environment where two hosts have connectivity t
425. tabase records to be entered on the system To add to the complexity there may be more than one Stentofon 9600 Intercom System interface running on a Picture Perfect system The stngen9600 tool will aid in the maintenance aspect when there are multiple Stentofon 9600 Intercom System interfaces installed and running When a Stentofon 9600 intercom is added or removed the tool can be used to quickly install or uninstall those database records associated with a particular interface This is possible by carefully segregating the input group and alarm database records for each Stentofon 9600 interface running on the Picture Perfect system The install portion of this tool is explained in the next section See stngen9600 uninstall on page 345 for an explanation of the uninstall portion stngen9600 install The install portion of the tool generates input group and alarm database records Before running the install program you will need to Create an input file e Know the input group prefix e Create a list of the paging stations that are going to be monitored This kind of report can be obtained from the Stentofon 9600 system 336 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Input file An input file is required when using the install portion of the stngen9600 tool It describes the types of messages and pager locations to be monitored by the Stentofon 9600 alarm interface The input file is a text editable file that must be created pr
426. tation F110 Request kalatel l tty3 F110 Connect Station F110 Connect kalatel 2 tty3 F110 Disconnect Station F110 Disconnect kalatel 3 tty3 FFF3 Request Station FFF3 Request kalatel 4 tty3 FFF3 Connect Station FFF3 Connect kalatel 5 tty3 FFF3 Disconnect Station FFF3 Disconnect kalatel 6 tty3 FFFO Request Station FFFO Request kalatel l tty2 FFFO Connect Station FFFO Connect kalatel 2 tty2 FFFO Disconnect Station FFFO Disconnect kalatel 3 tty2 An example of the input groups and alarm records that are generated from one line of an input file is shown in the section nput group and alarm records generated by stngen on page 309 Input file recommendations Always keep the input file for future reference on how your system has been set up It will be extremely useful in understanding what database records have been generated It will be required information for Customer Support should you need help in configuring the interface DO NOT re use the original input file that has had data added to it without doing an uninstall first Uninstalls are discussed in later sections If you have new data for the generator and have not uninstalled using stngen then you should uninstall or put it in a separate input file Input file error checking The input file will be checked for error conditions before any data records are generated If an error occurs with
427. te al d R N01 01 Request Alarm N A 01 06 200 0 17 09 01 06 200 Station 1 Connect STNO01 01 Connect 01 06 2005 10 17 22 01 06 2005 Station 1 Disconnect STNO01 01 Disconnect 01 06 2005 10 17 51 01 06 2005 Station 10 Request STNO01 10 Request 01 06 2005 07 04 50 01 06 2005 Station 10 Connect STNO01 10 Connect 01 06 2005 07 03 48 01 06 2005 Station 3 Request STNO1 3 Request 01 06 2005 07 02 21 01 06 2005 The above figure of the Alarm Monitor shows a possible alarm sequence This scenario would be for a system that used the input group prefix STNO1 and has appropriate input group and alarm records to recognize the conditions coming from the Stentofon 9600 intercom Below is an explanation of the information shown by the display 353 The Alarm Description column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate alarm record that was created manually or by the stngen9600 tool The Location column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate input group record which was created manually or by the stngen9600 tool Lines 1 3 Paging Station 1 completed a communication sequence with the Stentofon 9600 It issued a request for communication received a connection and then terminated the connection Lines 4 5 Paging Station 10 is in the process of communicating with the Stentofon 9600 It issued a request for communication and received a connection which has not yet terminated Line 6 Paging Station 3 has
428. te serial interface board SIB or the TB1 printer connection on the Notifier AFP 400 panel s CPU 400 control panel Messages or alarms recognized by the Notifier interface are looked up in the Picture Perfect database using the input group table Picture Perfect must be set up with the appropriate input groups and alarms before they can be recognized Optionally an output group and associated outputs can be associated with an input group Redundant systems The Notifier Fire Alarm System interface to Picture Perfect also supports operations in a Redundant Picture Perfect environment where two hosts have connectivity to a single fire alarm system Connectivity is achieved using a splitter between the Picture Perfect system and the fire alarm system This allows the physical connection of the fire alarm system to an RS 232 serial port on each Picture Perfect host computer In a redundant configuration the Notifier fire alarm system interface software executes on both Picture Perfect hosts and both receive alarm notifications However only the interface software executing on the primary host processes the alarm and forwards it to the Alarm Monitor Normal pprs processing will result in the alarm appearing on the backup host s Alarm Monitor Whenever an alarm notification is received by the interface software it determines if it is executing on the primary host Alarm notifications received by the interface software executing on the redundant host
429. ted Location Id from the same report entry as used for the Input Group and Alarm IDs Once a valid Location Id has been entered you will be prompted for the Outgoing AlphaCom Alarm Number to which the Picture Perfect alarm you have just specified will be mapped Enter the number of the AlphaCom alarm that causes the AlphaCom Exchange device to perform the actions you want for this event when the Picture Perfect alarm occurs The range of 1 to 9999 can be used for AlphaCom alarm numbers You will now be given the option to enter an associated alarm description for this mapping The alarm description is useful when identifying a mapping entry on a report Enter y to add an alarm description or n to omit the description Ifyouselect y you are prompted for the alarm description The Picture Perfect Alarm description may be used although any description that enables the user to identify which alarm it is may be used The description MUST fit on one line The entry should be as concise as possible because when the report is printed the entries that are larger than the width of the paper will be wrapped to the next line and the report may not be readable Ifyou select n the information you have entered displays and you will be asked to confirm the entries Skip to step 8 Enter the Alarm Description The information you have entered including the alarm description displays and you will be asked to confirm the entries If the entries ar
430. ted printer Dismissed messages cause the matching Alarm Monitor entry to be reset The Facility Integrator Computer Is A PC based Platform Communication With The Picture Perfect host is using a serial line connection using the PC s serial port The communication is uni directional meaning the interface only receives data from the Facility Integrator and does not send anything back During installation 40 to 200 database slots are reserved in the Picture Perfect Informix input group and alarm tables These represent the number of Facility Integrator alarms of those that Picture Perfect handles that can be simultaneously displayed on the Alarm Monitor The input group and alarm descriptions are generated dynamically from the information extracted from the Facility Integrator s message When the number of reserved slots are used up the next unique alarm will overwrite the oldest alarm Redundant systems The CBAS interface to Picture Perfect supports operations in a Redundant Picture Perfect environment where two hosts have connectivity to a single Facility Integrator Connectivity is achieved using a splitter between the Picture Perfect system and the Facility Integrator This allows the physical connection of the Facility Integrator to an RS 232 serial port on each Picture Perfect host computer In a redundant configuration the CBAS interface software executes on both Picture Perfect hosts and both receive alarm notifications from the
431. ter a port from the list exactly as it appears for example For Linux dev ttyS2 For RS 6000 dev tty10 If you entered a valid tty port from the list the following message will appear Pleas nter the baud rate for the selected port 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 1200 If you entered a tty port that is not in the list displayed you will be asked to re enter the tty port Enter the baud rate of the interface console port The selected baud displays and you will be asked to confirm the setting Selected baud rate is 9600 Is this baud rate correct y n y Press or y to accept or press n to change the number If you selected n you will be asked to re enter the baud rate If you selected y messages similar to the following will appear Setting default Monitor Id to 00 Setting Alarm On function code to Setting Alarm Off function code to Creating Kalatel Command Strings Table cas db text kalatel command strings table Creating Kalatel cctv map file cas db text ktd map Installing CCTV SQL Reports Loaded report CCTV Alarms Loaded report CCTV Areas Loaded report CCTV Doors Loaded report CCTV Hosts Loaded report CCTV Inputs Loaded report CCTV Micros CommFailure Loaded report CCTV Micros Overflow Loaded report CCTV Micros ReaderFailure Loaded report CCTV Readers Chapter 2 19 Installing and removing Installing on a Redundant system This section descri
432. ter hooked up to that system Figure 51 Sample Alarm Monitor Screen Line 2 Waarm Monitor Ja NS Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor User Monitor Performance Monitor New Alarms 11 Total Alarms 11 Highest Priority 50 a ipti Location Condition D Device Date 1 3523 A2343Supervisory SCS1 35235 234 SU ALM 01 06 2005 ELS 01 06 2005 SCS1 WRN Alrm bell silen SCS1 10010 34 01 06 2005 15 48 33 01 06 2005 FIRE ALARM SCS1 90123 321 FA ALM 01 06 2005 15 49 55 01 06 2005 USER 545 ADDED NUMBER 460 SCS1 55566 CODE ADDED 545 460 01 06 2005 15 51 50 01 06 2005 DEVICE 2121 MISSING SCS1 94923 DEVICE RESTORED 212 01 06 2005 15 52 48 01 06 2005 USER 777 PERIM LATE TO CLOSESCS1 22331 LATE CLOSE 777 01 01 06 2005 15 53 21 01 06 2005 USER 565 INTERIOR ARMED SCS1 98706 ARMED 565 02 01 06 2005 15 54 44 01 06 2005 LOOP 221 IS IN BYPASS SCS166666 221 999 BYPASS 01 06 2005 15 56 12 01 06 2005 1 10001 N20990800840012 SCS1 1 10001 N20990800840012 01 06 2005 15 57 42 01 06 2005 1 35353 S56 SCS1 35353 56 01 06 2005 16 01 12 01 06 2005 Line 9 Line 10 The preceding figure of the Alarm Monitor shows a possible set of alarms for an interface using the SCS 1 Input Group Prefix As previously mentioned in the manual known account numbers of known message types will generate the Alarm Description to which the Input Group Description maps For this interface the Location column on the Alarm M
433. terface User Manual Figure 10 Example of adding an AlphaCom alarm f alphacom map SN kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk A Add an AlphaCom controlled alarm D Delete an outgoing AlphaCom controlled alarm P Print a hardcopy of all AlphaCom controlled alarms LIE E ME E E E X Exit kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Selection a Adding an outgoing AlphaCom controlled alarm Input Group ID 1 999999 102 Picture Perfect Alarm ID 1 999999 21 Location ID 1 99999 45 Outgoing AlphaCom alarm number 1 9999 15 You may now enter an optional alarm description to identify this mapping entry For example the Picture Perfect alarm description may be used Do you wish to enter an alarm description y n y y The alarm description must fit on one line Enter the alarm description then hit lt ENTER gt 00 1 00 Door Forced Open Adding Picture Perfect input group 102 alarm 21 location 45 Alphacom alarm 15 Alarm Description 00 1 00 Door Forced Open Is this OK y n y y Adding an alarm to AlphaCom map entry The following AlphaCom Node Numbers were configured at installation time for the specified ports Node Number Port 1 dev tty1 2 dev tty4 10 dev tty2 20 dev tty3 Enter the AlphaCom Node Numbers from the above list for which alarm 15 will be mapped The Node Numbers should be separated by a space or tab Node numbers 1 1
434. tes to the loop number 1 9 0 10 and DD equates to the detector or module number 01 99 Leading zeroes are significant in this column and should be used For example if you have a device on loop 2 detector number 9 then the LDD number would be 209 The FFF format used for the Notifier 400 is a three digit number that may include decimal points The format for Zone Disable is ZXXX where Z is fixed character and XXX is the zone number making this a four character field for these message types The zone number is only applicable for Zone Disable message types The nfrgen tool will specifically check for the uppercase Z character and that the column is a total of four characters when the Zone Disable message type is used ALARM DESCRIPTION The fourth column is used as the basis for the Alarm Description field for the alarm record that is created for the associated input group record This column should be used as a custom device label that helps describe more information about the device or detector It can be up to 59 characters in length and either be upper or lower case 212 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual It is acceptable to use the same alarm description for multiple input file data lines when installing the data generator records Only one alarm record will be generated in this case and the appropriate input group records will point to the same alarm record Note Do not use an alarm description that matches the
435. text oh_receiver redundant cfg oh_receiver redundant cfg 1 4 Copyright C 2002 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved oh_receiver redundant cfg 1 4 06 09 03 This file contains the configuration information for the OH Receiver interface for redundant operations These values are set up at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines 258 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual RedundantOper X RedundantHosts primaryl backupl Interface data file backup and restore The OH Receiver interface software requires several data files for its operation These files are created during the software installation process and are summarized in Table 15 OH Receiver Interface Data Files Backups should be done on a regular basis A good practice is to do it at the same time the Picture Perfect database is backed up The OH Receiver software installation procedure automatically updates the Picture Perfect backup configuration list file cas db text backup cfg so that future backups will include the files required for the OH Receiver interface Refer to the Picture Perfect documentation for information on how to backup and restore files Table 15 OH Receiver Interface Data Files Data file name Description cas db text oh receiver cfg TTY port extended configuration definition files is the port name for example ttyl forAIX ttyD001 for Linux cas db text oh receiver redundant cfg OH Receiver redun
436. th the following descriptions NFR1 TROUBL SYSTEM TROUBLE NFR1 ACK TB SYSTEM TROUBLE NFR1 CLR TB SYSTEM TROUBLE NFR1 ACL TB SYSTEM TROUBLE The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation Annunciator Trouble Message Type To recognize Annunciator Trouble message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt STATUS ANNUNCIATOR XX where IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters STATUS can be one of the following TROUBL ACK TB CLR TB or ACL TB e ANNUNCIATOR is a fixed field e XX is the two digit annunciator number 01 32 For numbers less than ten add a leading zero Note When monitoring this message type you must consult the Notifier panel for the Annunciator Trouble index 228 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual For example to configure annunciator number 25 for the four available status types you would create four input groups each with the following descriptions NFR1 TROUBL ANNUNCIATOR 25 NFR1 ACK TB ANNUNCIATOR 25 NFR1 CLR TB ANNUNCIATOR 25 NFR1 ACL TB ANNUNCIATOR 25 The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation Walk Test Message Type To recognize Walk Test message types use the following format in the input group description Walk Test messages are received when the Notifier pan
437. that is running on a Picture Perfect system must have its own configuration file which contains the information on the specific serial line port the interface is going to read from It also contains the unique input group prefix that the interface will use to recognize specific input group database records using this prefix The InpGrpPrefix parameter is a required parameter in the configuration file This parameter is the prefix that must be used in the description field for all input groups that are to be recognized by the interface If this parameter is changed here it must be changed for all the input groups that are using it as a prefix This prefix is case sensitive so the declaration in here must match the one used in the input group description This description must not exceed 4 characters and the last character or characters should be numeric The input group prefix declared in here will be read when the interface is started If more than one interface is installed then the input group prefix must be unique in each configuration file An example prefix would be NFR1 and the next interface that is installed could be NFR2 The following values are uniqu NOTE In using the Notifier INA only 1 per system is permitted so the input group prefix will always be NFR change unless instructed by GE Icanon The following values are setup NotifierType InpGrpPrefix PortName PortB
438. the Alarm Monitor the Count column will increment for those alarms that have come in multiple times The only way to remove Notifier alarms from the Alarm Monitor is to use the remove button to remove all alarms or to respond and remove them individually The time displayed in the Alarm Monitor is the time that Picture Perfect maintains and not the time from the Notifier panel Monitoring alarms during notifier reporting The Notifier panel is capable of producing a variety of reports about the system and points that have been installed Reports generated to the Notifier printer are normally interrupted by the panel when a pending condition Alarm Trouble etc occurs and are sometimes printed within the report itself Since the Notifier interface uses the same serial line as the printer the pending conditions will be detected by the interface and properly monitored if they have been set up to do so because a pending condition can be distinguished from an actual line contained within a report If the interface has been set up to monitor Walk Test messages then the messages that are part of the Unprogrammed Uninstalled or Untested Device reports will be recognized since that is when these kind of messages are received The messages that are part of the Tested Devices report will be ignored since the actual test messages are recognized as a device is tested during a walk test 236 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Figure 74 Sample alarm m
439. the AlphaCom interface has been configured for a redundant Picture Perfect environment then the changes made to the map file are reflected on the redundant host Refer to the following sections for more information Adding an alarm on page 34 Deleting an alarm on page 37 Changing an alarm on page 38 Printing the map file on page 38 Exiting the program on page 40 Torunthe alphacom map program you will need to be logged onto the serveras root To run the albhacom map program type at the command prompt alphacom map 34 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Adding an alarm This section describes how to add a new AlphaCom controlled alarm Refer to Example of adding an AlphaCom alarm on page 36 to see the messages and prompts that display when adding an alarm Follow these steps to add an AlphaCom alarm 1 At the Selection prompt type a to add a new AlphaCom controlled alarm A message displays to confirm a new alarm is being added and you will be prompted for the Input Group Id of the alarm to be added Enter the Input Group Id The Input Group Id can be found on one of the CCTV SQL reports listed on page 32 Once a valid Input Group Id has been entered you will be prompted for the associated Alarm Id Enter the associated Alarm Id from the same report entry as used for the Input Group Id Once a valid Alarm Id has been entered you will be prompted for the associated Location Id Enter the associa
440. the Picture Perfect stand alone and the Picture Perfect redundant system are listed below Stand alone system If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual AIX Linux CCTV controller provided by the CCTV manufacturer Refer to your CCTV manual for dip switch settings Use the default settings CCTV cameras and monitors Serial Ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COM1 or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the CCTV communication program is started Cable to connect the Picture Perfect system to the CCTV switcher console port Refer to Figure 15 through Figure 24 as appropriate for your CCTV interface Figure 15 American Dynamics cable pinouts terminal block to DB25F and terminal block to DB9F Pin 4 Pin 5 Rx Tx Pin 3 Pin 6 Pin 2 Pin7 Shield GND e e GND Print Le a e j Pins 8 Pin Modular Terminal Block Terminal Picture Perfect System Terminal Block
441. the command cas bin profile 3 Enterthe command cas bin msan set single Ene The following is a sample output from this command Querying the tps daemons table Updating tps daemons entry 54 cas bin msan R A 20030421 175910 statement UPDATE tps daemons SET pathname cas bin msan modify date 20030423 modify time 195449 WHERE id 54 statement processed OK 1 rows affected Successfully update tps daemons table entry 54 cas bin msan R A 20030421 175910 Multiple device support issues The original design of the output interfaces supported only a single output device and allowed only one command to be sent in response to a Picture Perfect alarm event With the introduction of enhanced output interfaces the design was extended to support multiple devices connected to a single Picture Perfect host system In addition any Picture Perfect alarm event can cause output of commands to multiple devices Two utilities are provided to turn the multiple device feature on or off These are described below For compatibility with existing systems the default mode during output interface software installation or upgrade is single device support You must shut down and restart Picture Perfect for the change to take effect Note Ifa new output is installed or you are upgrading an existing output interface and you were previously using the multiple device support feature you must re activate the multiple device suppo
442. the input file then the Default SCS Facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid facility id values create a report using as the SQL statement Select id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file Priority The seventh column is used to specify the priority that will be used for the alarm record generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted for the Default SCS Priority a number in the range 1 500 If a Priority value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Priority will be used 129 Column descriptions for s System Alarm Trouble Supervisory Message Types Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Msg Type Account Message Modifier Alarm Description Facility Priority 1 char 5 digits 1 to 15 chars 4 digits 1 to 60 characters 1 to 10 digits 1 to 3 digits S DEVICE MISSING 0 9999 lor 1 500 DEVICE RESTORED 1 2 147 483 647 or ABORT Note Three additional optional fields may be specified identifying a CCTV switcher name see the list of Picture Perfect supported CCTV names in the section Mapping CCTV monitored events on page 61 such as kalatel or allplex a CCTV number the CCTV alarm number that will be sent to the switcher when the SCS alarm is received and the TTY port by which the switcher is connected to the Picture Perfect host When specifying the port only use the tty portion of the name For example if the
443. thin your system and display the required information The information includes e Alarm Id nput Group Id e Location Id For example If you want an alarm to be sent to the CCTV system whenever the door with the description 000 1 00 DOOR is forced open first generate a CCTV Doors Report to obtain the required information Generating an SQL report Follow these steps to generate a SQL report 1 From the Reports menu select the Report menu item then click the Report tab 2 From the Select a Report Category list pane select the category for this report When you select a category the existing reports in that category display in the Select a Report list pane 3 To open an existing report select it from the Select a Report list pane then from the toolbar click Run 4 Click Print to display the Print Preview page From this window you may Save to pdf or Print to your local printer Mapping CCTV monitored events Each CCTV interface package has an assigned prefix American Dynamics amdyn Burle Allegiant alle Burle Allplex allp Grundig grundig Javelin jav Kalatel ktd MaxPro maxpro Panasonic Proteus pfw Panasonic 550 panasonic Pelco pelco Pelcob pelcob Vicon Viper viper Use the program package prefix cctv map to add delete and print the alarms that are sent to and received from the CCTV system where package prefix is the prefix for the CCTV interface package as listed above The package prefix cctv map pr
444. tifier panel The Notifier Interface uses the printer connections on the appropriate SIB 232 SIB 2048 or SIB NET boards on the Notifier panel The cable should be wired to use the P3 connector pins 1 4 on the appropriate SIB board Figure 5 5 of Chapter 1 Installation of the AM2020 AFP1010 manual Revision C describes the exact wiring that must be used for this interface For the Notifier AFP400 system Notifier AFP400 Intelligent Fire Detection and Alarm System panel Custom cable to connect from the Picture Perfect system EIA 232 port to the AFP 400 TBI printer port The required pin connections for this cable are shown in the AFP 400 Analog Fire Panel Installation Manual Chapter 2 Installation in the Section Remote Printers and CRTs Subsection Connecting a PRN 4 Remote Printer Document 50253 01 05 96 Rev A P N50253 A1 ECN 96 002 The pinouts description and figure describes the wiring that must be done except the 25 pin printer port will be replaced with the Picture Perfect system s EIA 232 port on the adapter Figure 66 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to AFP 400 System 25 pin to TB1 Picture Perfect System 25 pin TX 2 RX 3 REF 7 AFP 400 TB1 2 TB1 2 1 TB1 1 3 TB1 3 Figure 67 Overview of a stand alone Picture Perfect and a Notifier interface ASC Ier QR LOK PQ SSSSNSSSSNS 205 206 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Redundant system I
445. to i nstall or u ninstall data records i u i To use the install option type u The following messages will display You have chosen the UNINSTALL portion of this script You must enter the input group prefix to uninstall the Stentofon database records This is the first 5 to 5 characters used in the description field of the input group records Entering this prefix will result in the removal of the input group and associated alarm records from the database If running multiple interfaces make sure you enter the prefix that matches the input group prefix used for that particular interface If properly installed each Stentofon interface should have a different input group prefix that is used specifically for that interface Do you know the input group prefix and want to continue y n y To continue press y To stop press n If you chose to continue the following message will display Enter the input group prefix Enter the input group prefix The input group prefix you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it The input group prefix you entered was STNO1 Is this correct y n y 10 To continue press y To stop press n 11 347 If you chose to continue the records will be deleted and you will see messages similar to the following The input group prefix being used is STNO1 Making alarm id checks Deleting input group and alarm records The following
446. to the Stentofon Intercom System Refer to Figure 114 304 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Figure 114 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to intercom system DB25M to Port C Picture Perfect Stentofon TouchLine Host Computer Intercom System DB25M Port C GND 7 Pin 80B GND Rx3 Pin 82B Tx Pin 83B CTS Pin 84B RTS Figure 115 Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and intercom interface i l 53015322A 305 Configuration The Stentofon interface to Picture Perfect acts as a filter by recognizing predefined messages that are received over the serial line The messages used by the Stentofon interface were derived from the Stentofon TouchLine Exchange protocol as described in Message types on page 323 These messages must be configured on the Picture Perfect system There are two methods available to configure these messages 1 Automatically using the stngen data generator tool 2 Manually using Picture Perfect If you plan to enter many messages at once we strongly recommend you use the stngen command line tool Using stngen exclusively to create or modify data records will enable you to keep track of the specific messages that are being monitored for a particular panel on a specific port This tool is explained in detail in the following section However if you choose to use Picture Perfect to insert the database records this procedure is explained starting on page 316 with th
447. tor For any alarm to be monitored or recorded the appropriate routing must be selected from the Alarms form for each alarm The Alarm Description and Location columns correspond to the Alarm and Input Group record description fields respectively From this information the operator should be able to tell the paging station and action from the reported alarm The operator will be able to respond and remove these alarm conditions from the monitor but no communication will be sent back to the Stentofon 9600 since this is a one way communication All messages recognized by the Stentofon 9600 interface will show a condition of Alarm and an input state of N A As with other Picture Perfect alarms that come into the Alarm Monitor the Count column will increment for those alarms that have come in multiple times To remove Stentofon 9600 alarms from the Alarm Monitor use the purge button to remove all alarms or click on the alarm to bring up an individual window and remove them individually The time displayed in the Alarm Monitor is the time that Picture Perfect received the message from the Stentofon 9600 device Figure 126 Sample Alarm Monitor screen Mb Alarm Monitor LLL dp E Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor User Monitor Performance Monitor J H New Alarms 6 Total Alarms 6 Display is now active Highest Priority 50 Alarm Description Condition D Device Date Device Time Host Da
448. ts e Xon xoff control Refer to the specific manufacturer s documentation for more information Installation of an interface for Picture Perfect involves these basic steps 1 Defining a port 2 Installing the Picture Perfect base software if necessary 3 Installing the Picture Perfect Redundant System pprs software if necessary If it is necessary to install the pprs software it should be installed and configured on the primary and backup systems prior to the interface installation 4 Installing the Picture Perfect interface software These steps are described in this chapter using a Kalatel CCTV interface as an example Because each interface differs slightly please observe the screen prompts during the installation and answer the questions appropriately Chapter 2 11 Installing and removing Defining a port Linux When you install the software driver for the Digi board the serial ports will automatically become available Refer to your Picture Perfect 4 5 Installation Manual for information about adding Digi board drivers Note Once the serial port is available do not define the port in the Picture Perfect Devices Ports window AIX The Picture Perfect serial ports used to communicate with the interface system will be configured and reserved using the IBM AIX System Management Interface Tool SMIT utility from the system console In addition the serial port baud rate connection and physical location of the port
449. ture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Appendix L Configuring a Simplex interface This appendix provides information on configuring the Simplex 4100 fire alarm system which allows Picture Perfect to act as a secondary monitoring system for the Simplex fire and other life safety alarms In this appendix EE Dah ode 286 Software requirements cesses 287 Hardware vequiFemnenis ois doi boc chk ssec GR et aed o Roe s 288 an cU pos PECIA 292 Extended CEA NEEN sette xe ade e tes 296 Interface data file backup and restore 60 0 297 286 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Introduction The Picture Perfect host access control and alarm monitoring system which interfaces with the Simplex 4100 fire alarm system has been developed to receive specific alarms and resets The objective of this interface is to allow Picture Perfect to act as a secondary monitoring system for the Simplex fire and other life safety alarms This unique combination is an optional software package which generates a Picture Perfect alarm when an alarm is tripped or reset on the Simplex panel The Simplex 4100 sends this data using RS232 serial port to Picture Perfect by uni directional communication that is Picture Perfect will only receive data from Simplex it will not transmit data to Simplex With this interface the operator can now use the Picture Perfect graphical user features to observe alarm conditions detected by the Simplex system as oppose
450. ture Perfect alarms that have been mapped to the AlphaCom alarms The AlphaCom Exchange alarm will initiate an action such as a pre recorded audio message The interface between the Stentofon Alphacom Exchange and Picture Perfect is bi directional with the option to configure the AlphaCom interface to resend messages if communication is lost Commend The Commend interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Commend Intercom System and recognizes only the pre defined intercom message types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect The data transfer is uni directional from the Commend Intercom System to the interface on the Picture Perfect host across a serial line connection with XON XOFF enabled ACK NAKs will also be transmitted between the systems No handshaking is required for the interface Stentofon Stentofon_MCH The Stentofon interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Stentofon Touchline Intercom System Exchange Models 52 8 and 120 12 and recognizes only the predefined intercom messages built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect The data transfer is uni directional from the Stentofon Intercom System to the interface on the Picture Perfect host across a serial line connection An additional Stentofon interface the Stentofon MCH that is designed to support Stentofon Intercom systems with multiple call handlers a firmware enhancement and
451. u are not finished making your changes but are leaving the package prefix cctv map program temporarily you can enter n This will not inform the Picture Perfect system that the mapping file has been changed However if Picture Perfect is restarted the current mapping file is read automatically In other words all your changes will be read at that time whether or not you are done with them Refer to Figure 33 Example of exiting the program on page 69 to see the prompts and messages that display when exiting from the package prefix cctv map program Figure 33 Example of exiting the program f ktd cctv map Se H ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k kkk kk k A Add a KALATEL CCTV controlled alarm D Delete a KALATEL CCTV controlled alarm P Print a hardcopy of all KALATEL CCTV controlled alarms X Exit X X kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Selection x You have made changes to the mapping file Do you want to inform the system of these changes y n y Sent SIGUSR2 signal to kalatel interface task ktd_tty5 pid 22704 on this host Sent SIGUSR2 signal to kalatel interface task ktd_tty7 pid 22706 on this ko Se A Configuring and monitoring alarms in Picture Perfect There are no special alarms that need to be configured o
452. ual window and remove them individually The time displayed in the Alarm Monitor is the time that Picture Perfect received the message from the Exchange 321 322 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Figure 118 Sample Alarm Monitor screen Alarm Monitor Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor User Monitor Performance Monitor il Q E x a ED New Alarms 6 Total Alarms 6 Display is now active Highest Priority 50 0 Alarm Description Location Condition Device Time Req NO1 01 Request Alarm 01 0 0 17 09 Station 1 Connect STN01 01 Connect 01 06 2005 10 17 22 01 06 2005 Station 1 Disconnect STN01 01 Disconnect 01 06 2005 10 17 51 01 06 2005 Station 10 Request STN01 10 Request 01 06 2005 07 04 50 01 06 2005 Station 10 Connect STNO01 10 Connect 01 06 2005 07 03 48 01 06 2005 Station 3 Request STNO1 3 Request 01 06 2005 07 02 21 01 06 2005 The above figure of the Alarm Monitor shows a possible alarm sequence This scenario would be for a system that used the input group prefix STNOI and has appropriate input group and alarm records to recognize the conditions coming from the Stentofon intercom Below is an explanation of the information shown by the display The Alarm Description column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate alarm record that was created manually or by the stngen tool The Location column corresponds to the description fiel
453. uct s 11 kalatel Kalatel KTD 312 CCTV Interface 16 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual 10 11 Is this correct y n y To confirm type y Ene You will be asked to confirm the installation Installing kalatel Picture Perfect Multi package Installation 4 5 04 10 09 Copyright C 1989 2009 GE Security Inc Installing from image in media Linux pp Do you want to install the Picture Perfect KALATEL Package y n y To confirm type y Enter Messages similar to the following will display Picture Perfect NLS Text Save 4 5 01 16 06 Copyright C 2000 2006 GE Security Tue Sep 15 08 43 57 EDT 2009 e This package has no nls or help files to save Picture Perfect KALATEL Package Installation Version 4 5 04 10 09 Copyright C 1989 2009 GE Security Inc Installing this package will configure this server to interface to KALATEL CCTV system Starting the Informix database Done Configuring ports This section describes how to configure the ports and identify the baud rate The instructions are listed below During the installation the following message displays Digiboard port expander check The Kalatel Interface requires the use of a serial port Do you have a digiboard or port expander attached to the host y n y n Press or y to indicate that you have a Digiboard or port expander or press n to indicate no Digiboard or port expande
454. undant cfg Universal Intrusion redundant configuration file Indicates that this is a redundant configuration Contains the host names
455. up Prefix on page 140 for more information When establishing an input group record the description field must follow the format for the appropriate message type Uppercase characters are required and there should be exactly one space between each field for each of the message types described in the following sections Note Be aware that input groups and associated alarms that are created manually will be removed if the uninstall portion of the scsgen tool is run since it removes records according to the input group prefix Database records added manually using Picture Perfect should be added to an scsgen input file so they may later be recreated in the event scsgen uninstall is used Alarm A Message Type To recognize Alarm message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt ACCOUNT NUMBER LOOP NUMBER LOOP TYPE STATUS where IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters e ACCOUNT NUMBER isa five digit string From 0 to 99999 e LOOP NUMBER is a three digit string 0 to 999 LOOP TYPE isatwo character alphabetic string where an incoming SCS 1 numeric type range 0 7 is interpreted internally by Picture Perfect as O BL 1 FA 2 BA 3 SU 4 HU 5 EM 6 A1 and 7 A2 STATUS isa three character string A ALM Trouble T Message Type To recognize Trouble message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP g
456. up records outside of the ones to be removed the tool will not remove any records and will notify the user of this condition This situation must be corrected by the user before any records can be removed using the tool The input group user interface can be used to correct this situation by re assigning the alarm that it is linked to so that it does not conflict with alarms that are going to be removed This is to prevent the accidental removal of alarm records to which other input group records are linked Input group and alarm records generated by stngen9600 The input file processed by stngen9600 produces input group and alarm database records that are inserted into the database when the tool is run The input group records created are unique for each valid line in the input file This is done by combining the input group prefix pager identification number and communication activity information into the description field of an input group record If optional CCTV information is specified a new entry will be created and appended to the mapping table file for the specified CCTV switcher interface program For example let s examine the second line of data in the example input file described earlier and assume an input group prefix of STNO3 0l Request Station 01 Request llallegiant 0 tty2 This line would generate one input group record with the following Description field STNO1 01 Request One alarm record would be generated with the follow
457. ups 2 Complete the Input Groups form for each input group These fields must be set as follows Delay Time Boolean Type Input Group State Open Condition Short Condition Broadcast State Changes Alarm 3 Click Save 0 Individual Enabled Ignored Ignored No Should point to the alarm record generated for this input group 4 Click New to add another input group Figure 89 Sample input groups screen 8 Inputs Outputs Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones L Input Groups Inputs Output Groups Outputs Input Group Events Output Group Events gian JD oa Al EI EI x5 4 x a Define Input Group Parent input Groups Output Groups Description pH Ro2 L01 P01 001000 BA005 Facility GLOBAL Disabled Enabled Boolean Type O OR Any AND AI Individual No Q ves Alarm Input Group State Broadcast State Changes zm NIA Open Condition Ignored Detected Short Condition Ignored Detected Delay Time BLK 23 STA 13 Acknowledge e gt P H 0 Results 1 records 252 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Modifying an input group Follow these steps to modify an input group Note The Input Group description must follow the format described in Input
458. ur Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual Facility Integrator system provided by Siebe CBAS AIX Linux 263 Refer to your CBAS manual for dip switch settings Use the default settings Serial ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COM1 or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the CBAS communication program is started A standard splitter box Two pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to the standard splitter ports Refer to Figure 94 Figure 94 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F TO DB25M Picture Perfect Splitter System Port DB25F DB25M 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 7 7 8 8 20 20 Null modem cable to connect from the splitter master port to the Facility Integrator PC s serial port See figure below 264 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Figure 95 Cable pinouts splitter to Facility Integrator DB25M to DB9F Splitter Master Facility Integrator DB25F Port System
459. ure Perfect environment where two hosts have connectivity to a single AlphaCom Exchange Connectivity is achieved by using a splitter between the Picture Perfect system and the AlphaCom Exchange This allows the physical connection of the AlphaCom Exchange to an RS 232 serial port on each Picture Perfect host computer In a redundant configuration the AlphaCom interface software executes on both Picture Perfect hosts and both receive alarm notifications However only the interface software executing on the primary host communicates with the AlphaCom Exchange Whenever an alarm notification is received by the interface software it determines if it is executing on the primary host Alarm notifications received by the interface software executing on the redundant host are processed but output to the AlphaCom Exchange is suppressed In the case of a failover the mode on the redundant host will change to indicate that it is now the primary and the interface software will then conduct communications with the AlphaCom Exchange Software requirements The software requirements for the AlphaCom interface and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system If you are using a stand alone Picture Perfect system the following items are required e Picture Perfect Base base package e Picture Perfect Alphacom interface a1phacom package 27 Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items a
460. uter Receiver DB25F DB25F Shield 1 1 Shield Rxd 2 2 Rxd Txd 3 Txd 4 RTS 5 CTS 8 DCD SG 7 7 SG Figure 5 Overview of the Picture Perfect and Intercom interface Redundant system If you have a Picture Perfect redundant system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual e AlphaCom Exchange System e Serial Ports 29 AIX One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem Linux One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COM1 or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the AlphaCom communication program is started e A standard splitter box e Two pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to the standard splitter ports Refer to Figure 6 Figure 6 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M Picture Perfect System Splitter Port DB25F DB25M 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 7 7 8 8 20 20 Cable to connect from thesaplitier master pork io hei AlphaCoi Ex ha splitter master port to the AlphaCom Exchange See figu
461. variable contains the exact name of the file that is used for buffering the alarms and must be a complete file name with a path The default value is tmp CAD_pipe If you need to increase the number of alarms you may need to increase the size of tmp Contact GE Security Customer Support for assistance Alarm response states When the remote system responds to the alarms sent by RAN these responses are recorded into alarm history The response from the remote system is treated in the same way as a response from an operator sitting at a Picture Perfect terminal The response text is provided by the remote system The process state of the alarm is controlled by the AlarmDisposition variable The following are possible settings for this variable Table 17 Possible settings for alarm response states Settings Description PENDING A response has been made but the alarm has not been reset DISPOSE Removes the alarm if it has been reset otherwise it is marked as completed REMOVE A response has been made and the alarm has been reset PURGED Logs all alarms and deletes them even if they are not reset The default for AlarmDisposition is DISPOSE DO NOT CHANGE THIS VALUE unless you are an advanced user TCP IP configuration Since the RAN system communicates with the remote system using TCP IP protocol over the Ethernet network both the RAN and remote systems must know the port number of the RAN service The port number
462. w that Picture Perfect alarm is mapped to a CCTV system alarm number Picture Perfect treats alarms as a collection of information which includes Input group e Areas Host number The CCTV system distinguishes alarms by a unique three digit identifier per alarm location and condition Once you have set up the alarms on Picture Perfect you will need to set up the mapping of alarms to the CCTV system This procedure is accomplished by executing a script which requires operator input Note There is a one way communication between the Picture Perfect system and the CCTV switcher regarding alarms Alarms will only be sent from Picture Perfect to the CCTV switcher There will be no alarms sent from the CCTV controller to the Picture Perfect system The CCTV system will not send Video Loss or Sync Loss alarms back to Picture Perfect A successful system configuration of a CCTV interface for Picture Perfect involves the following steps e Defining input groups on page 58 Identifying location types on page 59 e Using SQL reports on page 60 Mapping CCTV monitored events on page 61 e Configuring and monitoring alarms in Picture Perfect on page 69 Defining input groups In the Picture Perfect system there are many possible sources of alarms The fundamental concept is that alarms are triggered through input groups There are several components of the system that use input groups These are Areas Doors Readers Input Points Micros
463. when DMP SCS 1 receiver messages are received you will need to configure an Output Group and a Output The output group must be linked to the input group for the SCS 1 message to trigger an output for that output group The instructions for setting up outputs and output groups are described in the Picture Perfect manual All fields and options in the Outputs form may not apply Monitoring alarms You are now finished with the basic configuration of the SCS package The SCS 1 messages that have been recognized through the input groups and linked to an alarm can be monitored through the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor Recognized alarms get recorded to the alarm history database table providing a permanent record of the alarm event For any alarm to be monitored or recorded the appropriate routing must be selected from the Alarms form for each alarm The operator will be able to respond and remove the alarm conditions from the monitor Certain Alarm Monitor fields that are displayed may not apply to SCS 1 alarms depending on the mapping that is designed for the interface The information of most use to an operator will be the Alarm Description and Location columns which correspond to the Alarm and Input Group record description fields respectively From this information the operator should be able to tell what type of device status and location of the reported alarm The complete message of the condition should be read from the SCS 1 system or from a prin
464. which requires operator input Note The AlphaCom interface uses the Picture Perfect CCTV backend process as it is an output interface As such CCTV reports will be used for determining locations For a successful configuration follow these steps 1 Defining input groups on page 31 2 Identifying location types on page 31 3 Using SQL reports on page 32 4 Mapping CCTV Monitored Events on page 33 Defining input groups In the Picture Perfect system there are many possible sources of alarms The fundamental concept is that alarms are triggered through input groups There are several components of the system that use input groups These are Areas Doors Readers Input Points Micros Hosts and Input Groups themselves All of these windows allow you to select an input group for the various events that can occur at these locations Only the Input Group window has a field to define the alarm associated with this group To trigger an AlphaCom event for an input point you should create an input group for that point only Then you can associate the AlphaCom event to the alarm on that individual input group and therefore the point itself Boolean input group alarms are not supported in this interface Identifying location types An area is a group of one or more readers and represents a location type A single area may be assigned to multiple readers and doors Areas are similar to input groups in they group a large number of readers together
465. will be removed from the database The alarm records that each input group points to will be removed as well but with one exception If the alarm record is associated with any other input group records outside of the ones to be removed no records will be removed and the user will be notified of this condition This situation must be corrected by the user before any records can be removed using the stngen tool The input group user interface can be used to correct this situation by re assigning the alarm that it is linked to so that it does not conflict with alarms that are going to be removed This is to prevent the accidental removal of alarm records to which other input group records are linked Note Any input group using the targeted input group prefix to be uninstalled that was created manually through the Picture Perfect Input Group Form will be removed That means it will be permanently lost if its data was not originally part of the input file 315 Using stngen uninstall Before you start e You must have root permissions to run the stngen tool The database must be running stngen will check this when the tool is invoked You must know the input group prefix used by the Stentofon interface that is being targeted for uninstallation Follow these steps to use the stngen tool to uninstall database records 1 2 3 4 2 Log in as a user with system permission Open a new window Type su root to become the root user
466. with cread clocal c Press Enter 9 Move to the field STTY attributes for LOGIN a Delete the default entry b Replace with cread clocal c Press Ene d Note the tty number assigned 10 If multiple interfaces will be configured or you intend to use video loss monitoring and alarm reporting capability repeat step 6 through step 9 as necessary for the additional ports 11 Press to exit the SMIT utility and complete the procedure Installing Picture Perfect base software If you have not yet installed the Picture Perfect base software refer to the Picture Perfect 4 5 Installation Manual for information about installing Picture Perfect base If you have previously installed the Picture Perfect base software continue with the next section Installing on a Redundant system For redundant configurations you must install the Picture Perfect Redundant System pprs package before installing the interface software If you have not yet installed the pprs software refer to the Picture Perfect 4 5 Redundant Edition User Manual for more information about installing the pprs package If you have previously installed the pprs software continue with the next section 14 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Installing the interface software Before proceeding with the installation e You will need the port name defined in the section Defining a port on page 11 and the baud rate You must stop the Picture Per
467. would create four input groups each with the following descriptions NFR1 ALARM SMOKE ION 905 NFR1 ACK AL SMOKE ION 905 NFR1 CLR AL SMOKE ION 905 NFR1 ACL AL SMOKE ION 905 The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation Trouble Message Type To recognize Trouble Message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt STATUS lt DEV TYPE lt LDD gt where IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters STATUS is one of the following TROUBL ACK TB CLR TBorACL TB DEV TYPE is one of the device types from the detector monitor module or control module types listed in Table 13 Device Types on page 236 e LDDis the loop number and detector module number L equates to the loop number 1 9 0 10 DD equates to the detector module number 1 99 For example to configure a SMOKE ION detector located at LDD 905 for the four available status types you would create four input groups each with the following descriptions I NFR1 TROUBL SMOKE ION 905 NFR1 ACK TB SMOKE ION 905 NFR1 CLR TB SMOKE ION 905 NFR1 ACL TB SMOKE ION 905 The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation Zone Disable Message Type To recognize Zone Disable message types use the following format in the input gr
468. x Burle Allplex CCTV Interface 2 alphacom Stentofon AlphaCom Intercom Interface 3 amdyn American Dynamics CCTV Interface 4 cbas Siebe Environmental Control Interface 5 commend Commend Intercom Interface 6 cstation Central Station Interface 7 est EST Fire Alarm Interface 8 firesine Firesine Fire Alarm Interface 9 grundig Grundig VAZ300 CCTV Interface 10 javelin Javelin J0326HI CCTV Interface 11 kalatel Kalatel KTD 312 CCTV Interface 12 maxpro Maxpro MAX1000 CCTV Interface 13 notifier Notifier Fire Alarm Interface 14 oh receiver Osbourne Hoffman Receiver Interfac v5 panasonic Panasonic Proteus 500 PFW Interface 16 panasonic550 Panasonic WJ SX550A Interface 17 panasonic650 Panasonic WJ SX650A Interface 18 pelco Pelco CM9750 CCTV Interface 19 pelcob New Pelco CM9750 CCTV Interface 20 ran Remote Alarm Notification System 21 scs DMP SCS 1 Alarm Interface 22 simplex Simplex System Interfac 23 stentofon Stentofon TouchLine Intercom Interface 24 stentofon9600 Stentofon P 9600 Intercom Interface 29 stentofon mch Stentofon Multiple Call Handler Intercom Interface 26 univ intr Universal Intrusion Interface 21 viper Vicon Viper VPS13xx Interface Enter product number s separated by to select q to quit Type the corresponding product number for example 11 to install the Kalatel KTD 312 CCTV Interface kalatel package and press Enter You will be asked to confirm your choice You have selected the following prod
469. x would be STNO1 and the next interface that is installed could be STNO2 356 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual The following values are unique to the STN interface do not change unless instructed by GE Interlogix CASI Icanon y The following values are setup based on your installation responses InpGrpPrefix STNO1 PortName dev tty5 PortBaud 9600 CharacterSize 8 Parity n StopBits 1 Xon y Xoff y cas db text stentofon9600 redundant cfg The presence of this file indicates that it is a redundant installation The file contains the names of the two redundant hosts and an indication of whether or not the interface is to run redundantly The following is an example of the contents of the Stentofon 9600 redundant configuration file cas db text stentofon9600 redundant cfg stentofon9600 redundant cfg 1 5 Copyright C 1995 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved stentofon redundant cfg 1 7 05 14 03 This file contains the configuration information for the STENTOFON 9600 INTERCOM interface for redundant operations These values are set up at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines RedundantOper Y RedundantHosts primaryl backupl 357 Interface data file backup and restore The Stentofon 9600 interface software requires several data files for its operation These files are created during the software installation process and are sum
470. y you are then prompted to select how the report should be sorted The options are Input Group Id Alarm Id Location Id alarm number or print the report without sorting Continue with step 4 4 Enter the number of the field you wish to sort on The file will be printed and the mapping options display which allows you to make another selection Refer to Figure 31 Example of printing a Kalatel CCTV alarm file on page 67 Figure 31 Example of printing a Kalatel CCTV alarm file CHEN He ke He He ke He e He He He He ke He ke ke ke ke ke ke k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k kkk kk kk kkk kk kk kkk kkk A Add a KALATEL CCTV controlled alarm D Delete an KALATEL CCTV controlled alarm x P Print a hardcopy of all KALATEL CCTV controlled alarms X Exit X kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Selection p Print the CCTV controlled alarm translation file Printer name 1p5 Sort the map file Y N y Input Group Id Alarm Id Location Id Kalatel Site Number or Command String Index oO oe WN PF Exit Print without sorting Enter the number of the field to sort on 4 Request id is 1p5 12 1 file kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk A Add a KALATEL CCTV controlled alarm D Delete a KALATEL CCTV controlled alarm P Print a hardcopy of all KALATEL CCTV controlled alarms X Exit
471. y defined facilities on your system will be displayed and you will need to make a selection If the number of facilities on your system exceeds 18 you will need to press to continue through the list until you get to the prompt When you observe the facility that you want to use by default with the interface keep track of the number This list will be similar to the following Acquiring facility list from database Please wait The following facilities are defined on your system and available to be chosen as the default facility 12 13 14 DEFAULT FACILITY Building 1 Building 2 Building 3 Building 4 Building 5 BLDG 1 2 3 4 5 AND PARKING BLDG 2 STUDIO BLDG 2 DESIGN AID Security Control Center Head Office Building 1 Garage Building 2 Garage Building 3 Garage Building 4 Garage Building 5 Garage Head Office Garage Penthouse VO OO JO 0 C0 Po rp J On UG GA b i Oe e co Press RETURN for more Los B 1 COMP ROOMS 20 REGENT COURT 21 Facility A 225 Facility B 235 Notifier Facility Enter the value of the default Notifier facility 1 23 1 Enter the number of the default facility to use with the Notifier interface This value will be used when creating input group and alarm records from the entries in the input file for which a specific facility is not specified The facility you selected will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it Y
472. y id that will be used for the input group and alarmrecords generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted to select a Default SCS Facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a Facility value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid facility id values create a report using as the SQL statement Select id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file Priority The seventh column is used to specify the priority that will be used for the alarm record generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted for the Default SCS Priority a number in the range 1 500 If a Priority value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Priority will be used 130 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Column descriptions for X Loop Bypass and Y Loop Reset Message Types Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Msg Type Account Loop User Alarm Facility Priority Description 1 char 5 digits 3 digits 3 digits 1 to 60 1 to 10 digits 1 Ge 2 characters digits X or Y 0 999 0 999 L or 1 500 1 2 147 483 647 Note Three additional optional fields may be specified identifying a CCTV switcher name see the list of Picture Perfect supported CCTV names in the section Mapping CCTV monitored events on page 61 such as kalatel or al
473. y1 You will be prompted for the CCTV alarm number Enter the CCTV alarm number The mapping file is checked to see if there are any lines that match the information entered Ifthere are no lines the message NO MATCHING LINES FOUND displays and the mapping options display e Ifa matching line is found you are asked to confirm the deletion If the entries are correct select y and all matching lines in the mapping file are removed and the mapping options display If you select n the mapping options display Refer to the section Exiting the program on page 68 for more information about making changes and exiting the program Refer to Figure 30 Example of deleting a Kalatel CCTV alarm on page 65 Figure 30 Example of deleting a Kalatel CCTV alarm f a ktd cctv map E He ke He He ke He He He He He He He He e He ke He He He He ke He KK KR ke ke ke ke ke KER k k k k k KER k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k kk kk kk kk kkk k A Add a KALATEL CCTV controlled alarm D Delete a KALATEL CCTV controlled alarm X Exit P Print a hardcopy of all KALATEL CCTV controlled alarms kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Selection d Deleting an outgoing CCTV controlled alarm Input Group ID 1 999999 102 Picture Perfect Alarm ID 1 999999 21 Location ID 1 999999 45 When installing you configured the kalatel interfaces to use the following port
474. your Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual Note AIX Linux Stentofon Intercom system provided by the manufacturer including e PMEF R processor board with Security Software Package 64401 Refer to the Stentofon Technical Documentation included with the Security Software Package 64401 for instructions on how to program the Stentofon to forward data to an external system This configuration must be done prior to installation of the Picture Perfect Stentofon Interface Software package A standard splitter box Serial ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COMI or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Stentofon communication program is started Two pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to the standard splitter ports Refer to Figure 113 Figure 113 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M Picture Perfect Splitter System Port DB25F DB25M 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 7 7 8 8 20 20 Cable to connect the splitter master port
475. ype and DEVICE FAIL type alarm This value in combination with the input group Prefix discussed in the following section enables the Universal Intrusion interface to look up in the input group along with the associated alarm for the specific alarm for the panel running that instance of the interface to determine if the alarm should be sent to Picture Perfect The combination Prefix Event Code must be the first item in the description field Other information may follow the input group Prefix and the Event Code portion of the description for a maximum of 60 characters The actual description of the alarm is set up in the Alarm form and tied to each input group Input group prefix The Universal Intrusion interface uses the concept of an input group prefix to more readily identify the input groups that are defined You must use the following combination of the Prefix and Event Code in the beginning of each input group record description Combine the Prefix with the Event Code of the messages you wish to recognize There must be one space between the Prefix and Event Code The Event Code is described in the section Alarms recognized by the Universal Intrusion interface on page 366 For example For an ALARM type message with Event Code 01010101 for the Universal Intrusion panel with Prefix UIO2 attached to port dev tty02 for a device in Perimeter A you could enter the Input Group Description a
476. ystem pprs package e Picture Perfect Commend interface commend package 96 Picture Perfect 4 5 Interface User Manual Hardware requirements The hardware requirements for the Picture Perfect stand alone and the Picture Perfect redundant system are listed below Stand alone system If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual e Commend Intercom controller provided by the manufacturer Refer to your intercom manual for dip switch settings Use the default settings Serial Ports AIX One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem Linux One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COM1 or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Commend communication program is started Cable to connect the Picture Perfect system to the Commend console port Refer to Figure 37 Figure 56 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to intercom system DB25F to DB9M Picture Perfect Intercom System Host Computer DB25F DB9M Tx2 3 Rxd Rx 3 2 Txd

User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents